249 39 9MB
English Pages xii,519 [542] Year 1984
Fuks Rokhlin Beginner’s Course in Topology
Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo
NUNC C O G NOSCO EX PARTE
THOMAS J. BATA LIBRARY TRENT UNIVERSITY
Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2019 with funding from Kahle/Austin Foundation
https://archive.org/details/beginnerscourseiOOOOrokh
Universitext
D.B. Fuks
V.A. Rokhlin
Beginner’s Course in Topology Geometric Chapters
Translated from the Russian by A. lacob With 17 Figures
Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo 1984
Dmitrij Borisovich Fuks Laboratory of Bioorganic Chemistry Moscow State University, Moscow, USSR Vladimir Abramovich Rokhlin Department of Mathematics and Mechanics Leningrad State University, Leningrad, USSR Andrei lacob Department of Theoretical Mathematics. The Weizmann Institute of Science. Rehovot 76100, Israel
Title of the Russian original edition: Nachal’nyj Kurs Topologii: Geome tricheskie Glavy. Publisher Nauka, Moscow 1977 This volume is part of the Springer Series in Soviet Mathematics Advisers: L.D. Faddeev (Leningrad), R.V. Gamkrelidze (Moscow)
AMS Subject Classification (1980): 54-01, 54A 05, 54Bxx, 54Cxx, 54Dxx, 54Exx, 55Pxx, 5 5 Qxx, 55Rxx, 57-01, 57M xx, 57Nxx, 57Rxx, 57Sxx, 58Axx, 58C 25, 58D10, 58D15, 58E 05
ISBN 3-540-13577-4 Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo ISBN 0-387-13577-4 Springer-Verlag New York Heidelberg Berlin Tokyo
Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data. Rokhlin, V. A. Beginner’s course in topology. (Springer series in Soviet mathematics) (Universitext) Translation of: Nachal’nyi kurs topologii / V. A. Rokhlin, D. B. Fuks. Bibliography: p. Includes index. 1.Topology. I. Fuks, D. B. II.Title. III. Series. QA611.R6513 1984 514 84-10657 ISBN 0-387-13577-4 (U.S.) This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically those of translation, reprinting, re-use of illustra tions, broadcasting, reproduction by photocopying machine or similar means, and storage in data banks. Under § 54 of the German Copyright Law where copies are made for other than private use, a fee is payable to "Verwertungsgesellschaft Wort” , Munich. © Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 1984 Printed in Germany Printing and bookbinding: Beltz Offsetdruck, Hemsbach 2141/3140-543210
Preface
This book is the result of reworking part of a rather lengthy course of lectures of which we delivered several versions at the Leningrad and Moscow Universities.
In these lectures we presented an
introduction to the fundamental topics of topology:
homology theory,
homotopy theory, theory of bundles, and topology of manifolds.
The
structure of the course was well determined by the guiding term elementary topology, whose main significance resides in the fact that it made us use a rather simple apparatus.
^n this book we have retained
ihose sections of the course where algebra plays a subordinate role. We plan to publish the more algebraic part of the lectures as a separate book. Reprocessing the lectures to produce the book resulted in the profits and losses inherent in such a situation:,,
the rigour has
increased to the detriment of the intuitiveness, the geometric descriptions have been replaced by formulas needing interpretations, etc.
Nevertheless, it seems to us that the book retains the main
qualities of our lectures: pedagogical features.
their elementary, systematic, and
The preparation of the reader is assumed to be
limited to the usual knowledge of set theory, algebra, and calculus which mathematics students should master after the first year and a half of studies. exercises.
The exposition is accompanied by examples and
We hope that the book can be used as a topology textbook. The most essential difference between the book and the
corresponding part of our lectures is the arrangement of the material: here we have followed a much more orderly succesion of topics.
However,
from our experience, a lecture course in elementary topology which exaggerates in the last respect is rather tedious and less efficient than one which mixes geometry with algebra and applications.
This
remark may serve as a warning to the teacher who would like to use our book as a guide. in its order;
In fact, it is by no means necessary to read the book
a reader who is interested in getting to the homotopy
groups or to any other topic sooner, can easily do so.
VI
Concerning the terminology and notation, we have tried to stick to standard usage, and have permitted ourselves only a few reforms.
For example, we do not use the terms "simplicial complexes"
or "CW-complexes", but simplicial spaces and cellular spaces?
not
"cofibrations", but Borsuk pairs;
not "fiber bundles"
products"), but Steenrod bundles.
There is even one term which we do
not use in the generally
accepted way:
(or "fibered
for us, a connected space
refers to what usually is called a linearly connected (or path-connected) space (we do not have a special name for the spaces which are usually called connected).
Furthermore, we have avoided using non
standardized notations for standard objects.
In fact, in the majority
of cases, our notation is just an abbreviation of the corresponding term and can be understood by itself: projection, skeleton,
in - for inclusion,
for example,
pr
dim - for dimension,
stands for ske - for
bs - for base, etc. Topology requires a very precise set-theoretic language, and
this compelled us to devote a special attention to this language; is illustrated by pp. 1 “ 4.
this
we emphasize that on these pages we only
list the terms and notations, assuming that the objects themselves are known. In this book we rarely refer to the history of topology.
We
have even departed from the tradition that some theorems bear the names of their real or imaginary authors.
In return, we willingly have used
names of topologists in the terminology and notations. The organization of the text and the system of references may be briefly described as follows.
Each Chapter is divided into Sections,
each Section - into Subsections, each Subsection - into Numbers.
The
chapters, sections and subsections have numbers and titles, while the numbers are denoted only by their numbers.
Each fact announced without
proof is called Information, and is distinguished from the rest of the text by this title.
To refer to a section, subsection, or number
within the same chapter, we do not indicate the number of the chapter, and references within a section or subsection are similarly abbreviated. Examples:
the entries
§1.2
(Section 2 of Chapter 1), Subsection 1.2.3
(Subsection 3 of Section 2 of Chapter 1), and 1.2.3.4
(No. 4 of Sub
section 3 of Section 2 of Chapter 1) are abbreviated, within Chapter 1, as § 2 , Subsection 2.3, and 2.3.4, respectively; entries is abbreviated within §1.2 is abbreviated within §1.2 respectively.
the second of these
as Subsection 3;
the third entry
and Subsection 1.2.3 as 3.4 and 4,
The Authors
Contents
Set-Theoretical Terms and Notations Used in This Book, but not Generally Adopted.................................
Chapter
1
TOPOLOGICAL
§ 1.
§3.
................................................................................................................
5
5 8 10
Topologies............................................. M e t r i c s ............................................... S u b s p a c e s ............................................. Continuous M a p s ....................................... Separation Axioms ..................................... Countability Axioms ................................ Compactness...........................................
21
CONSTRUCTIONS.............................................
26
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
26 27
Sums................................................... Products............................................... Q u o t i e n t s ............................................. G l u e i n g ............................................... Projective Spaces .................................... More Special Constructions............................ Spaces of Continuous M a p s ............................ The Case of Pointed Spaces............................. E x e r c i s e s .............................................
11 15 19
31 34
38 42 46 49 55
HOMOTOPIES.................................................
56
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
General Definitions ................................ P a t h s ................................................. Connectedness and k-Connectedness .................... Local Properties...................................... Borsuk Pairs........................................... CN RS-Spaces........................................... Homotopy Propertiesof Topological Constructions ... E x e r c i s e s .............................................
56 60 61 65 66 70 72 78
S P A C E S ...........................................................................................................................
81
CELLULAR SPACES AND THEIR TOPOLOGICAL PROPERTIES...........
81
Fundamental Concepts.................................... Glueing Cellular Spaces from Balls....................
81
Chapter CELLULAR
§1.
SPACES
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS....................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
§2.
1
1.
2.
2
86
VIII
§2.
3. The Canonical Cellular Decompositions of Spheres, Balls, and Projective Spaces................ 4. More Topological Properties of Cellular Spaces . . . . 5. Cellular Constructions ............................... 6. Exercises..............................................
88 89 94 98
SIMPLICIAL SPACES..........................................
99
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. §3.
Euclidean Simplices................................... Simplicial Spaces and Simplicial Maps................. Simplicial Schemes .................................... Polyhedra.............................................. Simplicial Constructions ............................. Stars. Links. Regular Neighborhoods................... Simplicial Approximation of Continuous Maps........... Exercises..............................................
99 101 105 106 107 114 118 119
HOMOTOPY PROPERTIES OF CELLULAR SPACES ...................
120
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Cellular P a i r s ........................................ Cellular Approximation of Continuous Maps............. k-Connected Cellular Pairs ........................... Simplicial Approximation of Cellular Spaces........... Exercises..............................................
120 123 126 130 132
Chapter 3 SMOOTH MANIFOLDS ...............................................
133
§1.
133
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS ...................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
§2.
§3.
§4.
Topological Manifolds................................. Differentiable Structures............................. Orientations.......................................... The Manifold of Tangent Vectors....................... Embeddings, Immersions, and Submersions............... Complex Structures .................................... Exercises..............................................
STIEFEL AMD GRASSMAN MANIFOLDS ...........................
133 141 150 156 161 166 171 171
1. Stiefel Manifolds...................................... 2. Grassman Manifolds .................................... 3. Some Low-Dimensional Stiefel and Grassman Manifolds ............................... 4. Exercises..............................................
171 177
A DIGRESSION: THREE THEOREMS FROM CALCULUS ...............
187
1. Polynomial Approximation of Functions................. 2. Singular Values........................................ 3. Nondegenerate Critical Points.........................
187 191 194
EMBEDDINGS. IMMERSIONS. SMOOTHINGS. APPROXIMATIONS . . . . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Spaces of Smooth Maps.................................. The Simplest Embedding Theorems....................... Transversalizations and Tubes......................... Smoothing Maps in the Case of Closed Manifolds . . . . Glueing Manifolds Smoothly ...........................
185 186
197 197
200 202 205 208
IX
6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Smoothing Maps in the Presence ofa Boundary.......... General Position...................................... Maps Transverse to a Submanifold..................... Raising the Smoothness Class of aManifold............ Approximation of Maps by Embeddings and Immersions....................................... 11. E x e r c i s e s ............................................
214 219 225 228
THE SIMPLEST STRUCTURE THEOREMS...........................
239
1. 2. 3. 4.
Morse F u n c t i o n s ...................................... Cobordisms and Surgery................................ Two-dimensional Manifolds ........................... E x e r c i s e s ............................................
239 243 255 263
BUNDLES..........................................................
265
§1 .
BUNDLES WITHOUT GROUP STRUCTURE...........................
265
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
General Definitions................................... Locally Trivial Bundles............................... Serre Bundles......................................... Bundles With Map Spaces asTotal Spaces................ Exercises.............................................
265 267 269 273 276
A DIGRESSION: TOPOLOGICAL GROUPS AND TRANSFORMATION GROUPS.....................................
276
1. 2. 3. 4.
Topological Groups ................................... Groups of Homeomorphisms............................. Actions............................................... Exercises.............................................
276 282 285 296
BUNDLES WITH A GROUP S T R U C T U R E ...........................
297
§5.
233 237
Chapter 4
§2.
§3.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. §4.
Spaces With F-Structure............................... Steenrod Bundles ..................................... Associated Bundles ................................... Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles............................. Exercises..............................................
297 299 304 308 311
THE CLASSIFICATION OF STEENROD BUNDLES ...................
311
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. §5.
Steenrod Bundles and Homotopies....................... Universal Bundles..................................... The Milnor B u n d l e s ................................... Reductions of the StructureGroup...................... Exercises..............................................
VECTOR B U N D L E S ........................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
General Definitions................................... Constructions......................................... The Classical Universal Vector Bundles ............... The Most Important Reductions of the Structure Group................................... Exercises..............................................
311 316 319 321 323 324 324 331 336 34 3 345
X
§6.
SMOOTH B U N D L E S ........................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Fundamental Concepts ................................. Smoothings and Approximations......................... Smooth Vector Bundles................................. Tangent and Normal Bundles ........................... D e g r e e ............................................... Exercises.............................................
346 350 353 359 364 371
H0M0T0PY GROUPS.................................................
373
§1.
THE GENERAL T H E O R Y .......................................
373
1. 2. 3.
37 3 378
Chapter
5
4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9. 10. 11. 12. § 2.
Absolute Homotopy Groups............................. A Digression: Local Systems ......................... Local Systems of Homotopy Groups of a Topological Space............................... Relative Homotopy Groups............................. A Digression: Sequences of Groups and Homomorphisms, and ^-Sequences....................... The Homotopy Sequence of a P a i r ..................... The Local System of Homotopy Groups of the Fibers of a Serre Bundle......................... The Homotopy Sequence of a SerreB u n d l e ............. The Influence of Other Structures Upon Homotopy Groups................................. Alternative Descriptions of the Homotopy Groups . . . Additional Theorems ................................. E x e r c i s e s ...........................................
THE HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF SPHERES AND OF CLASSICAL MANIFOLDS ................................... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
§3.
380 38 4 390 398 402 4 05 4 11 416 420 423 424
Suspension in the Homotopy Groupsof Spheres ......... The Simplest Homotopy Groups ofSpheres................ The Composition Product............................... Information: Homotopy Groups ofSpheres................ The Homotopy Groups of Projective Spaces and Lenses..................................... 6 . The Homotopy Groups of Classical Groups............... 7. The Homotopy Groups of Stiefel Manifolds and S p a c e s ................................. 8 . The Homotopy Groups of Grassman Manifolds and S p a c e s ................................. 9. Exercises..............................................
4 24 429 4 33 43 6
HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF CELLULAR SPACES .......................
445
The Homotopy Groups of One-dimensional Cellular Spaces....................................... 2. The Effect of Attaching Balls......................... 3. The Fundamental Group of a Cellular Space............. 4. Homotopy Groups of Compact Surfaces................... 5. The Homotopy Groups of Bouquets....................... 6 . The Homotopy Groups of a k-Connected Cellular Pair......................................... 7. Spaces With Prescribed Homotopy Groups ............... 8 . Eight Instructive Examples ........................... 9. Exercises..............................................
438 439 44 1 443 444
1.
445 446 448 45 1 45 3 45 5 459 45O
4^2
XI
§4.
WEAK HOMOTOP Y EQUIVALENCE................................. 1. 2. 3. 4.
§5.
THE WHITEHEAD PRODUCT..................................... 1. 2. 3. 4.
§6.
Fundamental Concepts ................................ Weak Homotopy EquivalenceandConstructions............ Cellular Approximations ofTopological Spaces......... Exercises.............................................
The Class w d ( m , n ) .................................. Definition and the SimplestProperties of the Whitehead P r o d u c t ............................. Applications......................................... Exercises.............................................
CONTINUATION OF THE THEORY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
463 463 468 472 478 478 478 482 484 486
OF BUNDLES.....................
487
Weak Homotopy Equivalence andSteenrod Bundles . . . . Theory of Coverings.................................. Orientations......................................... Some Bundles Over Spheres............................ Exercises.............................................
487 49 0 500 501 503
BIBLIOGRAPHY ...................................................
5 06
INDEX............................................................
508
GLOSSARY OF SYMBOLS.............................................
517
Set-Theoretical Terms and Notations Used in this Book, but not Generally Adopted
Mathematicians manage with a surprisingly modest collection of set-theoretic terms and notations, which can be roughly divided into three groups.
The first contains terms and notations which have attained
general recognition.
The terms and notations in the second group are
equally well-known, but can be understood differently or have varying connotations. The third group consists of terms and notations used less frequently. There is no need todefine terms from the first example, the notations
X U Y, X fl
Y,
X, x .. . x x I n the notations
and
union, intersection, and product of sets, or Imf
group.
For
for the f: X + Y,
and
fI : A -* Y for a map, its image, and its restriction are i^ understood in the same way by all people. The same is true for the notation
x e X
and the terms one-to-one (injective) map and map onto
(surjective map). For the sake of precision, we must usage set by
of terms and notations from the second group. 0.
i.e., the
We understand the notation equality
term countable set: sets.
say a few words about our
X c Y
X = Y is not excluded. we
The identity map
We denote the empty
in the broadest sense, The same is true for the
use it both for infinite countable and finite of the set
there is no ambiguity about
X
is denoted by
X, simply by
id.
id X ,
or, when
We shall say that a map
is invertible if it has an inverse, i.e., it is simultaneously injective and surjective. the set
X
We let
{x E X | ...}
denote the set of points
x
of
which satisfy the condition appearing instead of the three
dots. A family X^ with y £ M,
-*-s a maP a set M onto a set of objects defined by the formula p ^ X ^ .
Next our main task is to list the
terms and notations
appearing in this book and belonging to the third group.
2
Maps If X
may
denote
it by
eachmap
in: A -> X.
write If A f:
x h- f (x) , to
is a subset of a set
be considered as the map
we simply
f
A
Y
then the inclusion of
defined by the formula
xx .
If there isno ambiguity about
in. is a subset of
X
X,
such that
X and
B
f (A) ^ B
A
is a subset of
induces a map
A
in
We and
Y,
X,
then
ab f : A -* B,
and called here the abridgment (or compression) of the map
A,B.When there is no ambiguity
ab finstead of
ab f : A -> B .
usual restriction of
f
to
If B = Y,
where
(respectively,
Y),
(tp: X such that cp^ =
A and
B, one can write
then ab f
is just
the
A.
By a map of a sequence (Y,B1 ,.../Bn ) ,
about
(X,A ^ ,...,A^) (B^, ...,B^)
into a sequence are subsets of
X
we mean a sequence of maps A 1 -s-
Y , tp-Li ab cp .
tpn : An -►Bn )
Wedenote such a map by
(cp/cp^f •••/cp^):
(X ,A^ ,. ..,A^) ->(Y ,B^ , . ..,B^ ) .
If thesubsets
A, ,...,A and Bn,... ,B are fixed, then the map I n 1 ' n ^ f = (cp,cp^,. ../ X x x
make the
is closed if and only if
Obviously, every product
X
is
(obvious) remark is Hausdorff.
f^ x ... x fn : X^ x
Y. x ... x y of continuous maps f .: X „ Y ., ...,f : X 1 n ^ 1 1 1 n n continuous. Moreover, f^ x ... x f^ is open whenever
... x
x^
Y n
is are
open. 6 . If
X
is a metric space, then clearly
(dist (x^j ,x£) - dist(x 1 ,x2)| £ dist (x jj,x ^ ) + dist(x 2 ,x2>for any points x^,x 2 ,x^,x2 G X. This inequality shows that the function dist: X x X
IR
is continuous.
Properties of Products 7.
Every product of
T^-spaces is a
of Hausdorff spaces is Hausdorff. regular.
T -space.
Every product
Every product of regular spaces is
29
The first and second assertions are immediate. a product of
T3-spaces
X 1 ,...,Xn
T 3 ~space.
is a
We show that
Let
U
be a
(x^,...»x n)
in X^ x ... x x . Pick neighborhoods U ,...,U of the points x.,...,x , such that U„ x ... x u c: u, i n I n 1 n and fix neighborhoods V.),.. .,Vn of the same points with Cl V 1 c U , ■■•/ClVn cUn . Since C1(V 1 x ... x Vn ) = Cl V 1 x ... x cl Vn (see 3), one has Cl (V. x ... x v ) c: U . \ n neighborhood of
INFORMATION. normal; see [14]. 8.
S 1f...,S are dense sets in the spaces I n c x... x sn is obviously densein X^ x ... x x .
S1
then
There are product of normal spaces which are not
If
X „ ,...,X , 1 n Consequently,
a product of separable spaces is separable. If
, . . . , are bases of
xu
U 1 x ...
1 n X 1 x ... x x .
X ^ , . . . then the sets
EF form a base of the space n n ^ Consequently, a product of second countable spaces is
with
U
1
£ T
1
U
second countable. If now
r„,...,r are bases of X„ ,...,X at the points i n I n x.,...,x ,then the sets U. x ... x u with U. £ T U £ F , i n 1 n l i n n form a base of X^ x ... x x^ at the point (x^ ,...,x^) . Consequently, a product of first 9.
countable spaces is first countable.
Every product of metrizable spaces is metrizable.
In fact, we can say more: if then the formula
X ^ ,...,XR
dist ((x^ , ...,x^) , (x^ ,...,x^) ) = [£
defines a canonical metric on the product 10.
are metric spaces, (dist(x^,x|))2]
X^ x ... x x .
Every product of compact spaces is compact.
It suffices to consider a product of two spaces. and
Y
X x y.
be compact topological spaces, and let Consider an arbitrary refinement
sets of the form homeomorphic to x e X, A all
U x V Y
and
(see 1.1.13). Y
a finite collection
which covers
x
i = 1,...,n(x).
x y
of
be an open cover of
T
T,
consisting of open
Since the fibers
Ax = (U^x)
x v^x)}*?^
x x Y
are
of elements of
(see 1.7.2); one may assume that X,
X
is compact, one can find, for each point
Since the sets
cover the compact space
A
So let
Ux =
U± (x)
x £ U^x)
for
are open and
there exists a finite collection
A is a cover U ,...,U covering X. It is clear that A 1 = U™ x. x^ 3 D-l x. 1 m J of X x y. Finally, replacing each set W £ A' by a set of r containing
W,
we produce a finite subcover of
r.
30
11.
Every product of locally compact spaces is locally compact.
PROOF.
Let
ke neighborhoods of the points
E
EX. Then U . x ... x u is a neighborhood of (x.,...,x ) n n 1 n ^ I n X ^ x ... x x^. Furthermore, its closure Cl (U^ x ... x u^) is just ...,x
Cl
x ... x clU
(see 3), and so is compact whenever
Cl
, in
, ...,C1
are compact (see 1 0 ) .
An Application: A Method for Constructing Continuous Maps 12.
Proposition 14 below allows us to establish continuity
a map in some situations similar to those treated by Theorem 1.4.3, but where the latter is not applicable. 13 (LEMMA).
Suppose that the
and transforms the fiber
x^
into
x q
compact, then given any neighborhood is a neighborhood PROOF. Xq
U
of_
Xq
W
f (U x
with
Suppose that
is a subset of X, g: Y
->
for each
X
B
X,Y,Z
is a closed subset of
continuous map
g(B) c A.
: Y \ B + Q,
I_f
Q
themap
q
)
,
there
fix a neighborhood
Q
are continuous maps such that x E A, and
f(x^ x
f(U^. x v^) c=w.
and
Q is
c w.
Q)
compact, one can cover it with a finitecollection s set U = (1. i U . i=1 q± 14.
iscontinuous
If the space
of the point
q E Q,
of q
+ z
f: X x Q
a point.
such that
Given any point
and a neighborhood
map
Since
V ^1
of
1
,...,V ^
Q
is
. Now b
are topological spaces,
A
Y,
and
and
f (x x
f: X
x q
z
reduces to a point
Q)
is compact, then for each h: Y +
Z
given by
f (g (y) ) , (y) ) , for
y E Y \ B,
f (g (y)
y E B,
h (y) = x Q) ,
for
is continuous. PROOF. Y \ B;
The map
h
is clearly continuous at the points of
let us verify its continuity at the points
of Lemma 13, given any neighborhood a neighborhood
U
of
the point
last inclusion shows that is a neighborhood of y.
W
g(y)
y E B.
of the point such that
h(g” 1 (U)) c W,
f(U
By virtue
h(y), x
Q)
there is c:
w.
and finally note that
The g~ 1 (U)
31
Information 15.
The notion of a product of an infinite number of
topological spaces can be defined in a natural way; in
[3 ] for details.
product of compact spaces remains compact; see
3. 1. of
The quotient set
its partitions
X/p
p
thiscase too a
Quotients X/p
of a topological space
Equivalently, a subset of
X/p
pr: X -> X/p
is open.
is closed if its preimage is closed.
This topology is called the quotient topology,
and the set
the quotient topology is the quotient space of
thespace
pr: X -* X/p
X
with
by its
is continuous.
In the special case of a partition of
X/p
p. It is clear that
single
by any
is equipped with a natural topology: asubset of
is open if its preimage under the map
partition
X
set
A
the space X 2.
partitions
and the points of by
A
X \ A,
and
q,
and is denoted by
a
called the quotient
X/A. X
and
and a continuous map
into elements of
whose elements are
X/p is
Given two topological spaces p
p
Y
f: X
Y
which takes the
elements of
p
continuous.
This is a straightforward consequence of the definition of
the quotient topology. f
-1
(pr
-1
(U))
If
Indeed, if
is open in
= pr ^((factf)
^ (U) ) q
q,
the map
with respective
U -* Y / q
factf : X/p
is open, then the set
X, and so the identity
implies that
(factf)
is the partition of
Y
is
Y/q
^(U)
f
-1
-1
(pr
(U)) =
is open in
X/p.
into single points, then
= Y and p r : Y -* Y / q is the identity map. In this case, f h- factf defines a one-to-one correspondence between continuous maps
Y/q
X
Y
which are constant on the elements of the partition
continuous maps 3. continuous map
X/p
p,
Y.
In particular, the discussion above shows that given a f: X -* Y,
its injective factor
factf : X/zer(f) + Y
is continuous too.
The converse is also true: every map f : X Dr fact f be represented as the composition X --- ► X/zer(f) ------- ► Y, f
is continuous whenever 4.
and
factf
Y
can
and so
is continuous.
A continuous map whose injective factor is a homeomorphism
will be referred to as a factorial map (or a quotient map).
32
An equivalent definition: a map
f
of a topological space
X
into a topological space Y is factorial if f(X) = Y , and the preimage _i f (B) of a set B c: Y is open if and only if B is open. If we substitute closed sets for open ones, we obtain another equivalent definition. Obviously, the composition of two factorial maps is factorial, and any injective factorial map is a homeomorphism. plain that if then the map
f g
is factorial and the composition is continuous.
factorial imply
Moreover, it is
g
Also,
f
g ° f
is continuous,
continuous and
g ° f
factorial.
The projections onto quotient spaces form the main class of factorial maps. f (X) = Y
to be factorial is that 5.
f
a map
be an open or a
X
and
(X/p)/p'
p*
is a partition of
X/p,
X
projection
X -> X/p.
with
closed map. p
is a
then the quotient
is canonically homeomorphic to X / q ,
partitions
into the preimages of the elements
where
of
p'
q
under the
This canonical homeomorphism is defined as the
injective factor of the composite map
X
X/p
(X/p)p!,
a homeomorphism, because this composition is factorial 6.
the space
f : X-> Y
Taking quotients is a transitive operation: if
partition of space
A crude necessary condition for
If the sets X , then
A
and
B
and is truly
(see 4).
constitute a fundamental cover of
fact [in:A -> X] : A/AflB -> X/B is a homeomorphism. Given an open subset to show that
V = [pr: X -+ X/B]
U _i
of the quotient (fact in(U))
A/ADB,
is open in
it is enough X.
But this
is a consequence of the equalities V fl A = [pr: A -> A/ADB ] “ 1 (U) and B,
if
pr (A fl B) € U,
',
if
pr (A fl B) t U.
V fl B =
Properties of Quotient Spaces 7.
Obviously, a qutient space
and only if the elements of the partition
p
X/p
are closed.
satisfies axiom Also,
X/p
T^
i
33
is Hausdorff if and only if any two distinct elements of
p
disjoint saturated neighborhoods.
T^-space
Similarly,
(T^-space) if and only if for any element closed
subset
B
closed
subsetsA
of X
A
of p
and any saturated
(respectively, for any saturated,
and
B
of
X) such that
disjoint saturated neighborhoods in if and
is a
X/p
have
A fl B = 0,
A
and B
have
X.
Moreover, it is readily seen that X/p is second countable only if there isa countable collection of open saturated sets
in X such that any saturated set can be expressed as the of its subcollections.
union of one
It is immediate from 1.6.6 that a quotient of a separable space is separable. Similarly, 1.7.8 implies that a quotient of a compact space is compact.
Closed Partitions 8.
A partition
is a closed map.
of the space
p
is closed if
X
pr: X
X/p
An equivalent condition: saturations of closed sets
are closed. Obviously, a partition which has only one element that is not reduced to a point is closed if and only if this element is closed. 9. T^-space.
The quotient of a
T^-space by a closed partition is a
The quotient of a normal space by a closed partition is
normal. Since the first assertion is straightforward, all we have to show is that the quotient p
is a
T^-space.
subsets of
X.
neighborhoods.
Let
Since
of a
X/p
F^ X
and
T^-space
F^
by a closed partition
be disjoint, saturated, closed
is normal,
Furthermore, since
X
F^ p
and
F^
have disjoint
is a closed partition, the
saturations of the complements of these neighborhoods are closed, and now it is clear that the complements of these saturations are disjoint saturated neighborhoods of
F^
and
F^•
Open Partitions 10. is an open map. open.
A partition
p
of the space
X
is open if
pr: X
X/p
An equivalent condition: saturations of open sets are
34
If
p
is an open partition and
the saturation of
IntA
A is a saturated set,
is open, and hence
complements, we see thatthe saturation of
equals Int A ;
Cl A
is just
then
passing to
Cl A .
Therefore, in the case of an open partition, the interior and the closure of a saturated set are saturated. As it follows from 1.6.6, the quotient of a first countable (second countable)
space by an open partition is first countable
(respectively, second countable). 11. spaces
X
Let p
and
be open partitions of the respective
q
and Y. The product
morphic to the quotient
(X/p)
x
is canonically homeo-
(Y/q)
(X x Y)/(p x q ) .
The injective factor of the map
pr x p r : X x y
(X/p)
definesthis canonical map, which is a homeomorphism because
x (Y/q)
pr x pr
is open (see 2.5).
4. 1.
Glueing (or pasting) topological spaces is a composite
operation which consists quotient.
of taking a sum andsubsequently passing
More precisely, suppose
topological spaces and
p
hy_ (or according to) p.
xv is termed the setsimmv (Xy ) f: X/p Y, if and
that
{
X/p
to a
isa family of
is a partition of the space
we say that the quotient space Xy
Glueing
X =
J Lxu •
Then
is obtained by glueing the spaces
The composite map
X JE2U X/p v-th immersion and is denoted by yield a fundamental cover
where
Y
imm^ .
of X/p,
Clearly, the
and a map
is an arbitrary topological space, is continuous
only if all the compositions
f 0 imm^
are continuous.
Unions 2. Let that for each pair . In addition,suppose
be a family of topological spaces. (y,y’) £ M x m there is given a subset A that for
each pair(y,y')
an invertible map (i) (ii)
, , = Xy
and
cf>^, (Auy ,fl h v v „)
€ Mx m
there
Suppose c X UP’ y is given
such that:
y = id Xy ,
forany
= Ayly flA y ) y l (
y £M;
and the
diagram
35
is commutative for every ii the subset of
X ^ AVy * J L V
J
[x^
The sets
y,y',p" £ M.
For
x £ | |x , y
consisting of all the points
Bx
in^ (cj)^ (x) ) ,
B x where
are pairwise disjoint and define a partition of
The corresPonding quotient space is called Xy by (or a l o n g ) the maps ^yy»-
spaces
denote by
the union of the
This construction is a special case of glueing, when all the immersions cj)^,
i^y
are injective.
Moreover, assuming that all the maps
are homeomorphisms and that the sets
closed, we see at once that all the maps In the general case, a union of
Au u » i™^
are aH
open or all
are embeddings.
T^-spaces is clearly a
T^-space. 3.
Often the union construction is employed when all the
spaces ^
X„ are subsets of a set X and cover X, while A . and y yy ’ are given by Ayy> = Xy n Xy » and ^yy• = id- In this situation, conditions 2 (i) and 2 (ii) are automatically fulfilled, and one may describe the union of the
X y ’s
the following topology: a set the intersection any
C n X^
simply as the set
C c: X
X
equipped with
is open (closed) if and only if
is open (respectively, closed) in
X^
for
y E M. We devote some special attention to the case where the
topology of each set X.
X
is induced by some topology already given on
Then our construction produces a new topology on
X.
It is clear
that the sets open (closed) in the old topology remain open (respectively, closed) in the new topology. X
n X ,
are open in their sets
then the new topology on set
X ;
y
Moreover, if all the intersections
X
X
y
(endowed with the initial topology),
induces the initial topology back on each
the same holds whenever all the intersections
closed in their sets
X
y
Xy.
Limits and Filtrations 4.
Let
X q ,X ^ ,...
be topological spaces, and let
fl X ,
y
are
36
V
X.j, ^
xo
-> X ^ , ___
be embeddings. t>ki (Xk i) f
k-1
Set if
k ' < k'
if
k’ ^ k,
if
k1 = k,
A.
kk'
V and ab (cj)k - 1 id Xk'
^kk'
o ... o rf)k )] - 1 ,
[ab ((¡)^,
The union of the spaces
if
is well-defined because
conditions 2(i) and 2 (ii) are obviously satisfied. the limit of the sequence
k 1 > k,
and
denoted by
This union is called limiX^.,^)
or
limX, • k A specific property of the limit construction is that the maps imm, : X, + lim X, K
Xk
K
K.
are embeddings: indeed, every closed subset
is the preimage under
imm^
of some closed subset of
A
of
limX^ ,
for
example, of imn^, (Clx (4>k . « 1 ° ••• ° 4>k (A) ) k
U .*=k+1
Obviously, if then all the sets imm^ix^)
°Pen (closed) in + i f°r aH are open (respectively, closed) in
k'
lim(Xk ,(J)k ) . Suppose that ^ Xk + 1^ another sequence of topological spaces and embeddings, and that for each k there is given a continuous map
fk : Xk
X£ ,
so that all the diagrams f,
X,
xk vk k +1
k+1
are commutative. continuous map
Then the rule
f(imm, (x)) = imm, (f, (x)) K K K f: lim(Xk ,k ) -+■ limiX^,^) (see 3.2); f
the limit of the sequence 5. of
limX^
k +1
Ijf
f^,^,...,
X 0 ,Xr ...
are
and is denoted by
defines a is called lim f^ .
T.^-spaces, then every compact subset
is contained in one of the sets
imm^(X^) .
37
This is a consequence of 1.7.6. 6.
in
Xk + 1
If_
are normal spaces and
for every PROOF.
k,
then
X^j
x -| x
=i ^ (x., ) ,cp(Xl ,x2 ,1 ) = in2 (x2) .
that the quotient space of x2) ^ (X^ U X2)
may be alternatively defined
jc
is given by
(pr(x,x n ,t)) = ((1 -t)jc A
x £ (... (X1 * X0) * X,)...)* X I J n— I multiplication of a point of con X^ x . . .
where
A
I
.
n-1
x n
£X, n x conXn_^
(x),pr(x n ,t)),
and by
t £ I; 1 -t
the
is
defined by the rule (1 -t)(pr(x 1 ,t1 ),...,pr(xn- 1 /tn_1)) = = (pr (x1 , (1 -t) t j , ...,pr (xn - 1 , (1 -t) tn-1) ) . Clearly, the image of the embedding
jc 1,‘''
{ (pr(x.,t.) ,...,pr (x ,t )) £ con X. x 1 1
n n
... x con X
I
n
v n
is precisely
I t.+...+t \
n
= 1},
which allows us to identify the iterated join (...((X 1 * x2) * X )...) * Xn 5. the two joins morphic.
with this set.
The ^-operation is associative, meaning, as usual, that (X^ * X2) * X^
* (X2 * X^)
and
The canonical homeomorphism
are canonical homeo-
(X^ * X 2) * X^ -* X^ * (X2 * X^)
is the composition of the canonical homeomorphism x
* (X2 * X^)
(X2 * X^) * x -| with the suitablecompression
canonical homeomorphism + con X 2
X con X^
con X 2
x con X^
of the
x con X^
X con X 1 .
A consequence of the associativity of the ^-operation is that the multiple join spaces
X 1 * ... * X r
is meaningful for any topological
x ^ /.../Xn . 6.
The product
con X^
x ... x con Xn
is canonically
44
homeomorphic to
con(X^ * ... * Xr ).
The canonical homeomorphism con(X, * ... * X ) + con X. x I n i
... x con X
n
is defined as pr(jc“ 1 1 '*
(pr(x1 ,1^) , . . . ,pr(xn ,tn ) ) ,t) ~
n
(pr(x^,tt^ /max ( , ..., 7.
* and
con Sm
and
su Sm
)), ...,pr (x^,tt^/max (t ^ , ...,t^ ) ) ) .
are canonically homeomorphic to
D™
o m+1 S
The canonical homeomorphisms
Dm 1
con Sm
and
su Sm -> Sm
are defined by the formulas pr((X l ,...,Xm + 1 ) ,t) H. (tX l ,...,tXm + 1 )
and pr ( (x f . . . ^x m+1 ) / t ) 8.
The join
»
X * D°
(X1 Sin Tit f . . . /Xm+1 s i n TTt ,COS 771) .
is canonically homeomorphic to
con X .
The join X * S is canonically homeomorphic to su X . The join k k+ 1 X * S is canonically homeomorphic to the iterated suspension su X; m^ m2 m +m2 +1 in particular, S * S is canonically homeomorphic to S The canonical homeomorphism pr(x,0,t) *+ pr(x,t).
con X
The canonical homeomorphism
given by the formulas *+ pr(x,(1-t)/2).
X *
pr(x,1,t)
*+
pr (x, (1 +t )/2) ,
is given by
X *
su X
is
pr(x,-1,t) h-
Finally, the canonical homeomorphism
X * Sk
suk +1 X
is the composite map k V— i v n 1■ sur_1X * su Sk_r
-> sur_1X * Sk_r * S°
- sur"1X * S° * Sk"r - surx * Sk"r . 9.
Combining the canonical homeomorphisms constructed in
6 -8 , we obtain the composite homeomorphisms
m
s
m
* ...
* s
m
s
m
* ...
*s
n
m * s n
+m +1 n -
...
^
“ '1
iun
D
x ... x D
m - —i
x
m -i~1 -> con (S * ... * s and
m D
m1 - 1
0
ml - ^ -*■ con S
m _1
*D * . . . * S n
-* COn(S
m i_1
n * D * ...
0 con D
X
X
...
X
X D
x
...
n»1 Th er e fo re , the jo in S * and the jo in Dml * . . . * m.+ . . . +m +n-1 S 1 n the b a l l respectively.
m -1 * ... * con S n n
* D -*■ i~ 1
* S
n m _1 * D * s n ) ->-
mn - 1 - ^ con S
m. m D x l x . . . x D n m1 1 m D
... x con S n
m 1+. ..+m -1 m. + .-.+m ) ->■ con S n -*■ D n
m -1 -*■ con S
m * ... * D
S
m -
-*■ con S
n m -1 con D x con S n -*
X
m x I x D n -> m
x D n
x D
m,+...+m +n-1
x D n - >- D
n
m m1 m . . . * S , the product D x ... x d n, Dmn are c a n o n i c a l l y homeomorphic t o the sphere m + . . . +m m1+...+ m +n-1 D n , and the b a l l D 1 n ,
The Mapping Cylinder and the Mapping Cone 10. attaching the
Let
f :X ^ ->
product X^ x I
be a continuous map. to X^
(x,1 ) ►>f (x),is called themapping Cyl f .
cylinder of imm2 (X2)
The sets
imm^ (X^ x 0)
and
Cyl f ,
and the sets
imm^(x
bases of
generatrices. and
by the map
X2 #
x
f, and isdenoted by x € X^
are its X^
and they are usually identified with these two spaces; the
a canonical retraction
rtf : Cyl f -> X2 ,
rtf (imm^(x,t)) = imm^(x,1) [ = f (x) ] . map X, ^ 2 —
f.
X^ x 1 4
Clearly, the bases are canonically homeomorphic to
generatrices are canonically homeomorphic to
equals
of
are the lower and upper
with
I)
The result
cyl £
x2
I.
Moreover, there is
defined on
imm^ (X x I)
as
It is evident that the composite
46
If
X2 = X 1
and
f = id X^ ,
homeomorphic to the cylinder over 11. the space conf ,
con X ,
defined in 1).
Let
topological space B^,...,Bn
is canonically
X^ x i.
denoted by
f: X^
X^
(do not confuse it with Conf
= Cyl f/X^ .
Spaces of Continuous Maps
C(X,Y) X
Con f
Equivalent definition:
7.
e C (X,Y )
Cyl f
The mapping cone of the continuous map
X^
1.
X^,
then
be the set of all continuous maps of a
into a topological space
such that
Y.
(p(A^ ) c B ^ , ...,cf)(A^) c B^ ,
are given subsets of
C (X ,A ^,...,A ^ ;Y ,B ^,...,B^) .
X
and
Y,
The set of all maps where
A 1,...,A^
and
respectively, is denoted by
It may be interpreted as the set of all
continuous maps
(X,A. , ... ,A ) -+ (Y,B. , ...,B ) . I n I n We equip C(X,Y) with the compact-open topology: by definition,
this is the topology with the prebase consisting of all sets with
A
compact and
B
open.
C(X,A^ ,...,A^ ?Y ,B ^ ,...,Bn ) If
Y
Together with
C(X,Y),
all the sets
become topological spaces.
is a point, then
C(X,Y)
reduces to a point.
is discrete and consists of the points
x„,...,x , then I n canonically homeomorphic to the product Y x ... x Yof n the space
Y;
this homeomorphism is given by
To each there
pair of continuous maps
corresponds a mapping
(j) h- g o 0 o f .
C(X,A;Y,B)
C(X,Y)
cf>-+ ($
C(X,Y)
X is
copies
of
(x^) , ..., (x )) .
f: X ’ -> X
+ C(X',Y'),
If
and
g: Y -> Y 1
given by therule
This mapping is continuous, and we shall denote it by
C(f,g). 2.
I_f
Y
Indeed, if such that
is a Hausdorff space, (p,ip E C(X,Y)
(J)(x) ? ^(x). Let
and
U and V
$
then sois
C(X,Y).
^ \jj, then
there is
be disjoint neighborhoods of
the points (x) and i|;(x). Then C(X,x;Y,U) and disjoint neighborhoods of the points $ and \p. 3.
If
is metrizable.
X
is compact and
Moreover, if
Y
Given
$ £C(X,Y),
a finite number of balls (see 1.7.11).
is metrizable,
are
then C(X,Y)
defines a metric on
the set
0(X )
C(X,Y),
can be covered
of an arbitrarily small radius
It is clear that
neighborhood of the point
Y
C(X,x;Y,V)
is equipped with a metric, then
dist ((J>,ip) = suPxex dist ((x ) , ip (x) ) compatible with its topology. PROOF.
x £X
$,
0/
= il®= 1 C (X ,“1 (U±) ;Y ,Ui)
is a
contained in the ball of radius
2e
by e
is
47
centered at 4). Therefore, every ball in hood of its center. On the other hand, if with
0(A) cz B,
then
Dist((j>(A),Y \ B)
A c X
C(X,A;Y,B)
centered at
C(X,Y)
contains a neighbor
is compact and
B c Y
is open,
contains the ball with radius
(J) (see 1 .7.15) .
Therefore, every
neighborhood of Z .
To prove the first assertion, pick a point set
and
[ V (x)] (y) = cj)(x,y)
C(Y,Z) be a continuous mapping, and
is Hausdorff and locally compact.
= [^(x)](y)
and
X q € X,
Then it is enough
a compact
to exhibit a
(pV (U) c: C(Y,B;Z,C).For each point
of
x^
and
ch(U x v ) c C, and then extract a finite cover ^ Y Y from the collection {Vy y } t 0r s0 . It is clear that
y V
such that
,...,V of B s s U = H _L-iy. ._1 U is a 1
48
neighborhood of
xQand that
(f>(U x B) c= U ? *
cj>(U
1
remains to remark that the inclusion
6
(U
x
b)
cz
x v ) C(X,C(Y,Z))
defined by the r
X, Y
and
The continuity of the mapping just
Assume that
Hausdorff and locally compact. and a point A
Q
of
X x Y,
q E Q.
q x Cl Vq ) - t|j is continuous. It is readily see that the mappings V A h- (j) and ip ip are inverses of one another.
49
A Surprising Application 8.
Let
f: X ->• X 1
be a factorial map.
Hausdorff and locally compact, then the map is factorial.
fxidY:XxY-*X'x
One can assume that X' = X/zer(f) and that projection X -> X/zer(f) . Consider the projection p r : X x Y ->• (X x Y)/(zer(f) Pr V : x
x zer (id Y) ) .
C (Y , (X x Y)/(zer(f)
of the partition
zer(f),
fact prV : X 1
If the space
f
Y
Y
is the
The mapping
x zer (id Y) )
is constant on the elements
and hence it induces continuous mappings C (Y , (X x Y) / (zer (f) x zer(idY))
and (fact prv)A : X' x y -+ (X x Y)/(zer(f) x zer(idY)). It it clear that the second of these mappings is the inverse of the injective factor of factor of
f x i d Y : X x Y ^ X ' 9.
and f x
f x i d Y i X x Y + X '
Let
f: X
X'
g :Y ->• Y 1
Yare Hausdorff and locally compact, g:
x x Y -+ X' x y'
Thus the injective
is a homeomorphism.
x y
and
x y.
be factorial
maps.
If
X1
then the map
is factorial»
In fact, one can express
fx g
as the composition
f x id . id x q X x Y — ---- — >X' x Y ------ X' x Y' and recall that a composition of factorial maps is again factorial.
8. 1.
The Case of Pointed Spaces
In the sequel, the class of topological spaces equippe
with a simple additional structure - a distinguished point (i.e., topological pairs
(X,xQ ),
where
xQ
is a point) will play an
important role; we call these spaces pointed spaces, and call the distinguished point a base point.
The constructions described in the
previous subsections must be naturally modified when applied to such spaces.
For some of these construction, the modification entails
merely the addition of a base point to the resulting space: for example, the quotient space of pointed space
(X,xQ)
has the natural base point
50
PIt (Xq ),
the product of the pointed spaces
the natural base point from map
X
(x^,...,x ),
x
yQ ,
has
and the space of continuous maps
into a pointed topological space
const: X + Y,
(X^ ,x^ ),..., (X^x^) (Y,Yq )
contains the constant
and hence has the natural base point
const.
Other constructions such as the sum, suspension, and join need more serious modifications. We shall describe these modified constructions below, and also introduce a new one - the tensor product of pointed spaces.
In every
case, pointed spaces produce pointed spaces, and base point-preserving maps again produce base point-preserving maps. factf ,
C(f,g),
and
f^ * ... x fR
We remark that the maps
preserve base points whenever the
initial maps have this property. We use the symbol
bp
as a general notation for the base
points.
Bouquets and Tensor Products 2.
The construction below replaces the sum construction f
pointed spaces. Let
be a family of topological spaces with base
points . The quotient space of the sum J Lye^ Xy ky the subset consisting of all points in^(x^) is called the bouquet (or the wedge) of the spaces the numbers
,
and is denoted by
1,...,n,
^
^
consists of
we also write
(X. ,x1 ) V ... V (X ,x ) . The point II n n c pr ° in^(x^) E V(X^,x^) does not depend on v; it iscalled the center of the bouquet V(X ,x ), and is taken as its base point. The bouquet
V(X ,x ) y
y
is obviously a union of the spaces ^
(see 4.2), and so there exist the embeddings maps
Prv : V^Xy'xy)
,
imm^:X^
V(X
,x ).
X
y
The
defined by xv ,
if
v ’ / v,
x,
if
v 1 = V,
prv (immv ,(x)
are specific to the bouquet construction. and pr^ ° imm^, = const if v 1 f v. If
M
Clearly,
pr
V
° imm
also indexes another family of pointed spaces
and a family of continuous maps
f^: X^
Y^
such that
then the map fact y ) : V(Xy ,xy) + V(Yy ,y ) continuous; we denote it by V f y
V
= id X
v
(Y ,v ) y
y
f (x ) = y ,
is well-defined and^
51
3.
Let
x »(x,x2,- ..,xr )
(x^
,x^
( x ^ ,x^)
[x £ X^] , ...
definecanonical embeddings in^,...,in^.
be pointed spaces.
, x » (X l ,... /xR_1,x )
The
rules
[x € X ],
X„ -► X„ x ... x x , .... X -*X x ... x x ! 1 1 n' n 1 n1 Moreover, the rule x (pr^ (x) , ...,prn (x))
denoted
by
defines
a canonical embedding
(XwX. ) V . . .V (X ,x )-> X. x ... x x , 1 1 n n 1 n which allows us to regard the bouquet (X„,x ) V ... V (X ,x ) as a I t n n subspace of X x ... x x . Clearly, in .: X . -► X. x ... x x is the I n 1 1 1 n composition of the embedding imm.: X. -+ (X.,x.) V ... V (X ,x ) with 1 1 1 1 n n the inclusion (X ,x.) V ... V (X ,x ) -+■ X.x ... x x , while the 1 1 n n 1 n projection pr : (X ,x. ) V ... V (X ,x ) -v x . is the restriction of i l l n n 1 p r .: X . x ... x x ■> X .. I 1 n 1 The quotient space is called the by
(X. x ... x x )/[(X.,x.) V ... V (X ,x )] I n i l n n tensor product of the spaces X^,...,X , and is denoted
( X . , x . ) ® ... ®
II £ (X^/x^) ® ...
(X ,x ) . The pointpr[ (X.,x ) V ... V (X ,x )] £ n n II n n ® (X^/X^) is called the center of the tensorproduct
(X ,x ) ® ... ® (X ,x ), and is taken as its base point. I I n n The tensor product is a commutative and associative operation: there are obvious canonical homeomorphisms ■> (X2/x 2) ® (X^x^)
and
(X^,x^) 0 (X2 ,x2) -*
(X^ ,x^ ) ® [ (X2 ,x2) ® (X3 ,x3),bp] ->
t(X^/X^) ® (X2 ,x2),bp] ® (X^,x^); the more general equality
this is also the way we understand
[(X^,x^) ® ... ® (X^_^,x^_^),bp] ® (xn 'xR ) =
- (X1 ,x1 ) 0 . .. ® (Xn ,xn ) . If
(Y.,y.),..., (Y ,y ) are other pointed spaces and 1 1 n n f : X ^ -> Y ^ , ...,f^ : X^ -* Y^ are continuous, base point-preserving maps, then the map
fact(f. x ... x f ): (X.,x.) ® ... ® (X ,x ) -> 1 n 1 1 n n (Y^,y^) 0 ... ® (Y^^y^) is well defined and continuous; we denote it c
by
f . 0 ... 0 f . 1 n
Cones, Suspensions, and Joins 4.
The cone over the pointed space
quotient of the usual cone is denoted by
con(X,xQ).
con X -> con(X,xQ) base point.
con X
by its generatrix
The image of
is the vertex of
con(X,xQ),
The image of the base of
con X -* con(X,xQ)
is the base of
pr(xQ x I) con X
con(X,xQ);
(X,x^)
is defined as
pr(xQ x I),
and
under the projection
and is taken as its
under the projection this projection carries
the first base onto the second one, and thus allows us to identify the base of
con(X,x^) with X. If (Y ,y q ) is another pointed space and
f: X
Y
is
52
continuous, with f (xQ ) = y 0 ' then the maP fact con f : con(X,xQ) con(Y,yQ) is well defined and continuous, and we denote it simply by con f . Equivalently, one may describe space of the cylinder 5.
X x I
by
con(X,xQ)
(X x 0) U (x^ x I).
The suspension of the pointed space
as the quotient of the usual suspension pr(xQ x I),
and is denoted by
under the projection
suX
as the quotient
su X
su(X,xQ) .
su(X,xQ)
(X,x^)
is defined
by its generatrix
The image of this generatrix
is the vertex of
su(X,xQ )
and
is taken as its base point. If
(Y, y^)
continuous, with s u (Y,Yq )
is another pointed space and
f(Xg)
= yQ , then the map
f: X
Y
is
fact su f : su(X,xQ ) -+
is well defined and continuous, and we denote it simply by
su f . Equivalently, we may decribe of the cylinder
X x I
by
su
(X x (0 U 1)) U (xQ x I),
(X,Xq ) 0 (1/(0 U 1) ,bp) = (X,Xq ) ® (s\ort^). description:
as the quotient space
(X,X q )
i.e., as
Another equivalent
su(X,Xg) = con(X,XQ)/X.
6.
The join
of the pointed spaces
(X^ ,x^ )
and (X^fX^)
defined as the quotient space of the
usual join X^ * X^by its
generatrix
denoted by (X^,x^)
image of
pr(x^ x x^
xxi) , and is
pr (x^ x x^ x
* (X2 ,x 2 ) as its base point. -+ (X^,x^)
If f^ : X^ -* Y^
is the center of
(Y^,y^) and
(Y 2 ,y 2)
and
f2 : X 2
(X^x^)
and is taken
The canonical homeomorphism (su (X1 ,x1) ,bp) V (su (X2 fX2) ,bp)
(X^x^)
=
(X2 ,x2),
the
su((X^,x^) V (X2 ,x2 ),bp)
is given by [x € X± ,
m su(S ,ort^) ,
are canonically homeomorphic to respectively.
and
is canonically homeomorphic
immi (pr (x,t) )
m con(S ,ort^) ,
f ^ (x^ )
the maP fact(f 1 * f2> : ( X ^ x ^ * (X2 ,x2) -> d^fined and continuous, and we denote it
bouquet (su(X^,x^) ,bp) V (su(X2 , ^ 2 ) 'bp) to su((X1 /x 1) V (X2 /X2 )/bp).
8.
* (X2 ,x2),
are another pointed spaces, and
For any two pointed spaces
pr (immi (x) ,t)
->
Y 2 are continuous maps such that
= y 1 and f 2 (X 2 ^ = Y 2 'then (Y-j/Y-j) * simply by f^ * f2 . 7.
* (X^,x^ ) • The
under the projection X^ * X 2
I)
is
Dm+1,
and
s m+1,
i = 1,2].
(Sm ,ort1) * (Sn ,ort ) and
s m+n+1f
The canonical homeomorphism su(Sm ,ort
) -+■ Dm+1
is defined
pr ((x1 ,. ..,xm+1) ,t) h- (tXl + (1 -t) ,tx2 ,. ..,txm+1) .
as
Sm+1
The canonical homeomorphism su (Sm ,ort.j ) the generatrix passing through the point XT\^
S
if
with center x = ort^) ;
pr(x,t)
as
(ort^ + x)/2 t
x G Sm onto the circle on
(which degenerates to the point
varies from
0
1,
to
xm+>| ^ 0
ort^
the image of the point
moves uniformly on this circle, starting from
continuing into the half space
transforms
ort^ ,
and
(see Fig. 1). First base
s m+n+1
Finally, the canonical homeomorphism
(Sm ,ort^) * (Sn ,ort^) +
j_s defined on the bases
by the formulas
/
»
(x1 '* * *,Xm+ 1 ) and
and
and maps
/
/-v
a
^
, U , . . . , U ,
x /3 x 2 t• • • r
the generatrix joining the points
the arc of the great circle on x 1,
sn
3x1+1 x /3 x /3 /3(1-x ) 1 ^ m*t" l 1 ( 4 ' ~2 '**•' 2 /0 /---/0 , 4 ) 3X.+1
( x^/ » » * / X^ +^ ) H ' (
and
Sm
sm+n+
x E S™
2
\
/1 /J(xr 1) 9 4 and
'
x 1 E Sn onto
which joins the images of
x
in such a way that the lengths are linearly transformed (see
Fig. 2). 9.
Since
con(Sm ,ort^) = (Sm ,ort^) ® (1,0) (see 4), and A su(Sm ,ort1) = (S (Ort^ 0 (S jort.j) (see 5), the homeomorphisms con(Sm ,ort1) -> Dm+1 n ^ 1
and
su(Sm ,ort.|) -> Sm+1 ,
to the canonical homeomorphisms
defined in 8 , lead for
54
and Dn = (S1 ,ort.) 0 ... 0 (S^ort.) 0 (1,0). v------ ]-----v-----------n- 1 Now one can define the maps id ® ... ® id ® pr: Dn = (S ,ort^) ® ... 0 (S ,ort^) ® (I/O)
->
(s\ort^) ® ... (s\ort^) ® (1/(0 U 1) ,bp) = Sn , and (pr ® ... ® pr ® id I) ° pr:
In = I x ... x i -v
(1/(0 U 1) ,bp) 0 ... 0 (1/(0 U 1) ,bp) 0 (1,0) We denote them by Int Dn whileID
homeomorphically onto
and
fact DS : Dn /Sn ^
Sn
the quotient space
The Mappings
DS
Dn /Sn ^
base point-preserving mapping
Z
in ^
and
preserving mapping, and suppose that ^
n ^ 1 Sn .
C(Y,y0 ;Z,zQ)
X
and
(Z,Zq )
be pointed topologica
is continuous and preserves base = C (X,xQ ;C (Y,y0 ;Z/z0) ,const) given
bythe formula
$ »
(see 10)
^
is continuous.
If
X
and
Y
are Hausdorff and compact, then this mapping is a homeomorphism and its inverse is given by the formula The preimage of under
the mapping
which
shows that
$ h- C(X
(Y,yQ),bp;Z ,zQ)
X
Y , Z)
ip w*
and ip »
ipA ,
and the vertical arrows the composite mappings C(X,xQ ;C(Y,y0 ;Z,z0),const)
in
« C (X,C(Y,yQ ;Z,zQ)) C(ld X,in) ->
---- > C (X,C(Y,Z)) and C ((X,xQ) 0 (Y,y0) ,bp;Z,z0 )
in
> C((X,xQ) ® (Y,yQ> ,Z) ---- ►
C (pr,id_Z) ^ c ^x x Y ,Z). Since this diagram is commutative, the fact that is an embedding implies the continuity of h- » y x E X.
Every
(or connecting f.
f
A map homotopic
to a constant map is also said to be null homotopic. Often a homotopy continuous maps (0 £ t £ 1).
ft : X -* Y,
F:
X x I
related to
Y is interpreted as F
via
ft (x ) = F(x,t)
Acoording to 2.7.6, the continuity of
this family is continuous as a map of thesegment
a family of
I
F
implies that
into
C(X,Y).
Moreover, if X is Hausdorff, then the continuity of the family is equivalent to that of the map F. Obviously, the constant homotopy f: X + Y, given by
F'(x,t) = f (x) ,
connects
F of a continuous map f
to
f;
if the
f
57
homotopy
F
connects
f
to
f',
F' (x,t) = F(x, 1 -t) ,
defined by
F connects f to then their product
then the inverse homotopy, F', connects
f'
f' and the homotopy F ", defined as
to
F'
f;
if the homotopy
connects
F ( x ,2t ),
for
t £ 1/2,
F'(x,2t-1),
for
t ^ 1/2,
f'
to
f",
F M (x, t)
is a homotopy connecting
f
to
f".
Thus homotopy is an equivalence
relation, which yields a partition of called homotopy classes. 2. and
f'
We denote the set of these classes by
be continuous maps of a space x £ X
contained in f
into equivalence classes,
Anexample is the rectilinear homotopy.
If for each from
C(X,Y)
f',
Namely, let
into a subspace
the segment joining
Y, then
to
X
f(x)
F(x,t) = (1-t)f(x)
to
f'(x)
+ tf'(x)
Y
of
f IRn .
is entirely
defines a homotopy
referred to as rectilinear.
Obviously, any two maps of an arbitrary space into Dn
tt(X,Y).
IRn
or
are rectilinearly homotopic. 3.
Let the maps
continuous maps g o f' o h
g: Y -> Y'
be homotopic.
and
X,
h: X'
Then given any
the maps
g o fo h
and
are homotopic. In fact, let
Then
f ,f ': X ■+ Y
g ° F 0 4.
F: X x I -* Y
(hx id I)
be a homotopy from
is a homotopy from
As3 shows, the mapping
induced by two continuous maps
X
homotopy classes into homotopy classes. fact C (h,g) : tt(X,Y) + tt (X',Y ')
g ° f ° h
C(h,g)
h: X 1
f to
: C(X,Y)
and
g: Y
to
f*.
g ° f' ° h.
CiX'/Y1) Y'
transforms
The resulting mapping
is denoted by
ir(h,g),
that it depends only on the homotopy classes of
h
and
and
3
implies
g.
Stationary Homotopies 5. F : X x I ■+ Y A-homotopy if
Let
A
be a subset of the space
is said to be stationary on F(x,t)
= F(x,0)
for all
A
X.
A homotopy
or, simply, to be an
x € A
and
t € I.
Two maps
which can be connected by an A-homotopy are A-homotopic. As with usual homotopy, A-homotopy defines an equivalence relation, dividing the set of continuous maps A
with a given map
f: A + Y,
X
Y
which coincide on
into equivalence classes.
The latter
are called A-homotopy classes or, in full, homotopy classes of continuous
58
extensions of the map
f
to
X.
We denote the set of these classes by
7T (X, A; f ) . Notice that a rectilinear homotopy from is stationary on the set of points where
f
and
f g
to
f*
(see 2)
agree.
If one wants to specify that a certain homotopy is ordinary, i.e.,
not stationary, then one says that it is free.
Homotopy Equivalence of Spaces 6.
continuous map id X
A continuous map f: X -* Y
f ° g
is a homotopy inverse of the g ° f
is homotopic to
is homotopic to id Y .
Acontinuous
has a homotopy inverse is called a homotopyequivalence.
there is a homotopy equivalence Y
X
if the composition
and the composition
map which
g: Y
X
Y,
is homotopy equivalent to the space
If
then one says that the space X.
The following are obviously homotopy equivalences: the identity map of any space, a map which is a homotopy inverse of a homotopy equivalence, and the composition of two homotopy equivalences. Thus, homotopy equivalence among topological spaces is an equivalence relation.
It divides the topological spaces into classes called
homotopy types (instead of saying that one says
also that
X and
Y
Y
is homotopy equivalent to
X,
have the same homotopy type) .
Every homeomorphism is clearly a homotopy equivalence. 7.
If one of the continuous maps g o f: x
and their composition
Z
f: X -> Y
and
g: Y ^ Z,
are homotopy equivalences, then
the other map is also a homotopy equivalence. Indeed, let that of
f g.
h
be a homotopy inverse of
is a homotopy equivalence. Similarly, if
homotopy inverse of 8.
g: Y + Y'
and
7T(X,Y)
g
f o h
and suppose
is a homotopy inverse
is a homotopy equivalence, then
h ° g
is a
f. is a homotopy invariant.
f : X -* X 1
Evidently, if
That is to say, if
are homotopy equivalences, then
7r(f,g): tt(X,Y) -> tt(X',Y')
inverse of inverse of
Then
g ° f,
is invertible. f'
(respectively,
f (respectively, of Tr(f,g).
g) ,
g')
is a homotopy
then the map
tt(f 1 ,g ')
is the
59
Contractible Spaces 9. to a constant map. ]R
and
A space Dn
X
is contractible if the map
id X
is homoto
are examples of contractible spaces (see 2).
10-. A space is contractible if and only if it is homotopy equivalent to a point. If f: D
-> X
id X
is homotopic to a constant map
taking the value
(p(X) ,
inverses of one another: indeed, If now
f:
one another, then 11 .
X
id X
_If
X
and the map
f ° g = (J) and
and
g: X
then the map
g: X
are homotopy
g ° f = id
.
are homotopy inverses of
is homotopic to the constant map
fog.
is contractible, then any two continuous maps of
an arbitrary topological space into id X
cf),
X
are homotopic.
is homotopic to any constant map
X
In particular,
X.
This is a straightforward consequence of 10 and 8 .
Deformation Retractions 12. its subspaces
Aretraction A
p
of a topological space
onto one of
(see 1.4.10) is called a deformation (strong
deformation) retraction if the composition homotopic
X
(respectively, A-homotopic) to
X ■ p-> A id X .
— ►X
If the space
is X
admits
a deformation retraction (a strong deformation retraction) onto A, then A is called a deformation retract (respectively, a strong deformation retract) Obviously, p
of X. if p : X
and the inclusion
A
X
A
is a deformation retraction, then
are homotopy equivalences, each being a
homotopy inverse of the other.
It is clear also that any space which
admits a deformation retraction onto one of its points is contractible, and that every point of a contractible space is a deformation retract of the ambient space.
Relative Homotopies 13.
Let
sequence of subsets
X
(respectively
Y)
be a space with a distinguished
(respectively,
B 1 ,...,Bn >.
A map
60
F: (X x I ,A 1 x I,...,An x I) -> (Y ,B ^ ,. .., connecting the continuous maps if
abs F
is
is evidentthat
connecting the maps
B^.
abs f 1 .
and
In
is a homotopy
Moreover, it is
(X x I,A^ x I,...,An x I) ->
yield an equivalence relation.
This relation divides
into homotopy classes forming a set denoted
tt(X ,A ^ ,...,A ^ ;Y ,B ^ ,...,B^) .
the map
abs f
ab abs f , ab abs f 1 : A_^
C (X ,A ,...,A^ ;Y ,B ^ ,...,B^) by
the maps
ababsF: A^ x I -+ B^
readily seen that the homotopies (Y,B,j,...,B )
is called a homotopy
f,f! : (X ,A^ ,. ..,A^) -* (Y ,B ^ , .. .,B^)
a homotopy connecting
this case, it
)
We may give an analogous definition of
7i(h,g)
from 4. A continuous map
g:
(Y,B^ , .. .,B^) ->
(X ,A^ ,.. .,A^)
to be ahomotopy inverse of the continuous map (Y,B^ ,..., B ^ )
if
g ° f
homotopic torel id Y.
is homotopic to
A continuous map
is called a homotopy equivalence. ( Y , B^,...,B^)
f:
is said
(X,A ^ ,♦..,Ar ) ■>
rel id X
and
fog
is
possessing a homotopy inverse
Two sequences
(X,A^ ,.. .,A ^ )
are said to be homotopy equivalent, or to have
and
the same
homotopy type, if they are related by a homotopy equivalence. Propositions 7 and 8 , as they stand, apply to the case of relative homotopy. 14. X
and Y
The situation discussed in 13 encompasses the case whe
are pointed spaces (in this case
A^and
B
are points,
n = 1 , and the homotopies defined in 13 are just the homotopies stationary at
A^) .
Moreover, the definition of a contractible space
given in 9 extends to pointed spaces (however, the homotopy from to a constant map must be stationary at the base point).
The
true for theorems 1 0 an 1 1 , as well as for the definitions of
id X
same is a
(x and must have the same base point, and the homotopy from the composition deformation retraction and deformation retract, given in 12
X —
A —— — > X
to
id X
must be stationary at this point) .
A
Also,
the remarks in 1 2 remain valid, while the definition of strong deformation retraction is entirely unaffected by the presence of a base point.
2. 1.
Paths
A path in a topological space
of the closed unit interval
I
into
X.
The points
are called the origin and the end of the path termed loops. Given a path
s,
the formula
s.
t k s(1-t)
X s(0)
is any continuous ma and
s(1)
Closed path are also defines a new path,
61
called the inverse of with
s
and denoted by
s 1 (1 ) = s 2 (0 ),
s
_1
.
s^ (2 t ) ,
for
t £ 1 /2 ,
s2 (2 t- 1 ),
for
t ^ 1 /2 ,
s1s2 * Since
of a map
D
Obviously,
I =x i f
-+ X.
and
the formula
defines a path, called the product of the paths denoted by
s1
Given two paths
(s~ 1 ) ” 1 = s
s^
and
s2 ,
and
( s , ^ ) " ^ s2 1 s”1.
and
any path can be considered as a
homotopy
If one adopts such an interpretation, then the
inverse path becomes the inverse homotopy, while the product of paths becomes the product of homotopies. On the other hand, every homotopy between two continuous maps f,f'
: X -> Y
defines a path in
C(X,Y),
joining
f
and
f*
(see
2.7.6), and again the inverse path corresponds to the inverse homotopy, and the product of paths to the product of homotopies.
If
X
is
Hausdorff and locally compact, then a homotopy connecting two maps f,f": X
Y
may be even defined as a path in
C(X,Y)
joining
f
and
f '. 3.
Since any path is a continuous map, it can be also
subjected to homotopies.
Unfortunately, the generally accepted
terminology for such homotopies is not in complete agreement with our definitions in subsection 1 (which are also generally accepted). precisely, when we consider paths,
More
the homotopies and the homotopy
relation are understood always as (0 U 1 )-homotopies (i.e., homotopies stationary at the extremities of the interval relation, respectively.
I) and (0 U 1 )-homotopy
Moreover, a free homotopy of a loop is
understood always as a usual free homotopy whereby the path remains a loop all the time (i.e., as a continuous map F (0,t ) = F (1,t)
for all
3. 1.
F: I x I
X
such that
t £ I).
Connectedness and k-Connectedness The properties of topological spaces we study in this
subsection represent weaker versions of the contractibility in the absolute case, and of deformation retractability in the relative case.
62
Connectedness 2.
A topological space is connected (see the Preface) if
each pair of its points can be joined by a path. connected if the set Since
tt(D°,X)
tt(D°,X)
every
X
is
contains just an element; see 2.2.
is a homotopy invariant, connectedness is
a homotopically invariant property. spaces are connected.
Equivalently,
In particular, all contractible
For example,
3Rn
and
Dn
are connected for
n. For
n > 0,
Sn
is also connected: any two points of
can be joined by a path, which in fact is contained in
S
Sn \ p,
where
p
is a third point (recall that the punctured sphere Sn ^ p is n 0 homeomorphic to 1 ). S is not connected: a path joining -1 and [0 ,1 ],
would be a continuous function on
1
taking two distinct values
but no intermediate ones. The only connected subsets of the real line
are the empty
JR
set, the finite or infinite intervals, the finite or infinite semi intervals, and the closed intervals.
Indeed, if
a
exact lower and upper bounds of a connected subset contains the interval 3.
A
of
are the
IR,
then
A
(a, 6).
Given an arbitrary topological space
being joined by a
6
and
X,
the property of
path defines a relation between its points, which
obviously satisfies all the requirements for an equivalence relation . This relation defines a partition of maximal connected subsets of
X,
X
into subsets which are the
and are called the components of
Clearly, the set of components may be identified with denote it by
We
comp X .
Every continuous map
f: X
fact f
= 7T(idD^,f) : comp X -+ comp
replace
f
whenever
(D ,X) .
tt
X.
Y
induces the map
Y .
This map does not change
by an arbitrary homotopic map, and
f
factf
is invertible
is a homotopy equivalence (see 1.4 and 1.8).
plain that if
f(X) = Y,
then
factf (comp X)
= compY .
It is also In particular,
the image of a connected space under a continuous map is connected. 4. subsets
X A2
A^ and Indeed,
contains
also 5.
can be written as the union of two connected with
A^ fl A^ ^ 0,
a component of
A^
and
A^r
X
i.e.,
Consider a partition of
connected subset of
X
then
X
is connected.
which contains a point contains X
x Q € A^n A 2
X.
into open sets.
Then every
is contained in one of the elements of this
whenwe
63
partition.
In particular, every subset of a connected space which is
both open and closed is either empty or the whole space PROOF.
Let
A
be a connected subset of
an element of the partition, such that f: X
which takes
continuous,
f(A)
U
into
1
X,
U n A f 0.
and
X \ U
and let
U
be
Consider the map
into
f(A) = 1
is connected, whence
X.
-1.
Since
f
is
A c u.
and
k-Connectedness r The following properties of a continuous map
6.
with
r ^ 0
are equivalent:
(i)
f
(ii)
is homotopic to a constant map; f
(iii) S
r— 1
f: S
extends to a continuous map the compositions
-homotopic,
where
DS+
and
D
r +1
X;
f ° DS+ , f ° DS_: Dr DS_
X
are the embeddings of
are D
r
in
r S ,
defined by 2
2 1/2
DS+ (x1,...,x )
= (x1 ,...,xr , (1—x 1 — ..>-xr )
DS_ (x ,...,xr)
= (x1 ,... ,xr ,— ( 1 - x ^ ..*“X r)
)
and
(iv)
f
2
2
1/2
);
i_s ort^-homotopic to a constant map.
The proof follows the following scheme: (i) ! l V (iv)
^ (ii)
(iii)
^>"7
(i) =*> (ii) .
A homotopy F: Sr x I
map takes the upper base
of the cylinder
Consequently,
F
Sr x I ■+ Dr + \
defined by
S x I
from
f
to a constant
into one point.
may be expressed as the composition of the map
and a continuous map clear that
X
((x^ ,...,x^ +^) ,t ) h- (x^ (1 -t) ,...,x^ +^ (1 -t)), Dr 1
g:
X
(see 2.3.4 and 1.7.9), and it is
= f.
g
sr (ii) => (iii) continuous extension of ((x^ /• •• and
and f.
) ,t)
(ii) => (iv) .
Suppose
g: D
r +1
X
Then the formulas g(x^,...fxr f(1 ” 2 t)( 1 -x^-... -xr )
)
is a
64
((x1 ,. -./Xr+1) ,1 ) ^ g(t+( 1 -t)x1 , (1 -t)x2, ..., (1 -t)xr + 1 ) define an Sr ^-homotopy an ort^-homotopy
Dr x I -> X
Sr x I -+ X
(iii) =* (ii) . to
from
f
f ° DS +
to
f ° DS_,
and
to a constant map.
f : Dr x I -> X from f ° DS + r takes every generatrix of the cylinder S x i into one
f ° DS_
point. Dr x I
from
An Sr ^-homotopy
Consequently, F can be expressed as the composition of the map Dr + 1 , defined by ((x1 , ...,xr) ,t) n- (x1 , ...,xr , (2 1 — 1 ) (1 -x^— •• •-x^) 1 /' 2 ) ,
and some continuous map clear that
r+ 1 g: D -* X
(see 2.3.4 and 1.7.9), and it is
= f. sr The implication (iv) => (i) is trivial. g
7.
A nonempty space
(0 £ k £ °°) ,
if any continuous map
S
X
is said to be k-connected
X
with
to a constant map, i.e., satisfies condition 6 (i).
r £ k
is homotopic
Theorem 6 shows that
this definition has three more equivalent formulations, based on conditions 6 (ii) , 6 (iii) and 6 (iv). r maps D X which agree on f: Sr
X
such that
f ° DS+ = f
Moreover, since for any continuous r~ 1 S there is a continuous map and
f ° DS_ = f ^ r
we conclude that
a nonempty space X is k-connected if and only if any continuous maps r r” 1 r~ 1 f^,f2: D -* X, r ^ k, which agree on S are S -homotopic. Obviously, for nonempty spaces O-connectedness is nothing else but connectedness. connected.
The
1-connected spaces are usually called simply
Note that a 0-connected space is simply connected if and
only if any two paths with common extremities are homotopic. The homotopy invariance of the sets
tt (S
,X)
implies that a
space which is homotopy equivalent to a k-connected space is itself k-connected.
In particular, every contractible space is ^-connected.
The Relative Case 8.
The following properties of a continuous map
f: (Dr ,Sr ^) -> (X,A) (i)
f
with
r > 0
are equivalent:
is homotopic to a constant map;
(ii) abs f into a subset of A ;
is S
r— 1
-homotopic to a map which carries
D
r*
65
PROOF. homotopy from
f
(i) =* (ii).
If
F: (Dr
l,sr
x
x
I ) -> (X,A)
is a
to a constant map, then the formula
F(x/dist(0 ,x),2 (1 -dist(0 ,x))),
if
dist(0 ,x) 5 (2 -t)/2 ,
F(2x/(2-t) ,t) ,
if
dist(0,x) s; (2-t)/2,
(x,t) H-
r~ 1 2T defines an S -homotopy D 'x 1 -> carries Dr into a subset of A. (ii) => (i) . S
r—1
from
abs f
consider the map
If
G: Dr
X
from
I -> x
x
to a map which
is a homotopy stationary on 2T D into a subset of A,
to a map which carries F: Dr x I -> x
abs f
given by G ((x1 ,...,xr ),2 t),
if
t i
G( (2x1 (1-t) ,...,2x (1-t) ,1) ,
if
t 5 1/2
Then rel F : (Dr x I,Sr ^ x i) constant map.
(X,A)
is a homotopy from
f
1 /2 ,
to a
9. A pair (X,A ) is k-connected (0 £ k £ °°) if for any map r r— 1 r— 1 f: (D ,S ) -* (X,A) with r £ k, abs f is S -homotopic to a map whose image is contained in It is clear
A.
that the pair
if each component of the space
X
(X,A)
is 0-connected if and only
intersects
A.
If
k > 0,
then
(X,A) f:
is k-connected if and only if every continuous map r r— 1 (D ,S ) -* (X,A) with r £ k is homotopic to a constant map; see 8 . A pair which
k-connected.
As a consequence,
deformation retract of (X,A) X,
X,
the
we see that when A pair
is homotopy equivalent to
the pair of
is homotopy equivalent to a k-connected pair is
(X,A)
(X,A) is “-connected;indeed,
(X,X).
It will be clear later that
is already ^-connected if
or even when the inclusion
is a strong
A + X
A
is a deformation retract
is a homotopy equivalence;
see 5.1.6.5.
4. 1. point
A topological space
Xq € X
neighborhood
Local Properties
if each neighborhood V
of
to the constant map
x^
U
of
X x^
such that the inclusion
V -> x^.
is locally contractible at the contains.another V
U
is homotopic
A topological space is locally contractible
if it is locally contractible at any of its points.
66
If we replace in these definitions the homotopies by XQ-homotopies, the we get the definitions of a space strongly locally contractible at the point locally contractible space IRn , Dn
and
x^,
X
which is
and of a strongly
X.
Sn
are examples of strongly locally contractible
spaces. 2. Xq E X V
of
U.
A topological space
if each neighborhood Xq ,
U
X
is locally connected at the point
of
Xq
contains another neighborhood
such that any two points in
V
can be joined by a path in
A topological space is locally connected if it is locally connected
at any of its points. It is clear that a locally contractible space is locally connected.
As an example of a connected space which is not locally 2
connected we may take the subset of m^x^ + m 2 x 2 ' 3. of
with
m -j
an(^
m2
]R
consisting of the lines
integers.
A space is locally connected
its open sets are open.
if and only if the components
In particular, in a locally connected space
every neighborhood of an arbitrary point contains a connected neighbor hood of this point. PROOF. subset of Then in
U V
X,
A
Suppose that
X
a component of
is locally connected, U,
contains a neighborhood
V
can be joined by a path in
and of
U.
Xq E A Xq
Hence
U
is an open
an arbitrary point.
such that any two points V c A
and
x Q E IntA .
This proves that in a locally connected space the components of the open sets are open.
5. 1.
A topological pair
topological space
Y,
(A,B)
f |^'
Let
is a Borsuk pair if given any f: X -+ Y,
there is a homotopy
and any homotopy X x i -* y
is a topological triple such that
are Borsuk pairs, then 2.
(X,A)
(X,A,B)
(X,A)
any continuous map
F: A x I Y of the map which extends F. If
Borsuk Pairs
(X,A)
(X,B)
be a topological pair. X x i.
(X,A)
f
and
is obviously a Borsuk pair.
to be a Borsuk pair it is necessary that
a retract of the cylinder is also sufficient.
of
When
A
Then in order for (X x 0) U ( A x i)
be
is closed, this condition
67
PROOF OF THE NECESSITY. in: X = X x 0 -> ( X x O )
u
Any homotopy of the map
(Ax I )
in: A x I (X x 0) U (A x I) onto ( X x O ) U (A x I).
which extends the homotopy is a retraction of the cylinder X x I
PROOF OF THE SUFFICIENCY. be a retraction. map f: X -* Y, composition
G
p:XxI+(XxO)U
Then given any topological space and any homotopy
X x I -P-* ( X x O ) where
Let
F: A x I
y
Y,
(A x I)
any continuous
of the map
^[a *
the
U (A x I) -iL, y,
is defined by f(x) ,
if
t = 0,
F (x ,t) ,
if
x G A,
G(x,t)
is a homotopy of 3. way.
I_f
f
which extends
The following statement completes Theorem 2 in an essential
X
is Hausdorff, then the assumption that
is a retract of the cylinder closed. that
X x I
(X x 0) U
(A x I)
implies automatically that
A
is
Indeed, it suffices to note that the above hypothesis implies
(XxO)
U ( A x I)
isclosed in
is the preimage of this 4. Xand
F.
setunder the
If the sets
(A,A
fl B)
A
and
B
X x I (see1.5.5), map X
X x
i,
and that
x *+ (x,1).
form a closed cover of the space
is a Borsuk pair, then
(X,B)
is also a Borsuk pair.
This is a consequence of 2; in fact, any retraction p:
I -> [ A
A x
x 0] U
[
(Afl B) x
x i
(x x 0)
'p(x, t) ,
if
x e A,
(x,t),
if
x e b.
defines a retraction
X
I]
U (B x
i) by
(X,t)
5. (Z x x ,Z x a )
If
(X,A)
is a Borsuk pair and
A
is closed, then
is a Borsuk pair for every topological space
PROOF.
If
p
is a retraction of the cylinder
Z.
X x I
onto
(X x 0) U (A x i), then id Z x p is a retraction of the cylinder (Z x X) x I = Z x (Xxl) onto [(Z x X) x 0] U [ (Z x A) x I] = = Z x [ (X x 0) U (A x I) ] .
A
68
Borsuk Pairs and Deformation Retractions 6.
If
(X,A ) is
a Borsuk pair and theinclusion
ahomotopy equivalence, then
A
is a deformation
7T: X
A
be a homotopy inverse of
PROOF.
Let
A
retract
X is
of X . the inclusion
A X. Extend the homotopyfrom 71 |^ “ 71 ° in: A A to id A to a homotopy of the map tt ; this yields a homotopy from tt to a retraction of X
X
onto
A,
which we denote by
A —— — > Xis homotopic to
is also homotopic 7. (X
to A
lf_
xI , (x x 0) U
id X ,
f: X x i X
x
(x x 1 ))
p
X —
A— ^ — >X
is adeformation retraction. X
and
is a Borsukpair,
then
A
is a
X.
p : X -> A
be a homotopy from
A — — — > X.
, thecomposition
and thus
strong deformation retract of Let
id X
Since the composition
is a deformation retract of
(A x i) u
PROOF.
p.
be a deformationretraction, id X
and let
to the composite map
Define a homotopy
g: [(X x 0) U (A x i) u (X x 1 )] x i
x
by f x, g((x,t1 ),t2) =
|f(x,(1-t2 )t1), I f(P(X),1-t2),
and extend it to some homotopy G :
if
t1 = 0 ,
if
x E A,
if
t 1 = 1,
(X x I) * I -> X
f: X x i ->■ x. It is clear that (x,t) h- G((x,t),1) A-homotopy Xx I ->• x fromid X to in ° p. 8.
I_f
(X,A) is
retract of the space equivalence. PROOF.
a Borsuk pair and B
A, then the map
rel: (X,B)
Consider a B-homotopy from
of a strong deformation retractionA -> B
id A
of the map yields
is a strong deformation (X,A)
Now extend it to a homotopy
G of
(X,A) -+ (X/B),
is a homotopy inverse of
x » G(x,1),
is a homotopy
to the composition
and the inclusion
id X .
an
B
-»■A.
It is clear that the map rel.
69
Local Characteristics of Borsuk Pairs 9. Y
Suppose that
is any topological space, and
given
anyhomotopy
there is an
is a Borsuk pair with f: X
Y
Let G
f
(x,t) *-> G(x,tct>(x))
be a homotopy
of
U
to a map which
(X,A)
of_
A
takes
is distinguishable
U
Then
of
A,
F. f
extending
X\ U, A.
F, and let
Then the formula
defines an (X^U)-homotopy of
I_f
neighborhood
normal,
is any continuous map.
extending
be anyUrysohn function for the pair
10.
X
F of the mapand any neighborhood
(X^ U )-homotopy of
PROOF.
(J)
(X,A)
f
extending
F.
is a Borsuk pair, then there exists a such that the inclusion
U
into a subset of
(in particular, if
X
U
A.
X
.is A-homotopic
Iif Xis normal
is metrizable and
and A
A
is
closed), then this condition is also sufficient, i.e., the converse of the above statement is valid. PROOF
OF THE NECESSITY.
a retraction, then the set a(x,1) € A x (0,1]
U
If
of
all
a: X x i
(X x 0) U (A x I)
points x E X
is
with
is open, and the composition pr
U
x I —
— > X X I
— £-* (x X 0) U
is an A-homotopy from the inclusion into a subset of PROOF let
(J): X
I
distinguishes
U X
I)
---- -— > X
— » X X I
to a map which takes
U
A. OF THE SUFFICIENCY.
A-homotopy such
(AX
that
F(x,0) = x
Let and
:
F
f(x,1) E A
be a Urysohn function for the A
(see 1.5.9).
Ux I
x
be an
for all x E U, pair
A,X
^ U,
and which
The formula
fF (x ,min (t/c{) (x) ,1 )) ,
if
x E U ^ A,
if
x E A,
G (x ,t) = < x, defines amap continuous. H: X x I
G:
U x I -> X ,
This in X x I
and Theorem
2.2.14 shows that
G
is
turn implies the continuity of the map
defined by (G (x ,max (0 ,t-(|> (x) )) ,max (0 ,t-2(J)(x) )) ,
if
x E U,
H (x ,t ) =
(x ,0) , It is readily seen that
if
x E X \ U.
H(X x I) = (X x 0) U (A x I)
and that
70
(x x0) U (A x i)
ab H :X x i
11. Let
(X,A )
is a retraction.
be a topological pair such that
A
is a
strong deformation retract of one of its neighborhoods.
If
normal and
is metrizable
and
A
is distinguishable (in particular, if
Ais closed), then
(X,A)
X
X
is
is a Borsuk pair.
This is a corollary of 10. 12. If V
of A,
(X,A)
there is another neighborhood
and the inclusion a subset of
W -> V
A-homotopy W
F:
x E U. in
x
W c= V, the
U
W
of
A,
W c= v
such that
is A-homotopic to a map which takes
W
into
A.
PROOF. By all
is a Borsuk pair, then given anyneighborhood
10, there exists a neighborhood U
U x I -+ X
such that
F(x,0)
= x
and F(x,1)
Now 2.2.13 shows that every point with
F(W x i)
F(W x I) c V. x c v, and that
inclusion W -> I 13.
I_f
X
Set
of
x E U
Aand an EA
for
has a neighborhood
W =U
W . It is clear that xEA x ab F : W x I -> v is an A-homotopy from
to a map which takes
W
into A.
isa topological space and
EX
issuch
that
(X,x)
is a Borsuk pair, then
If
is normal and locally contractible at a distinguishablepoint
X
then
(X,x)
X
x
is strogly locallycontractible
at
x. x,
is a Borsuk pair.
This is a consequence of 12 and 10.
6 . CNRS-spaces
1.
A subset
A
neighborhood retract of hoods in X.
of atopological space X
if
A
X is said
tobe a
is a retract of one of its neighbor
The retracts and the open sets are trivial examples of neighborhood retracts. 2.
rf
A
is aneighborhood
neighborhood retract of Indeed, let in
Xt
A,
then
p: U -> A
and let a: V -* B
X and
B
is a
is a neighborhood retract of
be a neighborhood retraction for
be a neighborhood retraction for
Then a° (p |w): W B, where retraction for B in X. 3.
B
retract of
w = p_1 (V) ,
B
in
X. A A.
is a neighborhood
A topological space is a CNRS-space or, simply, a CNRS,
if itis compact
and can be embedded in a Euclidean space (of a certain
71
dimension) as a neighborhood retract; CNRS is the abbreviation of compact neighborhood retract of a sphere. Dn
and
Sn
4.
A compact neighborhood retract of a CNRS is a CNRS.
This is
are obvious examples of
CNRS’s .
a resultof 2.
5. The image of any embedding of a CNRS in a normal space is a neighborhood retract. PROOF. normal space g(X)
Let
Y,
f: X +
Y
and let g: X + TRn
is a neighborhood retract of
f ^ = [abf: X
f (X) ]
and
g ° f .^: f(X) ^ nRn is clear that
f^
° g^
U= h
-1
(V)
f(X)
into
X
in the
such that p : V -> g (X)
is closed (see 1.7.9), h: Y + JRn
is a neighborhood of f(X)
> 0 such that any two maps,
e
X
and let
U
f
(see 1.5.12).
,
and that
onto
Given anycompact neighborhood retract
a number Y
Since
CNRSX
Further, consider
o p o [abh : U -> V ] is a retraction of 6.
space
JRn .
extends to a continuous map
1
It
be an embedding of
g^ = [abg: X + g (X) ] ,
be a neighborhood retraction.
is
be an embedding of the
and
f (X) .
X
of
JRn ,
there
g,
of an arbitrary
which satisfy
sup^EY dist(f(y),g(y)) < e are homotopic. set where
f
Moreover, one may choose a homotopy stationary on the and g
PROOF. that one
agree.
Let
may take
e
a: U + X
be a neighborhood retraction. We show
to be the
distance between
X
and
HRn ^ U
(which is positive by 1.7.15). Let f,g: Y X be continuous and satisfy SUPyEY dist extremities maps
Y —
(y) '9 (y) ) < f(y) and g(y) X —^ — > U
and
Y —2-» x —— — > U
F: Y x I -* u,
rectilinear homotopy a ° F : Y x i + x
For anY Point y C Y, the segment with the lies in U. Consequently, thecomposite
7.
if
and it is plain that
is a homotopy from
is stationary on the set where A
f
can be connected by a
f
and
to g
g.
Furthermore,
a ° F
is
agree.
is a neighborhood retract of
a CNRS
X,
then
(X,A)
is a Borsuk pair. PROOF.
Let
o:
U+ A
X
as a neighborhood retract of
V
the neighborhood of
for which
A
in
dist (x,a (x) ) < e,
be a neighborhood retraction. Consider ]Rn X
and pick
e
as in 6 .
Denote by
consisting of all the point
and let
be the composition
x E U
72
CM tt V Then
>A
— ► X.
dist ((J)(x) ,x) < c
the inclusion
V
X
for
x £ V,
and
is A-homotopic to
G(x,1),
id X
Let us check that
Consider the homotopies
rel fact G : ( (X/A)
x l,pr(A) x I ) -*
Thefirst connects the maps
rel id X, rel g : (X,A) + (X,A) while the second connects the maps rel id (X/A) , rel fact g: (X/A,pr(A)) -+(X/A,pr(A)). It is clear that = [relfactg:
[rel g : (X,A)
(X/A,pr(A))
(X,A)]
[ rel fact g : (X/A,pr (A) ) = [relpr:
(X,A)
(X,A) ] = ° [relpr : (X,A)
(X/A,pr(A))]
and
(X/A,pr (A) ) ] =
(X/A,pr(A))] o [relfactg:
(X/A,pr(A)) -> (X,A)].
Attachings 8.
I_f
homotopic, then the spaces equivalent. f: X 2
(X^ ,C) X^
is a Borsuk pair and X^
and
X^ U , X^
such that the following diagram is commutative:
imm. X,
2
PROOF. maps
are homotopy
Moreover, there is a homotopy equivalence
X^ ■+ X^ U , X ^
and let
(a2 (t1 ,t2)) = G (f o F(y,t2 ),t1);
2
p2
with
a^(0 ,1 ) = A 2,
Further, for
y E Y
Y
76
J
dime. dime, |_(D 1 X D 2)
= (2 )
dim e dime, , 1 v ^ 2 = (J |_D 1) x (J [D ) ~Cha • * Cha- > Xl x x2 , where the first map is the sum of the canonical homeomorphisms dim(e^xe2)
dime^
D
D
dim e 2 x d
1
(W),
.
Since
p^
and
P2
satisfy condition
2
the maps cha and cha are factorial (see 1.3). Furthermore, dim e 2 since | |D and X are locally compact (see 4.3), the map cha
1
2
x cha
is factorial too (see 1 .2 .7.9), which in turn implies that
the composite map (2) is factorial. x P2
Therefore, the decomposition
has property (W ) . 4 (INFORMATION). X2
X^
and
of
cells, then
If every point of each of the cellular spaces
has a neighborhood which intersects only a countable family X. x 1
c
X, = X. x Z
x, ; see z
1
[6 ] for
aproof.
Attaching 5.
Consider two cellular spaces X^
and
X2 ,
a subspace C
of X ^ , and a cellular map tp: C + X^- According to 1 .2 .4 .8 , X2 U(p X 1 is a well-defined topological space, while 2.3 and 1.2.4.9 imply that X 2 Ucp X 1
and
imm2 e 2 ,
norma-*-where e^
respectively, and put
Now decompose X 2 X^ into the sets imm^e^ and e 2 run over the cells in X^ \ C and X2 ,
dim(imm^e^)
= dim e^
and
dimiimir^^)
= dim e 2 •
This is a cellular decomposition: as a characteristic map for
imnue^
one may take the composition of an arbitrary characteristic map
chae i
with imm^e^
imitK.
Clearly, the only cells that the closure of the cell
intersects are either
intersecting
Cl e^ ,
or
imm^e^,
imir^^'
where
where e^
is a cell in is a cell in
X2
X^
96
intersecting
(p(Cle^
fl C) .
Moreover, we see that
Cl imm2 e 2
intersects only the cells imm2 f:2 , where is X 2 “ a ~ cell in “ “2 Consequently, our decomposition has property (C). intersecting Cl e 2 To see that it has property (W) too, let F be a subset of X,2 Utp X,1 The having closed intersections with all the cells in X U X,
- X^ , (j) : X^ limit
lim(Xk ,(f)k )
Xq,X^,...
X2 ,...
X^ \
into the sets ),
are cellular embeddings.
By 1.2.4.4, the
is a well-defined topological space, which is also
normal (see 2.3 and 1.2.4.6 ). lim (X^, (f)^)
are cellular spaces and
Now consider the decomposition of
imm^e^,
k = 0 ,1 ,...,
where
e^
is a cell in
dimiimm^e^ ) = dim e, . If we k take the composition of an arbitrary characteristic map cha with ek imm^ as a characteristic map for the cell imm^e^, we see that this
decomposition is cellular. and (W) ,
lim(X^,c()k )
and put
Since it obviously satisfies conditions
becomes a cellular space, and
imm^
(C)
become
cellular embeddings. Notice that this definition of the limit includes as a special case the inductive process of glueing a cellular space from balls that we discussed in subsection 2 .
97
More Special Constructions 7. and
Inti
Since decomposing the segment makes
I
0, 1 ,
X;
see 2 and 3.
X x I
The bases of
are cellular subspaces (in the sense of 1.9); hence when we pass
to the quotient space su X
into the cells
into a finite cellular space, the cylinder
is cellular for any cellular space X x I
I
of
con X ,
con X
of
X x I,
and then to the quotient space
we find ourselves in the situation covered by the
construction 5. Therefore, the cone and the suspension over a cellular space are also cellular spaces. If
f: X^
which transform
X^
is a cellular map, then the attaching processes
X^ x I
into
Cyl f , and
again into the category described in 5.
con X^
into
Con f
fall
Therefore, the mapping cylinder
and the mapping cone of a cellular map are cellular spaces. 8 .The
and
X2
X^
X^
of
[(X. X
X,)
two cellular spaces
is defined as X- * 1
where
cellular join
(p:[ (X1
c
X = (X.I 2
|X_) U
1 -— L 2
(p
C
Z
cp(x1 ,x2 ,1) = in2 (x2);
cellular, the space
*c X 2
According to 3, when topologically the same as
x I],
xc x2> x 1 ] ^ x -\ I Ix 2
xc X 2) x 0] U [ (X^
(p(x1 ,x2 ,0) =
1
is g iven by
cf. 1.2.6.3.
Since
ip is
is cellular. is locally finite,
X^
X^ * X2 -
X 1 *c X 2
is
In general, the cellular
decomposition of X^ *c X 2 is cellular for X 1 * X 2 too, and so the cellular weakening of the topology of X^ * X 2 yields X^ *c X 2> However, this process does not affect the topology of the compact subsets of
X^ * X2 ;
cf. 2 .
The Case of Pointed Spaces 9.
Suppose that
X
that we take as a base point. su(X,Xq)
are quotients of
they are cellular spaces.
is a cellular space and The cone
con X
and
c o n ( X , x Q)
su X
xQ
is a 0-cell
and the suspension
by subspaces, and as such
Similarly, the bouquet of a family of
cellular spaces with 0 -cells as base points is the quotient of the sum of this family by a subspace, and hence is a cellular space.
98
Finally, we define the cellular cellular join of the cellular spaces and
x^taken as
base points,as
( X 1 Xc X 2 ) / f
respectively.
(X1
tensor product and the and
X 2 withthe 0 -cells
x^
the quotient spaces
x x2)
u (x1 X x2)]
and
(X1 * c
X2 ) / / ( x 1 *
X2 ) f
(X^,x^) ®c (X2 ,x2>
These are cellular spaces, denoted by
and
(XwX.) * (X„ ,x ) . If X. is locally finite, then they are 1 1 C 2. 2. 1 identical with (X1 ,x1) ® ° * Thus ' ®c (X2 'x 2> and (X ^ ,x ^)*c (X2 ,x2) arise from the cellular
weakening of the topologies of (X^,x^) * (X2 ,x2),
(X^,x^) 0
respectively,
and it
(X2 ,x2) and is clear that
this process
does not affect the topology of the compact subsets of (X1 ,x^)
® (X2 /X2) and (X^,x ^)
6.
1.
Show
arbitrary point
x
Exercises
that given an arbitrary cellular space
X
£ X,there exists a cellular space
together with
a cellular homeomorphism 2.
* (X2 ,x2>.
f: X + Y
Show that the sphere
such that S°°
Y
and an
f(x) E ske^Y.
and the ball
D°°
are homeo-
morphic to cellular spaces. 3.
Show that every connected, locally finite cellular space
can be topologically embedded in 4.
CO
IR .
Show that every connected, finite dimensional, locally
finite cellular space can be embedded in 3R^, 5.
for large enough
Show that every finite cellular space admits a cellular
embedding in a cellular space homeomorphic to
,
for large enough
INFORMATION. Every finite celular space of dimension be embedded in a cellular space homeomorphic to D 2n+\ 6.
q.
Consider the bouquet
space (see 5.9) homeomorphism.
B = Vt ^
and show that the map
(I =i,0)
id: B x^b
n
as a cellular
B x b
is not a
q. can
99
§2.
1.
(r ^ 0)
SIMPLICIAL SPACES
Euclidean Simplices
1 . Let A be a subset of ]Rn consisting of r +1 points which are not contained in any (r-1)-dimensional plane. The
convex hull of
A
(i.e., the smallest convex set containing
called the Euclidean simplex spanned by The points of number
r
A
Esi A
Obviously, a point of Esi A
A, and is denoted by
are the vertices of the simplex
is its dimension.
Esi A ,
is
EsiA .
and the
is also called a Euclidean r-simplex.
Esi A
is a vertex if and only if
contains no nondegenerate segment whose midpoint falls on the
given point.
Therefore, the set
A
Every simplex spanned by the simplex for any
EsiA .
is uniquely determined by a subset of
It is clear that
A
EsiA .
is called a face of
Esi A^ DEsi A^
= Esi(A^ D A^) ,
A^ ,A^ cz A. Two faces spanned by complementary subsets
A
A)
are said to be opposite. pr (x1 ,x2 ,t)
A^
and
A^
of
In this case, the formula
(1-t)x^ + tx 2
x 2 £ Esi A^ ,
(x^ € Esi A^ ,
Esi A^ * Esi A^
t € I)
defines a homeomorphism of
the join
onto Esi A .
Thus,
every Euclidean simplex is
canonically homeomorphic to the join of any
of the pairs of its opposite faces. Since with
p +q = r - 1
the spaces
Esi A
Dr
is canonically homeomorphic to any join
(see 1 .2 .6 .9), a trivial induction proves that both and
Drare homeomorphic to a join of
r+1
We conclude that every Euclidean r-simplex is homeomorphic to It is clear that the boundary of the simplex
Esi A
points. D . in the
r-plane that it determines is precisely the union of its (r-1 )-faces. Usually, this boundary and its complement in
EsiA
to as the boundary and the interior of the simplex 2.
are simply referred EsiA .
We may equivalently describe the simplex
set of all sums
£a£A t&a ,
where
t& ^ 0
there is no (r-1)-plane containing uniquely for any point
x =
A,
^aa?
and
as the
l a £ A t& = 1. Since
the numbers ^a
EsiA
ta are determined ca-*-^ec^ ^he a-th bary -
100
centric coordinates of x and is denoted by bar a (x). — . —.— -- -—. . Obviously, a face Esi B of the simplex Esi A in the barycentric coordinates of for
a E A \ B.
Moreover, if
EsiA
by the equations
EsiB EsiA
i.e., equal to
is the center of the simplex
and takes
3.
A map
A
into
Esi A B.
-+ Esi B
EsiA .
is called simplicial if it is affine
It is clear that such a map takes each face of
simplicially into a face of
Esi A
onto the interior of the simplex which is its image. Obviously, every map Esi A
Esi B .
bar a (x)
coincide for all a E B. having all barycentric coordinates equal,
Esi A
map
bar^ (x) = 0
x E Esi B , then the coordinates
computed in EsiA and The point of 1/(r+1),
is defined
Esi B ,
A -+ B
If the given map
then its simplicial extension
Esi A
and takes the interior of
extends uniquely to a simplicial A
B
Esi B
is injective (invertible), is an embedding
(respectively, a homeomorphism). 4. ordered.
EsiA issaid to be an ordered simplex
Since the subsets of
if the set
A
is
an ordered set inherit a natural order,
all the faces of an ordered simplex are ordered simplices. If orders of
A
EsiA and
and B
EsiB
are ordered r-simplices, then the
define an invertible map
simplicial homeomorphism
EsiA
-* EsiB .
A + B,
and hence a
Consequently, all ordered
Euclidean simplices of the same dimension are canonically simplicial homeomorphic. 5.
The simplex spanned by the points
is called the unit r-simplex and is denoted by
ort ,...fOrt^ Tr .
of
r +1 3R
This simplex is
notable due to the fact that its barycentric coordinates are the usual r +1 T" coordinates in IR . The given order of its vertices transforms T into an ordered simplex, and thus every ordered Euclidean r-simplex is canonically simplicial homeomorphic to
T .
Mote that given an ordered simplex Esi A , the homeomorphism r EsiA -+ D discussed in 1 is now canonical. The canonical homeor r morphism T -* D and its inverse are denoted by TD and DT, respectively. That TD maps the boundary (the interior) of r— 1 r S (respectively, onto IntD ) is plain.
Tr
onto
Topological Simplices 6.
of dimension
A topological space r
X
is an ordered topological simpl
(or an ordered topological r-simplex) if there exists
101
a homeomorphism of the simplex
Tr -> X; X,
of the simplex. ball
D
jc
this is called a characteristic homeomorphism
while
X
is sometimes referred to as the support
For example, all ordered Euclidean r-simplices and the
are ordered topological r-simplices; see 5. The standard way to detroy an order is to introduce
simultaneously all possible orders. topological space
X
Accordingly, we say that the
is a topological simplex of dimension
r
(or a
topological r-simplex) if there are given (r+1 )! homeomorphisms r r T -> X , which can be transformed into each other by simplicial homeor r morphisms T -+ T . The terms characteristic homeomorphism and support are employed in this situation too; however, now we have at our disposal (r+1 )!
equally rightful characteristic homeomorphisms. If
X
is a topological r-simplex (an ordered topological
r-simplex), and X
Y
Y
transforms
is a topological space, then every homeomorphism Y
into a topological r-simplex (respectively, into
an ordered topological r-simplex). image of a Euclidean r-simplex
Consequently, every homeomorphic
(ordered Euclidean r-simplex) is a
topological r-simplex (respectively, an ordered topological r-simplex). The vertices, faces, boundary, interior, barycentric coordinates, center, and simplicial maps are defined in an obvious fashion for topological simplices.
The faces of a topological simplex
(ordered topological simplex) are topological simplices (respectively, ordered topological simplices).
As with a Euclidean simplex, a
topological simplex becomes an ordered one as soon as we fix an order of its vertices.
2.
Simplicial Spaces and Simplicial Maps
1 .
A triangulation of a set
X
topological simplices such that: (i) every face of an arbitrary simplex in simplex in
A
of
is again a
A
A;
(ii) A,
is a cover
if a simplex in
A
is contained in another simplex of
then the first is a face of the second; (iii) the intersection of the supports of two overlaping
simplices of
A
A set
is again the support of a simplex in X
A.
endowed with a triangulation is known as a
simplicial space; the simplices of the triangulation are called simplices of the space, and the O-simplices are its vertices.
The
smallest simplex in the triangulation which contains a given point
X
by
102
x E X
is denoted by si x . According to 1.2.4.3, a triangulation transforms the given set
into a topological space, and 1 .2 .4.1 shows that the supports of the simplices of the triangulation yield a fundamental cover of this space. Since the intersection of two simplices in the triangulation is closed in each of them, the simplices in the triangulation keep the same topology when considered as subspaces of this topological space (see 1 .2.4.2) . Let
a
be a vertex of the simplicial space
X.
Then the
a-th barycentric coordinate
bar (x) is well defined for any point x a belonging to any simplex which has a as one of its vertices (see 1 . 2 and 1.6), and we obtain a continuous function bar (x) = 0 a not have a
for those points
x G X
bar : X -> IR if we set a contained in simplices which do
bar_ is called the a-th barycentric function. a Given two arbitrary distinct points x,y E X, there obviously is a
vertex
a
as a vertex.
such that
bar_ (x) f bar_ (y). a a
Consequently, every simplicial
space is Hausdorff. When a set
X
endowed with a triangulation already has a
topology, it is useful to find conditions ensuring that the topology defined by the triangulation is identical with the initial one. have an immediate necessary and sufficient condition:
We
the topology of
each simplex in the triangulation coincides with the topology induced by the initial topology of
X,
and the cover of
X
by the supports of
these simplices is fundamental in the initial topology.
If this
condition is satisfied, then the given triangulation is said to be a triangulation of the initial topological space
X.
Example: the cover
of a topological simplex by all its faces is a triangulation of this simplex. A simplicial space is ordered if its simplices are ordered in such a way that the orders of the faces of any simplex agree with the order of the simplex itself.
In particular, this holds whenever the
order of the simplices is induced by some order on the set of all vertices of the given space, which incidentally shows that a simplicial space can be always ordered. 2.
We shall presently describe a fundamental class of
simplicial spaces.
Given an arbitrary nonempty set
A,
we let
Si A
denote the set of all nonnegative, finitely supported functions $: A IR such that with the subset of Si A
^ = ^ ^ B c: a , then we identify consisting of all functions £ Si A
such that
x £ A \ B.
(x) = 0
elements, then
Si A
for
If
A
is finite and has
Si B
r +1
is obviously a topological simplex: indeed,
Si A
103
is a subset of the (r+1)-dimensional Euclidean space of all functions A + JR.
Moreover, corresponding to the
(r+ 1) i
homeomorphisms
(x^ ,.. ./xr + ■ Y
Every injective simplicial map is a
ske^Y Y.
f: X ^ Y
is uniquely defined
from the set of vertices of
A map
ske^X ->• ske^Y
X
into
extends to a
if and only if it carries the vertices of each
into the vertices of a simplex of
Y.
is injective (invertible) if and only if
A simplicial map ab f : ske^X
ske^Y
is injective (respectively, invertible). Two simplicial spaces which can be transformed one into another by a simplicial homeomorphism are said to be simplicial homeomorphic. 6.
A simplicial map
f: X
simplicial spaces, is monotone if a
and
b,
of X
Y,
where
f(a) < f(b)
X
and
Y
are ordered
for any pair of vertices,
which belong to the same simplex and satisfy
a < b.
Every simplicial map between simplicial spaces can be made monotone by suitably ordering the spaces.
Moreover, if
X
and
Y
are
105
simplicial spaces and simplicial map
Y
is ordered, then one can transform a given
f: X -+ Y
into a monotone one my suitably ordering
X;
indeed, it suffices to order arbitrarily the preimage of each vertex of Y,
and then order the simplices of
f(a) < f(b)
or
f(a) = f(b)
3. 1. M
A
is a set and
and
contains, along with each set scheme that map
(M',S ')
(,0)
by $ .
of
Obviously,
the scheme d> and
into
(p: M
( M ^ S 1)
$
($,$)
all the parts of
M'
(M,S)
(A) £ S'
for all
into
AGS.
is invertible and
is called an isomorphism.
(M,S)
If
0(S) = S',
Two simplicial schemes
which can be related by an isomorphism are isomorphic. A simplicial scheme (M ',S 1 )
scheme
complete if
if
A G S ’
2. simplices of A
and
X
X
A c= M
S c=s'. imply
and the cover of
For example, the scheme of The map X*
A
(M,S) is
AGS.
ske^X
Si A
ske^X
of a
by the 0-skeletons of the X
(see 2.2)
and is denoted by consists of the set
by all its finite subsets.
ab f : skeQX + skeQX'
induced by a simplicial map
takes the 0-skeleton of each simplex of
0-skeleton of a simplex of sch X * ,
The subscheme
is termed the scheme of the space
and of the cover of
f: X
and
is a subscheme of the simplicial
The simplicial scheme given by the skeleton
simplicial space sch X .
M c M'
(M,S)
X*.
X
into the
Hence it defines a map of
called the scheme of the map
f
and denoted by
schX schf .
into The
discussion in 2 . 5 implies that a simplicial map is uniquely determined by its scheme, that every map of some simplicial map
X -* X',
sch X
into
sch X '
is the scheme of
for any simplicial spaces
X
and
X*,
and that a simplicial map is invertible if and only if its scheme is an isomorphism.
In particular, two simplicial spaces
simplicial homeomorphic if and only if their schemes
X
and schX
X’ and
are sch X '
are isomorphic. 3.
If
X
is a subspace of the simplicial space
X',
then
106
sch X
is a subscheme of
if
is complete.
X
sch X 1
s c h X 1 ,and
sch X
is complete if and only
Moreover, it is clear that every subscheme of
is the scheme of a subspace of X*. In particular, let (M,S) bean arbitrary simplicial
and consider the simplex schSiM,
and so
(M,S)
SiM .
Obviously,
(M,S)
scheme,
is a subscheme of
is the scheme of a subspace of
Si M .
Thus,
every simplicial scheme is the scheme of a simplicial space.Moreover, given an arbitrary simplicial space scheme of
X
A simplicial scheme
orders of the subsets of a < b.
(M,S)
and
X
to be the can be
Si ske^X . (M,S)
are ordered and the order of each set schemes
we may take (M,S)
and conclude that every simplicial space
simplicially embedded in 4.
X,
A.
(M',S!)
is ordered if the sets of is compatible with the
A f. S
A map
(,$)
S
between ordered simplicial
is monotone if
by
■ { ij=! i S ' i
" 1
•
All that remains is to verify that if x = (x„,...,x ) and cf 1 q +1 X' = (x^,...,x’+1) belong toskenT4 and f(x) =f (x'), then x = x ’. Since each of the points x and x' lies in an n-dimensional face of q T , at most n+1 ofthe numbersx. ,... ,x ., and n+1 ofthe numbers 1 q+ 1 xi x'+ r are different from zero. Consequently, no more that 2n+2 numbers
x^-x^,...,x^+^-x^+^
j-,'••• »j2n +2
positive integers x-j = X'
for
j f
j,
i =
= °' Jr
The determinant of the matrix x. = x * . Dr
for
i|:]
i 1 «}
{
1 = 0 ,...,2 n+ 1 .
L 1 —U
r = 1 f...f2 n +2 f
3 (INFORMATION).
f 10 —
r- 2n+2
I
and finally
For any
n
does not vanish, and x = x*.
there are n-dimensional
polyhedra which cannot be topologically embedded in is
and
1 ,..., 2 n + 1 , we have
j r (xi Jr
so
such that
j2nt2.
¡? :i
for
are different from zero, i.e., there are
ske T2n+2; n
An example
see [10] for a proof.
5. 1.
IR2n.
Simplicial Constructions
Many of the topological and cellular constructions
described in§ 1.2
and Subsection 1.5
can be replaced by parallel
constructions which produce simplicial spaces out of simplicial ones. The simplest examples are the
J
and
V
operations: a sum of
simplicial spaces and a bouquet of pointed simplicial spaces with vertices as base points are obviously simplicial spaces.
There are also
more elaborate constructions, the more important ones being discussed below.
The main one is the barycentric subdivision construction, which
refines triangulations and has no analogs in § 1.2 and Subsection 1.5. 2(LEMMA). space
X by
Let
T
be a fundamental cover of the topological
triangulated subspaces.
the intersection
A 0 B
Suppose that for any
is a complete subspace of both
(considered as simplicial spaces) and inherits from
A
A,B €
r
A
and
B
and
B
the
108
same triangulation.
Then there exists a unique triangulation of
relative to which the elements of This triangulation of
r X
X
become simplicial subspaces.
is simply the union of the
triangulations of the elements of
r.
One may check directly that this
union satisfies conditions (i), (ii), and (iii) in 2 . 1
[the completeness
of the intersections
Uniqueness is
A n B
is necessary for (iii)].
also evident.
Barycentric Subdivision 3. baX , X
The construction below produces a new simplicial space,
from any simplicial space
X,
such that
b aX
is identical to
as a topological space, but has a finer triangulation, called the
barycentric subdivision of the initial triangulation. Consider first a Euclidean simplex numeration
a,*,...,a O r
of the vertices of
{x E X I bar
a_
(x) £ bar
0
a„
X,
X.
For an arbitrary
form the set
(x) X .
a correct definition, i.e., the triangulation of
X
This is clearly
thus obtained does
not depend on the choice of the simplicial homeomorphism the (r+1 )! available ones. Finally, let consider the cover of
X X
Tr ,
Tr
X
among
be an arbitrary simplicial space, and by its simplices, each subdivided as above.
It is easy to verify that this cover satisfies the conditions of Lemma 2, and hence we obtain a new triangulation of
X,
which is precisely
the barycentric subdivision of the initial triangulation of
X.
109
We note that the barycentric subdivision transforms a finite (locally finite) simplicial space into a finite (respectively, locally finite) one.
Moreover, if
4.
X
is a polyhedron, then so is
The set of vertices of the space
the set of centers of
the simplices of
X.
ba X
baX .
equals exactly
The centers of the simplices
S1'**‘'Sm °f X are the vertices of a simplex of ba X if and only if S1'*‘*'Sm Can be reindexed to form an increasing sequence. This observation enables us to give a concise description of the barycentric subdivision in the language of schemes: sch ba X = (S,ba S) , finite parts of
S
where
ba S
if
sch X = (M,S),
is precisely the collection of those
that can be ordered by inclusion.
we obtain a canonical
order of
whenever the simplex (of with center a ’.
ba X : if
X) with center
X*.
ba X 1
is a complete subspace of Indeed,
sch ba X
a
sch ba X
whenever
X
f: X
ba X'
X* = t \
f (ort^ ) = ort^ , f (ort^) = f(ort^) = ort^) . sch X'
naturally induces a map ba X
ba f
monotone.
and is clearly always rf
X
of the simplices of
ba X *
X
times
ba X
the map
.
take
2
X = T ,
However, the sch ba X
Thelatter is
sch ba X ', denoted by
does not exceed the maximal diameter
n/(n + 1) ,
It is enough to show that if bigger than
X',
sch ba X ’.
is a polyhedron, then the maximal diameter of the
simplices of the polyhedron
with vertices
is a subspace of
is not simplicial (the simplest example:
and hence a simplicial map
5.
shows that
is clearly a complete subscheme of
f: ba X
sch f : sch X
a < a1
then
is contained in the simplex
In general, given a simplicial map
map
At the same time,
a,a’ € skeQba X ,
In particular, the above description of baX
then
where X
n = dim X .
is the Euclidean simplex
a«,...,a , then the diameter of the simplex (2 ) is no O r [r/ (r+1)]diamX . Consider the part X ’ of X defined by
the inequality
bar
(x) ^ r/(r+1). X' is the Euclidean simplex ar obtained by contracting X towards the vertex a^ by a factor of r/(r+1).
Consequently,
that
contains the simplex (2).
X'
6
(COROLLARY).
is a positive integer bamX
diamX'
has diameter
m
< e.
s?
[r/(r + 1 )]diam X ,
For any polyhedron
X
and we finally note
and any
e
> 0
there
such that every simplex of the polyhedron
110
Simplicial Products 7. and X^
dim X^ X2
If
X^
and
are
>0 , then it is
simplicial spaces with
readily seen that their cellular product
does not admit a triangulation such that the interiors of its
simplices are products of interiors of simplices of However, we shall presently show that
X2
X^
X^
X^.
X^
and
X^
This construction produces a simplicial space out of
called the simplicial product of To begin with, let
X^
X^
and
an ,...,a ,
and let
X,
vertices
bg,...,br .
Set for
x^ G X^
U
q
= ^ =0 bara ' k
“i^l*
nondecreasing sequence
(x^ ,x2> G X^ x x 2
and
JRn
qr
,
q
in a
Further, let {1 ,...,q+r},
elements of
denote the set of all points
such that each of the numbers
^p^x i'x 2 ^'
yQ (x^) ,...,Yq _ 1 (x1) .
is equal to one of the numbers
with
x^ G X^:
Y-j (x^ ,x2) , .. .,y^ +r (x^ ,x2) .
y G M
with
6 j (x2 ) = ^ 1 =0 barb 1 (X2 )' J 1
denote the collection of subsets with where
IRm
a 0 (x1 ),...,a^_^(x^),6 0 (x2 ),...,6 r_^(x2)
and arrange the numbers
s(y),
X^ x^ x ^ -
be the Euclidean simplex in
Z
are
X^ xc X2 ,
and denoted by
X^,
be the Euclidean simplex in
vertices
and let
and
admits triangulations,
and we shall construct a canonical triangulation when ordered.
dim X^ > 0
P £ U/
One may check
directly that there is no (q+r- 1 )-dimensional plane containing the q+r +1 points (aQ /bQ) /• ••t (an ,b • — -j) 7 J1
(a1 ,b. 1
(a.,b. _n)?
Ji
1
1
J9
z
:3>
(aq-i ,bj q- ( q- i ) ] ' ' ' ' ' (V i ' bj q- q); (aq'br) '
(aq'b j - q *
where
G y, ^
j-j < •••< j
Also,one may verify that
jk + r (k+1)
k =0 l =i -k[Yk+l + 1 (X1 ,X2 ) Jk for
.
(x1 fx2) € s(p),
Tq+r +i (x i/x2^ =
‘
jQ = 0 ,j^ +1 Moreover,
" Yk + 1 (x1 ,x2 )] (ak'bl ) = (xi'x 2 ] = q +r + 1 ,
Yq (x^,x ^ )
=
and
and
Yp+ 1 ,$).
We defineScyl f
sch f
sch Scyl f = (M1 I |M ,S) ,
where
i
sets
A c M 1J [M2 such that:
(ii)
(Min” 1 (A)) U in2 1 (A)
in” 1 (A) E $ (S 1) ; a2
Scyl f .
sch
Scylf
in2 ° (a),
induces
1)
M 1J_[_M2
acertain map
sch (X„ x I) -* sch Scyl f, and hence a simplicial map X 1 * I -> Scyl f . 1 S I S Clearly, together with the inclusion X 2 -+■ Scyl f , this simplicial map
114
yields a continuous map a continuous map
csc f : Cyl f
csc f (Cyl f ) = Scyl f , rtf : Cyl f -► X^ partition
(X^ x I )J Scyl f .
zer(csc f) .
Moreover, we see that
and that the canonical retraction Also, the canonical
Cyl f
elements of the partition
zer(csc f)* zer(id I)
composition of the inclusion obviously equals
f.
Scylf
X^ -> Scylf
homotopy equivalence if and only if
Stars.
Links.
s
which
st s
s.
in a simplicial space
contain s.
which
Clearly,
(x) > 0 ,...,bar
sis the union of
a q
Sts
or
sts
or
the interiors
st(s,X).
It is
> 0,
(x)
are the vertices of
do not intersect
lk s
is the
X.
Notation:
The link of the simplex Sts
Notation:
X
is the open set defined by the inequalities
0
aQ ,...,a^
is a
Regular Neighborhoods
The open star of the simplex of all simplices containing
s.
s
Moreover,
is the union of all simplices in
s.Notation:
is a subspace of
C i s t s = Sts .
Iks or
the spaces X
lk(s,X).
and
Sts .
The following are obvious facts. If
s'
is a face of
s,
then
St s 1 c s t s ,
st s' c st s ,
If
are vertices which do not sit in the same
a^,...,a^
simplex,then the intersection aQ,...,a u ^
lk s 1 c Iks .
sta,
are vertices of a simplex
s,
is empty. then
q n r n st a . = st s . i=0
If
l
X
is
is a homotopy equivalence.
is a subspace of
where
with this retraction ->Scylf
St(s,X).
Sts
rtf
and the
X^f
the inclusion X^
X
an
Consequently,
Scyl f
union of all simplices of
bar
.
X^
f
1. The star of a simplex Clearly,
id(Cylf)
is constant on the
We conclude that the inclusion
always a homotopy equivalence, whereas
6.
X^-homotopy from
^ ^ > X^ — — — ► Cyl f
strong deformation retraction
readily seen that
which in turn induces
(see 1.2.6.10) is constant on the elements of the
to the composite map defines a
Scyl f ,
is a subspace of
s t (s,X) = st (s,X *) n X
X*,
then
However,
if
115
for any simplex
s
of
X.
Moreover, if
St(s,X) = St (s ,X 1) n X
and
X
is complete, then
lk(s,X) = lk(s,X') fl X.
Finally, if s 1is a simplex of
lk(s,X),
then
lk(s' ,1k(s,X)) = lk(s",X ) , where
s"
is
the smallest simplex containing s
2.
s f.
We can extend the definition of the star, open star, and
link to points of a simplicial space St(x,X ) , the open star are defined as St x
stx
= St six,
Obviously,
for x £ X,
= st(x,X),
st x
stx
X:
= stsix,
and lk x
is a neighborhood of
pr (y ,t) ^ A
h: U x I
U
U.
of a
with
st(a,X)
with
is a deformation
In fact, there is even a
from
id U
with the inclusion
1 - t
A
A
to the composition of
A -> U .
This homotopy is given
barb (x) bar (x) I a bEske^A -, bar, (x) b bEske^A
if a £ ske^A,
bar (h(x,t)) = < a t bar (x) , a
if
a £ skenX \ ske A. u u
In particular, this shows that every subspace of a simplicial space
X
is a deformation retract of its regular neighborhood in
ba X
(see 5.4).
Barycentric Stars and Barycentric Links 6 . The barycentric star of the simplex
space X
s
is the union of all simplices of ba X
first vertex the center
of
s. Notation:
equivalent description:
bsts
bsts
of a simplicial
which have as their or
bst(s,X).
is the set of all points
An
x £ X such
that bar (x) = bar, (x), a b
if
a,b £ s D skenX, U
bar (x) 5 bar, (x) , a b
if
a G ske_X, u
and b G (X \ s) D skenX. u
It is clear that the barycentric stars of the simplices of cover
X
whenever
and are subspaces of s f
s',
and
bsts
baX .
Moreover, bst s f
c bsts'
whenever s o s'.
7. The union of those simplices bst s
bst s'
which do not contain the center of
of the barycentric star s
is the barycentric link
X
118
of the simplex
s,
and is denoted by
blk s .
The star
bsts
is
clearly simplicial homeomorphic to the cone over
blk s .
the rectilinear projection from the center of
induces a homeomorphism
of
blk s
onto the link
lk s
barycentric subdivision of simplicial one). (con Iks,Iks)
of the simplex
lk s
(bst s,blk s)
Let
f: X
Y
A simplicial map f
if
g: X
g(x) £ sif(x)
canonically homotopic to
f:
X
joining
f(x)
x
I
2.
and
g(x).
a
of
PROOF. f,
and let
x £ X
x £
x £ X; st a^ ,
g: X Y
x £ st a .
if
g(x)
Y
sif(x) ,
3.
from
of the
is a simplicial approximation
if and only if
g
f(sta)
c= stg(a)
for
is a simplicial approximation
Recalling that
g(x) £ si f (x) ,
that
g
is
vertex
lies in the interior of a simplex with Thus,
g(a)
f(sta)
aQ ,...,a
whence
Therefore, the points g (aQ),...,g(a ) ,
x x I
Y
is
g(x) = f(x).
u
is a vertex of
c stg(a)
for every vertex
are the vertices of
g(aQ),...,g(a )
and since
si f (x) ,
si f (x) ,
and a
of
then
4
f (x) e f (ni=o s t a ±) c ni=0 flsta.)
simplex
I
x
lies in the interior of a simplex with
Now suppose that q
where
Assume first that
we conclude that
Pick
Y
X.
vertex g(a) (see 1.3). hence f (x) c: stg(a). X.
X
f: X
It is clear that this homotopy is stationary
f: X
simplicial, and that x a,
Y are
x £ X.
of the map
the canonical homotopy
A simplicial map
of the continuous map every vertex
and
is a simplicial
for any point g
X
onto the (possibly degenerate) rectilinear segment
on the set of the points
of
Y
is an affine mapping from each generatrix
cylinder
(and the
and
be a continuous map, where
Every simplicial approximation g
X
Simplicial Approximation of Continuous Maps
approximation of
to
in
transforms this homeomorphism into s
Therefore, the pairs
simplicial spaces.
f
s
are homeomorphic.
7. 1.
s
Moreover,
g(x)
■ Y
of simplicial spaces has a
simplicial approximation if and only if for each vertex
a
of
X
there
119
is a vertex
b
of_
Y
such that f(sta)
cr st b .
The necessity of this condition is an immediate consequence of
2.
To prove
f(sta)
its sufficiency, fix a map
cp: skeQX -+ skeQY
c st (p (a )for every vertex
vertices of a simplex of
demonstrate that
0 such that, given any subset with
diamA
< e,
stars (see 1.1.7.16). bamx
and,
of a finite simplicial spac
Without loss of generality, we may assume that polyhedron constitute
that
(see 6.1),
applying 2 , this extension is a simplicial approximation of
X
such that
have
Let
f(A) m
e /2
(see 5.6).
Then
the diameter of its star is less than
f: bamX -> Y
e,
given any vertex and 3 shows that
has a simplicial approximation.
8.
1.
open
belarge enough so that the simplices of
diameters less than
bamX,
is contained in one of these
Let
X
Exercises
be a simplicial space.
Show that the formula
dist(x,y) = [ I (bar (y) - bar (x) ) 2 ] 1 ^ 2 a€skeQX defines a metric on
X,
and verify that the resulting metric topology
coincides with the initial topology if and only if 2.
Show that for every polyhedron
triangulation of
IRn
X c IRn
is locally finite. there is a
by Euclidean simplices, relative to which
becomes a simplicial subspace of 3.
X
IRn .
Show that every connected, locally finite, .n-dimensional
simplicial space can be simplicially embedded in
IR
triangulated
by Euclidean simplices. 4.
X
Let
f: X
Y
be continuous, where
X
and
Y
are
120
simplicial spaces.
Produce a new triangulation of
following two properties:
a)
X
with the
each of its simplices is contained in
one of the simplices of the original triangulation;
b)
f
has a
simplicial approximation relative to the new triangulation.
§3.
HOMOTOPY PROPERTIES OF CELLULAR SPACES
1. 1.
Suppose that
subspace of zero on
X.
A
Cellular Pairs
Let
X
is a rigged cellular space and
h ^ : A U ske^X -+ I
and equal to
1
a sequence of functions
on
is
denote the function equal to
(A U skeQX) \ A ,
h^_: A U ske^X
hr-1 ^
A
I
and define inductively
(r = 1,2,...),
'
such that
if
x E A U sker_^X,
if
x = chae u,
by the formula
if
x € U
if
x = cha (ty ),
Fr (x,t) cha (((1 —t)i + t)y), where
e G cell^X ^ cell^A,
homotopies
Gr :
x I
u,
i
E (0,1],
r
>. Î ,
and
Fr (x,2 rt- 1 ) ,
if
Gr- 1 (Fr (x,1),tl'
i£
Each homotopy
Gr
an A-homotopy
U x i -> u
r- 1 '
y G Sr ^ .
Now construct
by if
Gr (x,t) =
A -*■ X,
0 g t £ 2 r, t < 2~r+1 ,
2 rt1
i t c 1-
extends the preceding one, and together they yield from
id U
to a map which takes
The compression of the last map to a map
U
A
U
into
A.
is the desired strong
deformation retraction. 3.
Every cellular pair is a Borsuk pair.
This is a consequence of 2 combined with 1.3.5.11, because cellular spaces are normal, and their subspaces are distinguishable. 4.
If_
(X,A)
is a cellular pair and the inclusion
is a homotopy equivalence, then of
A
A
X
is a strong deformation retract
X. In order toprove this,
to the
pair (X,A),then apply
(X x I , to the
3 and1.3.5 . 6
firstapply theorems
Theorem
(X x0) U (A x i) u (X x 1 ))
3 to the pair
and, finally, apply Theorem1.3.5.7
pair (X,A).
Cellular Pairs and k-Connectedness 5. (X,A)
Let
k
be a nonnegative integer or
is a cellular pair such that all the cells in
dimension at most
k,
topological pair.
Then every continuous map
f(A)
B
and let
(Y,B)
X ^ A
°°.
Suppose that
have
be an arbitrary k-connected
is A-homotopic to a map which takes
f: X X
Y
such that
into a subset of
B.
In particular, every continuous map of a k-dimensional cellular space
122
into a k-connected topological space is homotopic to a constant map. PROOF.
We exhibit a sequence of A-homotopies
{f ^ : (A U ske^X) x I -*
each extending the preceding one, and
satisfying the conditions: (i) F^(x,0) = f(x) (ii)
for all
x £ A U ske^X;
F ((A U skerX) x (1-2~r-1)) c: B; —
(iii)
F (x,t)
Then the map (A U ske^X) x i
does not depend upon F : X x I ->Y
will be
homotopy of
f|A ,
for t
which equals
ahomotopy fromf
into a subset of B. We proceed by induction.
t
to a
Define
—
F^ on map which takes
F_^
and assume that homotopies
1
^ 1- 2
X
as the constant F_^, . . . '
each
extending its predecessor and satisfying (i)-(iii), are already constructed. Fg =
•
If
A U ske X = X and we simply take q So suppose now that q < k. Since the pair
({A U ske^X) x homotopy
q > k,
then
I,(AU ske^_^X) x I)
G of the
map f|AUsk
Using the fact that
x,
B,
for each cell
he
there is a
suchthat
G|
^ x) xl = Fq_., .
a map
e £ cell
k-connectedness of the pair e £ cell^X \ cell^A,
(see 3),
q (Y,B)
h^:
->Y
the formula S^ 1
which takes
X \ cell A. Now take advantage of the q to deduce that, given any cell
there is an S^ 1-homotopy
to a map whose image is a subset of
B.
x i -y y
from
We put
F .(x,t), q- 1
F (x,t) = M.
(AU
F . ( (A U ske .X) x (1-2 q )) c B, q- 1 q- 1
he (y) = G (cha^ (y) ,1-2defines into
isBorsuk
if
x £ A U ske
.X, q- 1
G (x,t) ,
if 0 sc t £1-2-q,
He ba a
is simplicial and h (t) c f (k ) c h (a). Since B => Sr , f. is 2~ y I y y \ S -homotopic to f, and to complete the proof of our lemma it suffices to examine (I) and (II) for f r a t h e r than f. Consider an arbitrary ball 6 X
According to
f: ske^X x i -> x
to a map which takes ske^X
into
A.
from
Define
127
F:skekX x I
i + xby
x
C=
Ffx,^,^)
=
ffx,^),
and set
(skekX x i x 0) U (skekX x (0 U 1) x I) u (skekA
x Ix i)
and D = ske. X x i x 1 . k Obviously,
C
skekXX 1 X
I 'and the map Y=
and
D
F
is cellular.
Y
Y
and
B
is a cellular space, and it is clear that
containing
skekY.
To verify that imm2 (A)
have the same homotopy type, note that retract of B and fact, the formula
Now define Y
imm2 (X)
by
b = imm2 (A) U imm1 (D).
X Up j (skekX x i x i),
By 1 .5.5, a subspace of
are subspaces of the cellular space
(X,A)
and
is
(Y,B)
is a strong deformation
is a strong deformation retract of
(imm1 (x,t1 , 1 ) ,t) h- imm1 (x,tt1 , 1 )
B
Y.
In
t,t1 £ I],
[x €skekX,
-
(imm2 (x),t) h- imm2 (x) defines a homotopy
t £ I],
B * I -»■ B,stationary on
B ->- imm2 (A) .
a retraction
[x € A,
imm2 (A) ,
from
id B
to
Similarly, the formula
(imm1 (x, t^ ,t2) ,t) h- imm1 (x,t1 ,tt2)
t,t 1 ,t2 £I],
[x £ skekX,
•
Y ,stationary on
Y -> imm2 (X).
a retraction
[x £ X,
(Y,B)
from
id Y
(Y,imm2 (A))
(see 1.3.5.8 )
to
is
and
and it remains to observe that the pairs
(imm2 (X),imm2 (A)) 2.
imm2 (Y),
Consequently, the pair
homotopy equivalent to both the pairs (imm2 (X),imm2 (A)),
t £ I],
and
(X,A)
are homeomorphic.
Every k-connected cellular space
(0 £ k £
°°) is homotopy
equivalent to a cellular space whose k-skeleton reduces to a point. PROOF. 0-cell
xQ
in
lular pair A
X.
(X,A)
is contractible,
and 1.3), and 3. Y
Let
X
be a k-connected cellular space and choose a
The pair such that Y
(X,xQ)
is homotopy equivalent to a cel
A => ske^X
(see 1).
Set
has the same homotopy type as
it is clear that
ske^Y
Y = X/A. Since X(see 1.3.7.7
is just a point.
Theorem 2 says nothing about the dimension of the space
which replaces the given space
that one can always choose
Y
X.
However, its proof demonstrates
to satisfy
dimY
£ max(dim X ,k +2).
Our
128
k = 0
next task is to prove that for sharpened to
dimY
(see 6 ).
- dim X
4 (LEMMA).
r
: Y
If id Yv
Vi nV then the formula
Y
00
be a topological space, and let iY^^^ =q 0 whenever k - 1 > 1 . be a fundamental cover of Y such that yk n y i If Y, „ D Y, is a stronq deformation retract of Y, for all k > 1 , — k- 1 k ^----------------------k — — — — then Yn is a strong deformation retract of Y . PROOF. from
Let
the last equality may be
x I
is a homotopy, stationary on k
to a map which takes
y G Y, J k
if
into
Yk - 1
n Yk ,
t £ 2
and
(y /1 ) F i ( F 1 +1 ( ... F k (x,1 ) ...,1),2 t-1 ) ,
if
y € Y. J k
2 1 a t < 2 1+1
defines an Y^-homotopy into
Y x i
y
from
id Y
and
(1
S k),
to a map which takes
Y
Yq . 5.
Given any connected cellular space
contractible one-dimensional subspace of PROOF.
X
Fix an arbitrary 0-cell k
1-cells.
x^
Since
there is a
containing all the 0-cells. in
the set of all 0 -cells that can be joined to which touches at most
X,
^0
ske^X
X
and let
by a path
Now given any 0-cell
closed 1 -cell
c (x)
joining
x E A^ \ Ak-1 x
k ^ 1,
to some cell in
O'
if
k = 0,
if
k > 0,
I
be t ske^X
is connected (see
1.4.7), and a path can touch only a finite number of cells, = ske^X.
A^
k- 1
U k =0 Ak pick a
k- 2 '
and set
Yk = U
c (y) ,
y e A k'Ak-i and
uu
Y = Uk=Q Yk .
containing
skeQX,
Obviously,
and the cover
of Lemma 4. Therefore, YQ i.e., Y is contractible. 6.
Y
is a one-dimensional subspace of {Yk }
of
Y
X
satisfies the conditions
is a strong deformation retract of
Y,
Every connected n-dimensional cellular space is homotopy
equivalent to a cellular space of dimension at most only one 0-cell.
n,
and having
In particular, every connected one-dimensional
cellular space is homotopy equivalent to a bouquet of circles. This results from 5, 1.3, and 1.3.7.7.
129
Applications to Cellular Constructions 7. su(X,Xq),
If the cellular space
where
xQ
X
is k-connected, then
su X
and
is a 0 -cell, are (k+1 )-connected.
The proof reduces to three remarks.
First, since
su X
and
have the same homotopy type (see 1.4.5, 1.3.6 .8 , and 1.3. 7. 7),
su(X,xQ)
the (k+1 )-connectedness of one is equivalent to the (k+1 )-connectedness of the other. verify that if
Secondly, according to 2 and 1.3.7.12, it is enough to su(X,xQ)
ske^X = X q ,
is (k+1)-connected when
ske^X = x Q .
then the (k+1)-connectedness of
s u
is a
(X,X q )
corollary of Theorem 2, because under this assumption
And thirdly, 1 su(X,x )
ske,
k+f
u
also reduces to a point. 8.
a 0-cell of and
Suppose X^,
X^
is a k^-connected cellular space and
i = 1,2.
(X.,x ) 0 (Xn ,xn) 1 1 c 2 2
Then the tensor products
is
(X^,x^) 0 (X^^x^)
are (k +k +1)-connected. ---------1 2
Again, the proof reduces to three remarks. (X^,x^) ® (X^fX^)
x^
First, since
induces on its compact subsets topologies which are
identical to those induced by the topology of
(X^,x^)
(X^fX^,
the
(k1 +k2 + 1 )-connectedness of one of these spaces implies the (ki+k2 + 1 )-connectedness of the other. it is enough to verify that
(X^,x^)
Secondly, using 1 and 1.3.7.12, (X^/X^)
is (k^+k2 + 1 )-connected
when
skev X = x and ske, X = x 9 . Thirdly, under these k^ 1 1 .K2 circumstances, the (k1 +k2 +1 )-connectedness of (X^,x^) ©c (X2 ,x2) follows from Theorem 2, because
skek
reduces to a point. 9 (LEMMA). 0 -cells (XwX„) 1 1
x^ * C
®c (X2 'x 2>)
also
^ and X 2
For any cellular spaces
with
and x 2 taken as base points, the cellular join (X0 ,x„) is homotopy equivalent tosu((X„,x„) ®_ (X0 ,x0 ),bp). z
PROOF. su((X 1 ,x1) ©c
z ------------ — 1 1
I I
By definition, the spaces
(X2 ,x2 ),bp)
(X^x^)
are obtained from
C
z
*c (X2 ,x2>
z
and
(X1 x^ X2> x I by taking
quotients two times, and the projection (X1 xc x2^ * 1 -> su ( (x^ ,x ^) ©c (X2 ,x2 ),bp) is constant on the elements of the partition
zer (pr:(X., xc x2 ) x I -> ^
, x ^ ) *c
(X2 ,x2)). The resulting
map f = fact [pr: (X1 : su((X
xc x2 ) x I -v(X1 ,Xl) *c (X2 ,x2)]: ®c (X2 ,x2 ),bp) -> (X1 ,x1 ) *c (X2 ,x2 )
130
is factorial (see 1.2.3.4). zer(f)
Since the only element of the partition
which does not reduce to a point is
-1
(bp), we see that
(X2 ,x2 ),bp) = [ (X1 /X1 ) *c (X2 ,x2)]/f 1 (bp) .
sudx^x^ note that
f
f_ 1 (bp) = [(X ,x.j) *c (x2 ,x2 >] U [ ( x ^ x ^
Finally,
*c (X2 ,x2 )],
and
since this union is contractible, the quotient space [(X.jjX.j) *c (X2 ,x2)]/f 1 (bp) (X1 'x 1 > *c (X2 'X 2 )* 10. Letthe
cellularspaces
respectively k^-connected. (X1 ,x^ ) * (X2 ,x2), and 0 -cells, are
is homotopy equivalent to
X^
X 2 be
and
Then the joins
X^ * X2 ,
(X1 /x 1) *c (X2 ,x2 >,
and
X^ *c X2 , x1
where
k^and
x 2 are
(k^ +k2 +2 )-connected.
The proof reduces to four remarks.
First, since
(X1 fX1) * (X9 ,x9) i s a q u o t i e n t of X * X 9 by a c o n t r a c t i b l e s p a c e 1 1 C Z Z I c z (the closed 1 -cell x^ * x 2), (X^,x^) *c (X2 ,x2 ) and X^ *c X 2 have the same homotopy type.
Secondly,
subsets the same topologies as does
X^ *c X 2
induces on its compact
X^ * x 2 ,
and hence the (k^+k2 +2 )-
connectedness of one of these spaces implies the (k^ +k2 +2 )-connectedness of the other.
(X ,x^) * (X2 ,x2)
Thirdly, and from the same reason,
(ki+k 2 +2 )-connected if and only
if (X^,x^)*c (X2 ,x2)
is (k^+k2 +2 )-
Fourthly, the (k^+k2 +2)-connectedness of
connected.
is
(X^,x^) *c (X2 ,x2)
is an immediate consequence of 9, 8 , and 7.
4. 1
Simplicial Approximation of Cellular Spaces (LEMMA).
00
Suppose that
X
and
Y
are cellular spaces and
OO
r r=0 and Let f : X Y
r r=0 are filtrations of X and Y be a cellular map such thatf (X^) c: Y^
If all the maps
ab f : xr ^ Yr
PROOF.
Since the
by subspaces. (0 £ r £ «>) .
are homotopy equivalence, then so is = Cyl(abf : X^ + Y )
f.
are cellular sub
spaces of Z = Cyl f and satisfy the conditions Z cz Z „ and i r r +1 U n Z = Z, they yield a filtration of Z (see 1.1.9). Thus, the k image of any continuous map D Z is contained in one of the sets Z^
(see 1.2.4.5),
and so the pair
(Z,X)
is «-connected provided that
all the pairs
(Z ,X ) are ^-connected. Now note that (Z ,X ) is r r r r »-connected if and only if ab f : X^ Y^ is a homotopy equivalence; similarly,
(Z,X)
is “-connected if and only if
equivalence (see 1.3, 1.6, 1.3.3.9, and 1.3.7.13).
f
is a homotopy
131
2. Given any cellular space
X,
there is a simplicialspace
which has the same homotopy type and the same dimension as X ,and finite or countable together with X . The proof
consists of producing three sequences:
simplicial spaces r•
{Y }
1 00
Yr + 1 J
11 :
{fr * . skerX
,
one of
one of simplicial embeddings
and one of cellular homotopy equivalences
Yr }r_Q, (l)
,
is
with the following four properties:
fr|ske X = lr-1 ° fr-1; ' r- 1
(ii)
dim Yr = dim ske^X ;
(iii)
if
ske^X
is finite (countable), then
Y^
is finite
(respectively, countable); (iv)
if
ske X = ske .X, r r- 1
then
Y
r
= Y
. r- 1
and
i . r- 1
* l dYr - 1 • This will enable us to define the simplicial space having dimension
dim X ,
well as a cellular map
and finite or countable together with
f : X -> lim(Y ,i ) r r
Finally, we shall use Lemma 1 to show that Define
Yq
and
that simplicial spaces simplicial embeddings constructed for ske
„X U A, cr-1 cp
r < where
limfY^i^)
f^
Y , ir_'| '
as
ske^X
X,
as
fI , = imm 0 f. sKe x. r 1 r is a homotopy equivalence.
such that f and
id ske^X ,
and assume
cellular homotopy equivalences
f^,
and
satisfying (i)-(iv), are already
q. By 1.2.1, we may represent A = II n v (D = Dq ) J— Letcell qX e
and
ske^X as cp
is a continuous
map of
Z = I I , -- v (S = Sq“1) into ske X. Next triangulate - — Le€cell X e q-1 q A so that Z becomes a complete subspace and the map ° ^ : ^ ^ Yq-1 admits a simplicial approximation g: E -> Y .. Further, order Ya _ 1 q i Si 1 and £ in such a manner that the map g becomes monotone. Applying c
successively Theorems 1.3 .7.10, 1.3.7. 8 , and then again 1.3.7.10, we obtain three homotopy equivalences: a homotopy equivalence aqrees with ^
f . q- 1
on
ske
A ske X -* Y . Uf q q 1 q - 1 >■ Scyl g ]
inclusion
which
Yq_i ;
and a homotopy equivalence where
which
Yq_i Ug ^
(Scyl g)
(see 2.5.11), whichagrees with
Y _1 Scyl g on Y . q i vi At last, we may define Y
M
as
(Scyl g)
U. A,
f
A, the
^1
as
the
132
composition of the three homotopy equivalences above, and
as the
composite embedding
A
of the cylinder
i q * Scyl g -> Y ^ . The triangulations of
Scylgyield together a
2.5.2).
It is plain that
Y , f , q q
and 3.
countable.
(see q -*-s a simplicial embedding and that
PROOF. X
Y
i „ satisfy conditions (i)-(iv) for r = q. q-1 Let X and Y be cellular spaces with X finite and Then the settt(X,Y)
case when
triangulation of
and
and
Y
is countable.
By theorems 2 and 1.3. 1.8, we need only consider the Y
are simplicial spaces.
Theorem 2.4.7 shows that the cardinal of
Under this assumption,
tt (X,Y )
cardinal of the set of all simplicial mappings
does not exceed the
bamX
Y
(m = 0 ,1 , . ..) ,
and the latter is obviously countable.
5. 1. equivalent,
Exercises
Suppose that the cellular spaces i = 1,2.
Show that
X^ x^ x 2
and
X^
and
Xjj ^
equivalent, and that the same is true for the spaces
X^ x^
are homotopy are homotopy
X^ *c X 2
and
X i *c X 2 " 2. Show that every cellular space is homotopy equivalent to a locally finite cellular space. 3.
Show that every cellular pair is homotopy equivalent to
a simplicial pair, and that every finite cellular pair is homotopy equivalent to a finite simplicial pair. 4.
Show that there is no cellular space having the same
homotopy type as the subspace of the real line consisting of the points 0 and 1 /n, n = 1 ,2 ,... .
Chapter 3. Smooth Manifolds
§1 .
1. 1.
Topological Manifolds
This chapter comprises an elementary introduction to
differential topology. manifolds.
FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS
The basic objects of this theory are the smooth
They are defined in the next subsection and represent (as do
cellular and simplicial spaces) topological spaces with an additional structure.
The present subsection is devoted to topological manifolds,
which occupy
an
intermediate position between smooth manifolds and
topological spaces, and do not carry an additional structure.
Locally Euclidean Spaces 2.
A topological space is said to be a an n-dimensional
locally Euclidean space if each of its points has a neighborhood homeomorphic to the space
]Rn
or to the half space
]R^,
where
]R^
is the
set of all points (x„ ,...,x ) G ]Rn with x>, £ 0. The half space ]Rn " I n I is defined for n ^ 1 ; we do not define it for n = 0 and, accordingly, a 0-dimensional locally Euclidean space is simply a topological space such that each of its points has a neighborhood
homeomorphic to
]R^,
i.e., a discrete space. In a locally Euclidean space neighborhood homeomorphic to
IRn
X,
the points having a
are called interior points,
remaining ones are called boundary points.
while the
The interior (boundary)
points form the interior (respectively, the boundary) of the locally Euclidean space
X,
denoted by
ference between the notations
intX int,9
(respectively and
Int,Fr
3X).
(The dif
should prevent us,
134
in each context, from confusing the interior and boundary points, and the interior part and boundary defined here with the interior and boundary points and the interior part and boundary of a set in a topological space.)
Clearly, the interior of
whereas the boundary of
X
X
is a dense open set,
is closed.
If each point of a topological space has a neighborhood homeomorphic to an open subset of
IRn
or
,
then obviously it already is
an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space.
Consequently, every open
subset of an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space is also an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space.
In particular, the interior of
an n-dimensional Euclidean space is an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space without boundary. subset
U
Moreover, the interior and boundary of an open
of a locally Euclidean space
= U n int X
and
X
are given by
int U
=
d\J = U fl 3X.
Since a locally Euclidean space is locally connected, its components are open (see 1 .3.4.3), and hence also closed. Obvious examples of n-dimensional locally Euclidean spaces are
3Rn , 3R^,
Sn ,
and
Dn .
It is clear that
3nRn = 0
and
Furthermore, all the boundary points of the half space limiting hyperplane that
x^ = 0 ,
^,
consisting of the points
we see that the product
X^ x
and
n^
of
D
such
lie in the
Sn 1.
3. Since the product X^
lie in the (x ,.../XR )
and all the boundary points of the ball
limiting sphere
3Sn = 0.
dimensions
HR
n
x 3R
n2
is homeomorphic to
X
n i +n2
of two locally Euclidean spaces
and
,
,
X^
and without boundary, is an
(n i+n2)-dimensional locally Euclidean space. i.e., a product
3R
This is true in general,
of boundaryless locally Euclidean spaces s X i,...,X of dimensions n i ,...,n , is an (n I+...+n )-dimensional s s s boundaryless locally Euclidean space. Turning to locally Euclidean 1
x ... x x
spaces with boundary, note that the formula (x ,. ..,x
fyw...fy 1
n1
1R
for
x hr
n2
1
), 2
n l+ n 2 ]R r
n 1 > 0.
((x ,...,x ),(y ,...,y )) 1 nl 1 n2 which gives the canonical homeomorphism
also defines a homeomorphism
Similarly, the formula
((x , .. .,x
ni n2 3R x ]R ) , (y , ...,y
n1
** (y-i /•••fY
,...,x 2
for
n^ > 0 , 2
)
defines a homeomorphism
n2
x ]R_
ni n2 nR x ]R
((x^,...,x^ ) , (y^,...fy
2
n l+ n 2 -+ nR_
for
n i+n? -* 1R
"
(-2 x^y^,x^ - y^,X2 ,...rxn ,y2 '#’’'yn ^ R1
))
n2
1
and the formula
n i+n? 3R
n 1 > 0,
)) ^
defines a homeomorphism
n 2 > 0.
Thus, each of the products
135
n 1R_
x
IR
^1
,
n2
JR
x
3R_ ,
^ IR
and
x
IR_
conclude that given locally Euclidean spaces n^
and
n2 ,
the product
Euclidean space.
X^ x X^
n. +n^ HR.
is homeomorphic to and
X^
We
of dimensions
is an (n^+n2)-dimensional locally
In general, the product
locally Euclidean soaces of dimensions "
X^ x ... x X g
n., ...,n 1
of arbitrary
is an (n.+...+n )1 s
s
dimensional locally Euclidean space. 4.
The discussion in 2 raises two nontrivial questions.
The first one is whether a nonempty topological space can be a locally Euclidean space of dimension
n
and, simultaneously, a
locally Euclidean space of a different dimension
n' :
n1
n f
?
Chapter 4 this question is answered negatively (see 4.6.5.10). answer is obvious when
n1 > 1
n = 1,
or
n ’ =1,
n > 1.
In
The
In fact,
any connected subset
of a one-dimensional locally Euclidean space
becomes disconnected
after one removes two suitably choosen points (for
example, two points belonging to an open subset which is homeomorphic to
IR );
in contrast, every nonempty locally Euclidean space of n' > 1
dimension
contains a nonempty open subset which cannot be disconnected by removing two points (any open subset homeomorphic to IRn ^ has this property). n 1 =0.
The picture is cristal clear when
However, when
n > 1,
n ’ > 1,
n = 0
or
the proof requires a technique
which we will develop only later. The second question is whether we can formulate more efficient definitions ofthe interior and
boundary points, which would permit us
to actually recognize
them.
At this point we can
show only the trivial inclusion
2 ) , and we are
9IR^ = IR1? 1
For example, consider the half space
IR^.
3IR^ c ir1^
(see
forced to settle for one of the extreme equalities
or
3IR^ = 0
(which obviously are the only possible ones) . n -n— 1 We shall prove in Chapter 4 that 3lR_ = IR^ (see 4.6.5.12). This n = 1
equality is plain for neighborhood in 0
1
IR_
(assuming that the point
which is homeomorphic to
we would disconnect this neighborhood;
1
IR ,
has a
then by removing
this is absurd, because the
latter cannot happen to a connected neighborhood of for
0
0
in
1
IR_).
But
n > 1,
equality
we again need techniques which are to be developed. The ^ •>! 3IR_ = IR^ settles satisfactorily the general problem of
recognizing the interior and boundary points too. that a point
x
of the n-dimensional locally Euclidean space
has a
neighborhood
point
of
U,
Indeed, it follows
U
with a homeomorphism U
and hence, of
X,
if and only
X
which
IR^, is. a boundary ifthishomeomorphism
into a point of the hyperplane IR1? 1 . For Dn this theorem n n—1 asserts that 3D = S . Finally, we note that the alternative takes
x
equality
3IR^ = 0
would obviously imply that
9X = 0
for any
136
n-dimensional locally Euclidean space. 5.
In general, it would be more prudent not to use the
theorems formulated in 4, equality
= IR^ \
i.e., the theorem on dimensions and the
as long as they have not been proven.
This
indeed is the way we shall deal with the theorem on dimensions - the only exception is a harmless remark used the
equality
33R^ = 3R^ \
in 2.3.
However, we have already
and we will take advantage of it again,
before its proof, in 7 and in 2.6, 2.7.
But these are the only
instances where these theorems and their corollaries will be used before their proofs. 6.
The boundary of an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space
is an (n-1)-dimensional locally Euclidean space without boundary. Let and let
U
boundary
x
be a boundary point of the locally Euclidean space
be a neighborhood of 9U
is a neighborhood of
and is homeomorphic to
HRn ^ ,
to Chapter 4 for the equality alternative
x,
= 0
dlR
7.
homeomorphic to x
in
3X,
since
IR^.
X
Then the
3U = U fl 3X,
since 8 3R^ = 3R^? ^ (here the reference n n 1 8nR_ = nR^ is unnecessary: the
is excluded, because
3X ^ 0).
For any locally Euclidean spaces
X ^ ,.
'x s
int(X. x ... x X ) = int X. x ... x intX 1 s 1 s and 9 (X, x ... x x 1
) = OX, x x o x. ..x x ) U . . . U (X x . ..x X x3X ) . s 1 2 s 1 s- 1 s
It is enough to prove the statement for
s =
2. Let
x. E X . i
i
and let cp^ be a homeomorphism of a neighborhood LL of onto n. n. JR or HR_ , i = 1,2. Then cp^ x ^ is a homeomorphism of the x U2
neighborhood
of the point
(x^x^
n1 n2 n1 n2 nl n2 3R x IR , HR x HR_ , IR_ x IR or
3R_
onto one
n1 n? x JR_ ,and composing it
withone of the homeomorphisms exhibited in 3, we x u2
of
onto
n 1+n 2
!IR
or
n 1+n2
3R_
.
cp and analyse the four possible cases. n2
- IR
,
then
n 1+n2
cp(U^ x U2> - 3R
interior points.
If cp1 (U1 ) = 3R
n l+ n 2 cp(U^ x U2> = 3R_ , and n2 _1 ^ 2 ^x 2^ ^ ^1 “
Thus
nl
obtain a homeomorphism
We denote this composition by If
nl cp^ (U^ ) = IR
and
x^ , x 2 ,
and
n? )) = ip~^ ((-00,b^)) . 17.
Therefore, in case (ii)
X
is homeomorphic to
S1 .
Every compact, connected, one-dimensional manifold is S1
homeomorphic to either PROOF.
or
D1 .
For a start, assume that the given manifold is closed.
Then it can be covered by a finite number of open subsets homeomorphic 1
to 1R ,
and we may arrange these in a sequence V, = U 1 U ... U U,
each union
K
I
-rC
is connected.
U^,...,Us
such that
According to Lemma 16, -j
the first of the sets 1 1
morphic to
S ,
V 1,...,V not homeomorphic to IR is homeoi s and being both open and closed, it is the entire
manifold, which is thus homeomorphic to
S1 .
Assume now that the manifold has a boundary.
Then its double
is a closed, connected, one-dimensional manifold, and as such is homeo1
morphic to subset of
S . 1
S .
Therefore, the original manifold is homeomorphic to a Since this subset is connected, closed, nonempty, 1
different from
S ,
and not reduced to a point, it is homeomorphic to
D1 . 18 (LEMMA).
If a topological space
X
can be represented
as the union of a nondecreasing sequence of open subsets, all homeo morphic to
IR1 ,
then
PROOF.
Let
X
X = U
any homeomorphism of homeomorphism of (a,b+1),
or
cp2 : V2 ^ A2 ,..., interval U Ai ,
IR1 .
be the given representation.
onto some interval
(a,b)
V j_+-| onto one of the intervals
(a-1,b+1).
of intervals
is homeomorphic to
Hence one
Clearly,
extends to a (a,b),(a- 1 ,b) ,
can construct inductively a sequence
and a sequence of homeomorphisms suchthat ^ = abcpi+ 1 . which agrees with on
A ^,
The map of X onto the v i , is obviously a homeo-
141
morphism. 19. Every noncompact, connected, one-dimensional manifold is homeomoiphic to either IR or IR . PROOF. boundary.
Then
First, assume that the given manifold X
X
has no
can be covered by a countable family of open subsets,
all homeomorphic to
IR ,
and we can arrange these in a sequence
^1'^2'#,‘' such that all unions these unions are homeomorphic to 1
not homeomorphic to
IR
U ... U are connected. Then all HR1 . Indeed, if not, the first of them
is, according to Lemma 16, homeomorphic to
and being open and closed must coincide with
X;
1
S ,
contradiction.
Therefore, one can apply Lemma 18 to our manifold and deduce that it is homeomorphic to
IR .
Now assume that
X
has a boundary.
Then
dopp X
is a non
compact, connected, one-dimensional, boundaryless manifold, and must be homeomorphic to
1
IR .
It follows that
closed, noncompact subset of homeomorphic to
1
IR ,
X
is homeomorphic to a connected,
different from
IR1 ;
as such, it is
1
IR_ .
2.
Differentiable Structures
1.
n IR
Recall that a real function defined on an open subset of r r is of class C (or a C -function) if it has continuous partial
derivatives of all orders up to and including that
0
supp cp n s u p p \p -— which are inverses of one another, are of class morphisms for
r > 1
and homeomorphisms for
is trivially satisfied whenever
implies the equality of their dimensions. also from the C^-compatibility of
r C
r = 0).
supp cp n supp iii = 0 .
nsupp if;^ 0,then the C -compatibility
supp cp
cpfsupptp n supp ij),
cp
and
r (i.e., C -diffeoThis condition If
of the charts
tp and
ip
In fact, this equality results \p,
as shown by 1.4.
A collection of charts is an n-dimensional Cr-atlas of the set
X
if these charts cover X, are n-dimensional, and each two of r r r them are C -compatible. Two C -atlases of X are C -equivalent if their union is again a C -atlas.
This is clearly an equivalence
relation, and the equivalence classes of n-dimensional Cr-atlases of the set with
X
r > 0
are called n-dimensional Cr-structures.
The Cr-structures
are called differentiable structures.
Clearly, if
0
£ q £ r,
then each n-dimensional Cr-atlas is
143
also an n-dimensional C^-atlas, and two equivalent Cr-atlases are also Cq-equivalent.
Thus, when
0 £ q £ r
every n-dimensional
- structure
uniquely extends to a C^-structure. r Every C -structure contains a maximal atlas, namely the union of all its atlases.
The latter is called the complete atlas of the
structure, and its charts are called the charts of the structure. When we pasr. from a Cr“Structure to its C^-extension, the complete atlas extends too. 4.
A set endowed with an n-dimensional Cr-structure is called
an n-dimensional Cr-space.
The charts and atlases of the structure are
refered to as the charts and atlases of the space. 27 of a C -space X is denoted by AtlX . The coordinate functions of a chart are called coordinates on in X.
supp cp
We shall denote by Cr-space
X
cp
The complete atlas of the Cr-space
or, alternatively, local coordinates
C^X
the C^-space obtained from the
by extending its Cr-structure to a C^-structure,
The Cr-spaces with
X
r ^ q
are also termed
0 £ q £ r.
spaces.
For examples of Cr-spaces we may look at all the open subsets X
of
IRn
or
1R^,
with the Cr-structure defined by the atlas reduced
to the single chart id IRn
and
id 3R^ 5.
U ',
IRn
3Rn
and
3R^
r,
the charts
into n-dimensional Cr-spaces.
its complete atlas consists of all possible homeomorphisms
where
subset of
transform
In particular, for any
Every n-dimensional locally Euclidean space has an obvious
C^-structure: U
id: X -> X.
U or
is an open subset of the space and JR^.
U1
is an open
On the other hand, applying the "union of
topological spaces" construction (see 1 .2 .4.3) to the complete atlas of a given n-dimensional C^-space, we obtain an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space, and this transition is the inverse of the previous one. Therefore, C^-spaces are just locally Euclidean spaces. Since any differentiable structure extends uniquely to a C -structure, every Cr -space with r > 0 is also a locally Euclidean 0
space.
Its topology may be described in a more direct fashion as the
topology of the union constructed from any atlas of the structure. 6.
Obviously, every point of an n-dimensional C -space
can be covered by a chart points with
Im cp = IRn
cp
of
X
such that
Im cp = IRn
or
IR^.
X The
are called interior points and form an open
dense set, called the interior of the space
X,
denoted by
intX .
The remaining points are called boundary points and they form a closed set, called the boundary of
X,
denoted by
9X.
These notations are
144
in agreement with those introduced at 1.2.
In fact, when
r - 0, the
previous and present definitions of the interior and boundary points coincide. When
r > 0,
we use Proposition 2 (ii) in order to recognize
the interior and boundary points. r > 0
a point
and only if space with with for
ofan n-dimensional C -space is
X
Imp c
and
x £ supp cp .
r > 0, r = 0
According to this proposition, when
cp(x) £ 1R^ 1, where cp
In particular, if we regard
3 ]R^ = ]R^
then
a boundary point if is a chart on this 1R^
as a Cr-space
Recall that the corresponding statement
appeared in 1.4 and its proof was postponed until Chapter 4.
The above characterization of the boundary points shows that the interior and the boundary of a its Cr-structure to a
- space
do not change when we extend
C^-structure, for any q £ r.
In other words, for
0 £ q £ r,
int(C^X) = intX
and 3(C^X)
=3X.
We emphasize that the
equalities
int(C^X) = intX
and 3 (C^X)
= 3X
were proved by a refe
rence to 1.4, i.e., they depended upon results from Chapter 4, whereas the equalities
int(C^X) = intX
9 (C^X)
and
= 9X
for
q > 0
need no
such reference. Using the relation valid for Cr-spaces with
3X = 3(C°X),
r > 0
too.
we see that Theorem 1.8 is
That is to say, a Cr-space is
connected if and only if its interior is connected.
However, this
27
C -variant of Theorem 1.8 can be proved by merely repeating the proof of the original theorem, and therefore we can eliminate the reference to Chapter 4. 7. Suppose
A
is an open subset of an n-dimensional
27
C -space
X. Then thecharts of X whose supports are included in 27 yield a C -atlas of the set A, and define an n-dimensional
A
Cr-structure on A. In this way, any open subset of an n-dimensional r r C -space is an n-dimensional C -space. In particular, the interior of r r any n-dimensional C -space is an n-dimensional C -space without boundary. Moreover,
the interior
Cr-space
X are obviously given by Suppose
tp
and the boundary of an open subset
of the
3U = U n 3 X.
and
is a chart on an n-dimensional Cr-space
ab tp : 3X fl supp tp ->• cp(3X fl supp tp) 3X.
intU = U n intX
U
X.
Then
is an (n-1 )-dimensional chart on 9X,
In this way we may construct a Cr-atlas of the set
and so
define a Cr-structure on 3 X. Thus, the boundary of an n-dimensional r 2T C -space is an (n-1)-dimensional C -space without boundary. If (P1 such that
(tp2) n1
Imcp^ = IR
then the composition of
is a chart on the C or
n1
]R_
x tp2
r 1
-space
(respectively,
X1
(C n?
Im ip^ = ]R
r? -space or
H
with one of the homeomorphisms
no
yi
),
)
145
]R
1
x
2
]R
n l+ n 2 ]R
n1
and
3R_
x
n2
n i+n? -> HR_ ,
nR
defined in 1.3, provides
an (n^+n2 )“dimensional chart on x X 2 - If constructed as above form a Cr-atlas of the set r = min(r 1 ,r2),
and hence define
a C -structure on
rl product of the n 1-dimensional C -space C r
2
X2
-space
3X 2 = 0
with
= Xx X~,
X1
then the charts with
X
x X„.
Thus the
and the n 2-dimensional
is an (n^ +n2>-dimensional Cr-space, where
is the smallest of
the numbers r. r of the n^-dimensional C -spaces X^
and
r„.In general, theproduct
.
one of them has a boundary, is an
i = 1,...,s,
such that at most
(n^+...+ng)-dimensional Cr-space,
where
r = min(r , .. .,r ). Moreover, int (X x ... x x ) = intX i s I s x int X g , and if X^ is the only space having a boundary, then
x ...
X ) = X, x ... x X. 1 x 9X. x x . , x ... x x . For s 1 1-1 i i+1 s both formulas can be found in 1.7; for r > 0 , they are plain.
r = 0
3(X1 1
...
x
x
It is clear that when we extend the d °-structure of the cr r X to a C -structure, the C -structures induced on the open
r C -space subsets of
X
and on its boundary
X
also extend to C^-structures,
and that C^(X 1 x ... x X s ) = C^X.1 x ... x C^X s . In particular, the r r 27 topology defined by the above induced C -structures coincide with the r-L relative topology, and the product of the C -spaces X^, i = 1,...,s, considered as a topological space, is just the product of the topological spaces
X
,...,X . s
I
Smooth Maps 8 . A continuous map
isof
chart
n f
is of class
Y,
-
-1 ,
,x , ab cp (supp ip ))
Cr
Obviously, a map
X
into a C
cpon
X
^r -space
and any
the composite map
(see 1). f: X
1
^ j-— 1 ,
supp cp n f
lXabf , (suppiji) >supp ip
ib
-
.
Im ijj
Such a composite map is called a local
representative of the map
f; Y
we use the notation
loc(cp,^)f. r -spaces is of class C if and only
of C
if the local representatives of of
>r -space
r r class C , or a C -map, if for any chart on
cp (supp cp
of a C
-
Y
f
constructed for all the charts of 27 someatlases of X and Y are of class C . Note that this general definition of C-maps contains the
definition given in 1. map.
The maps of class
f
Now, as before, a C _map is just a continuous C
1
are called smooth, and the maps of class
Ca - (real) analytic. r r The composition of two C -maps is obviously a C -map.
If
A
146
is an open subset or the boundary of a A ->■ X
is a Cr-map.
in
or
Y
XT C-space
• • then the inclusion
X,
If A is open in X or A = 9x, and B is open then the compression A B of any C -map X -+ Y
B = 9Y,
nr
is a C -map. 9.
A map
^1
f
of a C " -space
X
into a C
diffeomorphism if it is invertible and both The space
Y
f
^1
and
-space f ^
is said to be diffeomorphic to the space
a diffeomorphism
X -* Y,
C -diffeomorphism
and Cr-diffeomorphic to
is a
are smooth.
X
X,
Y
if there is
if there is a
X -> Y.
r Of course, the identity map of a C " -space with r ^ 1 is a Cr-diffeomorphism. Also, the composition of two Cr -diffeomorphisms is r r a C -diffeomorphism, and the inverse of a C -diffeomorphism is a Cr-diffeomorphism itself, as we may easily see from 2 (iii).
Therefore,
the property of being C -diffeomorphic is an equivalence relation. Using 2 (i), we conclude that nonempty diffeomorphic spaces have the same dimension. 10.
f . : X. -+ Y. ,. ..,f : X Y be Cr-maps with r ^ 1, 1 1 1 m m m ^ where no more than one of the spaces X^,...,Xm , andno more than one of the spaces
Let
Y^,...,Y ,
has a boundary.
Then
-- ► Y. x ... x Y f A x ... x f : X. x ... x X 1 m 1 m 1 m ■e
is obviously a C -map. If f^,...,f^ f x ... x f . 1 m The canonical homeomorphism
are diffeomorphisms, then so is
X^ x x^
feomorphism for any two Cr-spaces
and
X^
X2
X^ x x^
is a Cr-dif-
r ^ 1,
with
such that
one of them has no boundary. The canonical homeomorphisms (X- x ... x x m . ) x Xm -+ X. x ... x X and X, x (Xn x . . . x x ) -+ 1 m- 1 m_ 1 m 1 „ m r r 2 X^ x ... x x^ are C -diffeomorphisms for any C -spaces X^ , .. .,X with
r ^ 1,
such that no more that one of them has a boundary.
Subspaces 11.
A subset
is a k-dimensional subspace of a chart
0,
then this condition is obviously equivalent to the following one: point of A is covered by a chart cp of the space k k (P(A D supp cp) = Im
,
where
bj “ l j (al '•*•'an } - Ii=1 Di l j (ai'•••'an )ui and
are the coordinate functions of the map loc (cp,i[i) id n (D. denotes the partial derivative with respect to the i-th coordinate) l r— 1 Formula (2) shows that the charts tn cp and tnare C compatible t
1
(we set tp £ Atl Tang X .
,...,£
C° °’ 1 = C°° X ,
cover
and
Ca _ 1
Tang X ,
= Ca ) .
Moreover, the charts tn cp , r— 1 and thus yield a C-atlas ofthe set
This atlas has a countable subatlas (since
subatlas).
Furthermore, for any two vectors of
AtlX
TangX,
has such a it has either
158
a chart which contains both of them, or a pair
of disjoint charts, each
containing one of the vectors (indeed, recall that for any two points of
X,
Atl X
contains,
either a chart containing both of them, or
a pair of disjoint charts, each containing one of the points). 27— 1 Therefore, it makes Tang X into a 2n-dimensional C -manifold, which we call the total manifold of vectors tangent to the manifold Clearly, Tang X X point
Tang X ,
the projection
Tang X -+X,
and the natural map (2) shows that for
composite map (1 ) at the point
which takes each — "1 Tang^X, are all C maps.
loc(cp,^)id
r > 2
Tang X
the manifold
r > 2 the Jacobian of the
(a,u)
Jacobian of the map
the inclusions
X -+ Tang X
x into thezero vector of the space Formula
X.
is equal to the square of the
at the point
a.
We deduce that for
is always orientable and even carries a
canonical orientation, namely the one which is positive on the charts tn tp
with
cp E Catl X . One more remark: let
manifolds such that
SX^ = 0.
X^
X 2 be two arbitrary smooth
and
Then for
any two points
x^ E X^
and
x 9 E X , Tang. . (X x x«) and Tang X 1 © Tang X are ^ ^ \x ^ /x 2 ^^ ^2 isomorphic as vector spaces, and the isomorphism is natural. In addition, the isomorphisms corresponding to all pairs a diffeomorphism of
Tang(X^ x x2)
(x^,x2)
yield
Tang X^ x Tang X 2 .
onto
The Differential of a Smooth Map r >r be a C -map of an m-dimensional C ' -manifold >£• into an n-dimensional C ' -manifold Y, r s 1. For a point x £ X 3.
two charts
Let
f
tp £ Atl X x
and
the differential of the map as the linear
map
loc (cprvp)f
tp(x) . If
at
other ch a rts ,
3R -*■ ]Rn
then
\p £ Atlf , .Y, r \X )
loc(tp,i{j)f
we let
d (f;ip,^) x
at the point
X and
denote
tp(x),
regarded
whose matrix is the Jacobi matrix of
tp' £ Atl X x
and
\p'£ Atl... .Y r f(x)
are two
dX(f ;tp' , ijj' ) = d -I. IXj . (ij)
) ° d X (f;tp,^)
° dX (tp',tp).
= tp„ o (tp■)— 1
Combining this relation with the equalitiesd (ip', S (see 1.2.5.6 ) becomes a C -dif feomorphism.
178
2. G(n,k)
Obviously, we may modify the definition of the manifold
by replacing the nonoriented planes with oriented ones.
precisely,
G(n,k)
is replaced by the set
G + (n,k)
of oriented
k-dimensional planes (oriented k-planes, for short) of through
0.
One has to modify the set
be the collection of all planes in plane
y € G+ (n,k)
More
lRn
passing
accordingly and take it to
G (n,k)
whose projections onto the
are nondegenerate and orientation preserving.
The
maps SO (3) and SO (3) -+ 3RP are inverses of one another. 3 2 2. IRV(4,2) is canonically C -diffeomorphic to S * S .
the pair
The canonical Ca-diffeomorphism 3 2 (x,y) E S x S into the frame 3.
S0(4)
S
3
x S
2
-*3RV(4,2)
takes
{x,x shi(y) } .
is canonically Ca-diffeomorphic to
The canonical Ca-diffeomorphism
xS0(3).
x S0(3)
defined by the quaternion formula
(x,{y,z})
(here the points of the manifolds
S0(3)
SO (4)
is
{x,x shi(y) ,x shi(z) }
and
S0(4)
are interpreted
as frames). 4.
G+ (4,2)
is canonically Ca-diffeomorphic to
The canonical Ca-diffeomorphism the oriented plane spanned by the frame (shi
-1
(xy
-1
-1 -1
),shi
(x
2
(u,v) E S
pair
x s
y)).
2
(shi
-1
(xy
-1
Again, it ),shi
-1 -1
(x
spanned by the frame
S^
x s^ takes
{x,y} E V(4,2)
into the pair
The inverse diffeomorphism transforms each
into the two-dimensional plane consisting of
quaternions of the form quaternion.
G+ (4,2)
S^ x S^.
shi(u)q + q shi (v) ,
where
q
is an arbitrary
is routine to check that the pair y))
is uniquely determined by the oriented plane
{x,y},
that the quaternions
shi(u)q + qshi(v)
fill exactly a two-dimensional plane, and that the 2
2
maps G+ (4,2) -* S x s and inverses of one another.
S
4. 1.
2
2
x s ■+ G + (4,2)
constructed
above are
Exercises
A homogeneous polynomial in
n+1
variables and with
real (complex) coefficients is nonsingular if there are no points in in 3Rn + 1 ^ 0
(respectively, in
derivatives vanish. (respectively, from 0 (EPn ) .
(En + 1 \ 0)
where all its partial
Show that the projection
3Rn + 1 \ 0 -»■]Rpn
a:n ”* \ 0 ->- IPn )transforsm the set of zeros
of such apolynomial into a submanifold of
2.
Let P (x.j »x 2 ,x^)
IRPn
different (respectively,
be a nonsingular homogeneous
polynomial
187
of degree
k
with real coefficients.
projective plane
3RP
2
Show that the submanifold of the
defined by the equation
orientable neighborhood if and only if 3. of degree 3RP
2
p(x^/X 2 /X )
Let
3
either
S
1
1 i
or 4.
i
1
S J |_S ,
p(x ,x0,x ) = 0
a submanifold homeomorphic to
(respectively,
+x
2
2
+x
2
=0
defines in (EP
2
S
1
x3 + x 93 + x 3 = 0
nRG(n,k)
(EP2
defines in
1
x S . 2
2
2
+x0 + x 2 2 S x S .
Show that the equation
Show that
is homeomorphic to
S .
3 (EP a submanifold homeomorphic to
JRP
2
x
Show that the equation
7.
is even.
and that both cases are realized.
a submanifold homeomorphic to
6.
has an
Show that the submanifold of
Show that the equation
5.
= 0
be a nonsingular homogeneous polynomial
with real coefficients.
defined by the equation
k
pix^x^x^
x
((EG(n,k))
+x
2
= 0
defines in
admits a Ca-embedding in
(k)-i (EP ). n2
8.
Y E lRG(n,k) (where
pr
Show that
the map HRG(n,k)
R
which takes each plane
into the matrix of the composite map
]Rn —
y —1-n-» 3Rn
is the orthogonal projection) is a Ca-embedding.
Show that
2
the same is true for the map y E (EG(n,k)
(1
which takes each plane
into the matrix of the composite map
(En
Pr > y -
(En .
Show that
nRV(8 ,k)
is Ca-diffeomorphic to
S^ x JRV(7,k-1)
8 ) . Show that
(EV(4,k)
is Ca-diffeomorphic to
S
9. (1 ^ k £
(EG(n,k) ■+ (E
y
x (EV(3,k-1)
k 1.
Now we are back to one of the cases covered by the first part of the proof (namely, in the first case for one for
r > 1).
G ^ f(Cl N) . G,
while if
r = 1 , and in the second
Therefore, we conclude that
Consequently, if r > 1
the set
completes the proof, because 4 (INFORMATION).
r = 1
the set
f(C')
does not cover
f(C)
does not cover
f(C n F )
does not cover
f(C)
f (C n
and
G.
This
are closed.
In Theorem 3, the condition that
f
be
C°°-smooth is unnecessarily strong: in fact, the proof uses only the
194
fact that
f
is of class
Cr ,
with
precise analysis shows that this
r
example, [2 1 ]), but no further (for q > 1
and the case
of
nRn .
Let
(see,
for
q = 1 , this is showed in [23], q = 1 ).
2
f f
1
Nondegenerate Critical Points be a real C -function defined on an open subset
A critical point
differential of
A more
can be decreased by
reduces easily to the case
3. 1.
r = 2 + max(n-q,0) .
at
y
y
of f
is nondegenerate if the second
(considered as a quadratic form) has rank
The index of the second differential of
f
at
y
n.
(i.e., the number
of negative squares in the diagonal representation of this form) is called the index of the point We remark that if subset
U
of
IRn
y cp
is a C -diffeomorphism of an open
f: U
point of the function
= ind^y.
ind^y.
2
onto another open subset of
degenerate critical point of critical
and is denoted by
3R,
then
nRn cp(y)
f o cp ^ : cp(U) -* HR,
and
y
is a non
is a nondegenerate and
ind
_>| HR
defined as
(x1 ,...,xn ) H- -Xl - ... - xk + xk + 1 + ... + xn + c , where
c
is a real number 0,
critical point, at
(0 £ k £ n ) .
(5 )
This function has a unique
which clearly is nondegenerate and of index
k.
The main goal in the present subsection is to show that, in a suitably chosen system of coordinates, any sufficiently smooth function has the above form (5) in the vicinity of a nondegenerate critical point. 2 (LEMMA). and let f : V IR r— 1 C -functions f ----------------
Let
V
be an open ball in
be a Cr-function, r ^ 1, ~ ' such that |f n : V + n R ---------
with
f(x) = E± = 1 xifi (x> for all points -------- ------
IRn
with center f (0) = 0 .
0,
There are
(
x = (x„,...,x ) e V. 1 n
To prove the lemma, it is enough to set r1
fi (x)
D.f(tx)dt, 0
1
and then observe that (6 ) is an immediate consequence of the equality
6;
195
f (tx) = X£ = 1 x.D.f(tx) .
3.
Suppose that
a (^-function
f
y
is a nondegenerate critical point of
defined on an open subset of
there exist a neighborhood
U
onto a neighborhood
0,
V
of
of_
y
!Rn .
I_f
r ^ 3,
and a diffeomorphism
then
cp of
U
such that the restriction f cp /5 ) coincides with the composite map U -> V ---- >1R, where k = ind^y
and
c = f (y) . PROOF. and
f(y) = 0 .
Without loss of generality, we may assume that
y = 0
By Lemma 2,
f(x) = ^ =1 x.f.( X ) in some neighborhood of
0,
where
Differentiating, we obtain = ... VQ
= fn (0).
of
r —1
are C
D^f(x) =
-functions.
x^D^f^(x),
since
f^ (0) =
Again we apply Lemma 2 and write, in a neighborhood
0, f i Vr ---- ► n (vn ) ,
is a suitable permutation of the standard coordinates in U = cp ^ (V) . The neighborhood
VQ is already given.
We let
WQ = V Q ,
tp^ = id , q? . = q . ., and assume that we haveconstructed 0 0 ID (Pp, and g?j satisfying (i) ,(ii), (iii), and (iv) for 0
is clear that
IRn ,
V , W , P P p £ q. It
is a nondegenerate critical point of the function (7) 11 P
iik g . .(0) I .is nondegenerate id i,D=q+1 and there exists a nondegenerate (n-q)x(n-q)-matrix A such that the
with
p = q.
Hence the matrix G =
left upper element of the matrix
A^GA
the linear transformation of
having matrix
IRn
is the qxq-identity matrix. ab I : I
-1
(V )
V
is not zero.
Let
E
0
0
A
denote
t
where
E
The composition of the diffeomorphism
with the function (3) is given by
n \ x h- ±x 2A ± ... ± x 2 + v). . h..(x)x.x. 1 q i ,D=q + 1 ID ID
h . . = h.. and h - .1 (0) ^ 0 . Now consider the subset ID D1 q+ 1 ,q+1 (V ) consisting of all the points x where h 1 (x) f 0 q q +\ tq +I
where
L
t
and
has the same sign as
^ ( x)
=
s'>q+1
+
V
hs —/q+ 1 (x) ' 1 ----S hq+q>q+ 1 (x) ‘
A simple computation shows that the Jacobian of
\]>
does not vanish. Therefore, the compression
ip to
neighborhood
M
of
0
and to its image
It is now readily verified that the sets the map functions
ab f
is continuous, and the
defined as
fdf 2.
c r (X,X ')
C^(X,X') -> Cr (3X,3X'), defined as r r- 1 map C (X,X') C (Tang X,Tang X 1 ),
is a topological embedding.
If
X
is compact, then the set
Imm (X,X1)
< r s “ ).
(1
We have to exhibit, for a given Cr-immersion a neighborhood of
f^
in
Cr (X,X!)
To do this, pick for each point cp' e Atl X 1 , X
such that
one of the inclusions and 1.5.1;
here
IL
x E X
U
two charts,
X
TRU -* ]Rn ,
n = dim X U
the subset of
X 1,
or
(Int D ) ,
cp^ £ Atl^X
and
X
3R^
x^
Cr (X,X')consisting
X
equals
(see 1.5.3
Now cover
say U
and
loc(cp ,cp')f
1R^
n 1 = dim X ') .
= cp x
x
X
IR^-> 3Rn ,
and
fq : X
consisting only of immersions.
fn (supp cp ) c supp cp*
a finite number of sets denote by
is open in
X
with
, ...,U , xg
and
of all the maps
f
such that
f (Cl U ) c suppcp' and the upper nxn-minor of the Jacobi Xi i matrix of the map loc (cp ,cp' )f has no zeros on D . The intersection "i i fl ... H Ug is the desired neighborhood of the map f^ . 3. Submr (X,X')
If
X
is compact and
is open in
Cr (X,X')
X1
has noboundary,
then the
(1 £ r £ °°) . 37
We have to exhibit, for a given C -submersion a neighborhood of
f^
Again, for each point cp1 £ Atl X 1 , X
such that
in
C (X,X')
x £ X
fn (suppcp ) c= suppcp' X
one of the orthogonal projections
fn : X -> X ',
consisting only of submersions.
we choose charts
U
set
X
cp
X
£ Atl X
X
and
loc (cp ,cp1 )f
and
X X
IRn -> !Rn , ]R^ -+ nRn
equals
(see 1.5.7).
Now cover X with a finite number of sets U = cp 1 (Int Dn ) , say X X ux ,...,Ux „ , and denote by ti ^ the--subset of C (X,X ') consisting of XI "s all maps f such that f (Cl U ) c suppip1 and the left n'^n' -minor Xi xi of the Jacobi matrix of the map loc (ip ,cp' )f has no zeros on Dn x i xi The intersection U 1 fl ... fl U is the desired neighborhood of the map
V Cr (X,X’)
4.If X is compact, then the set (1 ^ r £ oo) . PROOF.
Given a Cr-embedding
Embr (X,X')
fQ : X +X',
show that it is enough to produce a neighborhood of consisting only of injective maps.
For each point
is open in
theorems 2 and 1.5.4 f^
in
x € X,
Cr (X,X') choose two
199
charts, and
cp
X.
£ Atl X
loc (tp^ 3R
,
and
X
f
tp* £ AtlX' ,
such that
X
fn (supptp ) c suppcp' U
coincides with one of the inclusions
or
X
X
TRn -> IRn ,
IR^
(see 1.5.1). Now cover X with a finite n number of sets U = tp (Int D ) , say U , ...,U . Let U. be the x ^x 2 x ' x 1 27 1 s subset of C (X,Xf) consisting of all maps f such that ~1
f (Cl U ) c: supp cp' and, if we symmetrize the upper nxn-part of the xi xi Jacobi matrix of loc (cpX .,cpx * ,)f and take all the principal minors, 1
they are all positive
1
on the ball
Dn .
(The principal minors are the
left-upper minors; the symmetrized matrix is half the sum of the matrix with its transpose.)
Finally, denote by
U
that part of
Cr (X,Xf) X1
consisting of all maps such that the preimage of any point of in one of the sets 1/ = 11^ fl . . . H
property. open.
U . Let us show that the intersection x. l n U is a neighborhood of f^ with the necessary
It is clear that
f^ £ 1/ and that all the sets
Hence it suffices to verify that:
(ii)
the maps in
IL
0/ = C ( X X X , ( X X X )
\ U.(U 1
under the continuous mapping Since
is open in
in
and
point
) ;X1 x X ' ,(X' x x')
in
To prove (ii), given a map points
is open,
and
C
\diag(X') )
(X x X,X! x X 1)/
is open
Cr (X,X').
f € IL
and arbitrary distinct
y,z £ U , let s: I ->3R be the function which takes each Xi t £ I into the inner product of the vectors v = cp (z) - m 1
and [loc (cp xi computed in
n* HR .
)f]((1-t)cp xi
xi
Next denote by
of the Jacobi matrix of the map and by
given by
x U ) is compact and i i X* x x 1 (see 1.2.2.4), W
isopen
U
X.
(X,X!)
C
(X x x) ^ U -(U
x x 1)
U
are
is the preimage of the set
XU
X.
(X* x x 1) \ diag(X1) C(X x x,X'
(i)
IL
are injective.
To prove (i), note that U
f h* f x f .
lies
(y) + tcp (z)) - loc(ip , = ip (y ’) i ip (y) = a (tp (y))ip (y).] "i i i xi xi xi xi Moreover, j is an immersion, since j is an immersion on U injective:
£
U
f
y,
then
j
xi cx(V
xi
(the second component Ux ). i
Therefore,
j
xi
X
3Rn of the map j agrees with x. r is a C -embedding (see 1.5.4).
cp x.
on
1
Supplement for the Case of Nonempty Boundary 2 (LEMMA) .
On any compact C^-manifold,
1 < r < °°,
there
201
is a (real) C -function
h,
equal to
and having no critical points on PROOF. to
1
on
D
Let
0
on
9X,
positive on
intX ,
dX.
a: 3Rn ^ I ,
and equal to
0
n
dim X ,
-
be a Cr-function equal
outside the concentric ball of radius
2.
For each point x e BX fix a chart cp E Atl X such that n x x Im cp - IR and cp (x) = 0, and define two functions f ,g : X -* 3R x ” x x ^x through the formulas 1 - a (tp (y)),
if
y G supp tp , x
1 /
if
y e x \ supp cp^ ,
- 6 (tp (y) ) ,
if
y G supp tp ,
0,
if
y € X \ supp cp^
x
£x (y>
=
and
g x (y )
Here dX
n
6 : HR
X
=
+ IR
is given by
by a finite number of sets
3 (t^,..., t^) = t^a(t^, ...,t^) .
U
X
= cp X
^(Int Dn ) ,
say
U
X
Covering
, ...,U j*
and setting
s s
My)
s
= T T fx (y) + I gx (y) ' i— 1 i i= 1 i
we obtain the needed function identically on functions
,
X
g
dX,
h:
X
IR. In fact,
h
vanishes
since
f is equal to 0 on U and all the Xi xi vanish identically on BX; h is positive on intX ,
i since all the functions
, g are nonnegative and g is positive i i i at all points of intX , excepting the zeros of f .Finally, h has i no critical points on dX, since £g has no critical points on Bx i (the derivative with respect to the first coordinate of the local representative
f
loc (cp ,idIR)g ,i.e., of the xk i
composition
(cp I x ± |suppcpx
) o cp ^ , is negative on Dn fl IR1} ^ for k = i and xk * 1 k ^ ^ nonpositive on D H IR for all k) , while ~| [ f vanishes 1 xi identically on UU J x. i >27 . 3. Every compact C ' -manifold, 1 £ r £ °°, admits a neat Cr-embedding in a Euclidean space of sufficiently high dimension. The formula
x
(-h (x) ,j (x) ) ,
where
j
is an arbitrary
202
Cr-embedding in ]Rn (see 1), and h is the function constructed in 2, r Q +1 *] Q defines a neat C -embedding in 2R_ = HR_ x 3R .
In fo rm a t i o n
4.
The compactness assumption and the condition that
may be eliminated from the formulations of 1 and 3.
Any smooth manifold
of class C*r, with r £ « or r = a, compact or not, can be n Cr-embedded in Euclidean space, and any smooth manifold of class C , r with r £ 00 or r = a, compact or not, admits a neat C -embedding m For proofs see [22] and [8 ]. We should m e n t i o n that the case r = a
Euclidean space.
in T h e or em s
1 and 3
is exc ee di ng ly d i f f i c u l t and this is the re a s o n why we e x c l u d e d it here. In the sequel we shall exclude example,
it from other
f or mul a t i o n s
too:
cf.,
for
4.2, 5.3, 6.5, and 4.6. 2.7.
3. 1.
Transversalizations and Tubes
In this subsection, we consider the image
in Euclidean
space of a smooth manifold under a differentiable embedding and study the structure of a neighborhood of this image.
The results are
concentrated in theorems 4, 5, and 7, and serve as the technical basis for the remaining part of the present section. 2.
Let
j
be a differentiable embedding
closed, n-dimensional manifold is a c o nt in uo us map
t(x)
the plane
t
: X
X
in
G(q,q-n)
3R^.
is transver se to the p l a ne
t r a n s v e r s a l i z a t i o n which a s s o cia te s
smooth,
A transversalization of
such that,
two planes intersect at only one point).
ofthe
for eac h p o i n t
d^j (Tang^X)
j
x E X,
(i.e.,
the
A basic example is the normal
to each p o int
x £ X
the
corresponding normal plane (i.e., the orthogonal complement to dxj (Tang^X)
in
M
q ) ; if
j
Cr , then its norma l r— 1 C (cf. 1.4.2).
is of class
transversalization is obviously of class Given an embedding T: X -+■ G (q,q-n) t
of
: X ->■ G' (q,q-n) ,
j(x) +
t (x )
j,
j: X
and a transversalization
one can construct the natural map
which takes each point
(which is parallel to
t (x
)
x
and passes through
We denote the ball and the sphere w i t h c e n t e r j (x)
+ i (x)
Ux G X d T (x,p)
by and
d T (x,p)
and
s
Ux £ X [dT (x,p)
(x,p),
into the plane j(x)
and r adi us
r e s p e c t iv ely .
^ s T : A -* X* is dense in s the part of C (X,Xf) consisting of the extensions of $ which are of 2T class C m a neighborhood of A(the neighborhood depends upon the Let subset of
extension). Let
s
(X ,X1) be an extension of (p which is of class 27 C in aneighborhood U of A. Given a neighborhood U of f in s r C (X,X 1 ) , we have to show that u contains a C -extension of X '
Suppose that of
X
be a Cr-map. t
X
and
X'
>r are closed C' -manifolds and
which is itself closed as a manifold. If
0 ,< s < r ^
consisting of the C -extensions of
then that part of
Let
CS (X,X’) S is dense in the part of C (X,X’)
208
s consisting of all the C -extensions of Given a CS-extension of extension in
CS (X,X')/
d> and a neighborhood
we have
to show that
of . Fix Cr-embeddings j : X C37-transversalization t of the Cr-transversalization
t
'
of
d>. U
of
this
contains a Cr-extension
U
-*■ IR^
and j ': X' -> 3R^ , a embedding j•LI .* A IR q and a
j',
and
Tub^_, p '- Further, denote Tub ,p'. denote by T of all the maps g such that
and corresponding neat tubes I/ the piece of
CS (X,X')
Tub^p
consisting
max dist(j 1 o (}>(x) ,j 1 o g(x)) < Distfj'fX1), 3R^ ^ tub ,P 1 ) . xex s Obviously, I/ is open and contains all the C -extensions of to X. r —1 Now take any Urysohn C -function \p for the pair X v j (tub p) ,A and s consider the mapping $:I/ + C (X,X') which transforms each map g into the map PrT »(j°g(x)
+^ (x) [j 1 o(J)oprT
x h- ^ g (x) , It is clear that extends
$.
$ iscontinuous
This implies that
and that
(j (x) )- j 1 ogoprT (j (x) )]) , if
j (x) £ TubTP,
if
j (x) £ Tub
P
whenever
g
0(g) = g
.
-1
((J) is an open nonempty set which, 27 according to Theorem 2, contains a C -map. Finally, note that 0 takes r r C -maps into C -extensions of $.
5. 1.
0
Glueing Manifolds Smoothly
Our main task in this subsection is to make the necessa
preparations for extending the basic approximation theorems given in the previous subsection, i.e., theorems 4.2-4.4, in their nonanalytic version, to include compact manifolds with boundary.
The main tool
used in the extension is that of smooth doubling of a compact manifold, an operation which transforms it into a closed manifold.
However, we find
it convenient to define and study a more general operation, which is useful for other purposes too - the smooth glueing of smooth compact manifolds.
To begin with, we need to investigate the structure of a
smooth compact manifold in the vicinity of its boundary.
209
Collars 2. A collaring of a compact Cr-manifold X (0 £ r £ a) is a C -embedding of the cylinder 9X x i into X, which takes the point (x,0)
into
x,for each
an embedding is If
x £ 9X.
The image
known as a collar (on
X
of ax x I
under such
X).
is a smooth manifold
(i.e.,r
> 1), a collaring is a
differentiable embedding and its image is a submanifold of codimension 0,
whose boundary consists of
diffeomorphic to
8X.
3. collaring.
1 £ r £ °°,
rf
PROOF. Cr-embedding
Let
j: X
X
X—
3Rq ,
j.
Since
point of
x G 3X,
3X
j^
3X x HR_,
so that
of the
Tub^p.
defined as
d^$
is nondegenerate at each
(j) realizes a diffeomorphism of a neighborhood
onto a neighborhood of
3X x 0
product
(see 1.5.5). Now let
3X x [-£,0]
previous neighborhood.
Then the formula(x,t)
defines a collaring of
X.
4 (INFORMATION).
(r =
e > 0
is contained in the
*+ $
(x,-et)
The compact topological manifolds
and the compact analytic manifolds r = 0
t
is the first coordinate function of
neat, the differential
be small enough so that the
case
Pick a neat
and a neat tube
1
(tub^p)
(pr^(j(x),j^ (x)),where is
intX
every compact C -manifold admits a
be the given manifold.
x
j
and of a submanifold of
]Rq (see 2.3), a Cr-transversalization
composite embedding Consider the map
ax
a) admit collarings
obviously
(r = 0) too.
The
is considered in [4].
Glueing 5.
Suppose that
Cr-manifolds with 3x
and
3X',
boundaries.
C
Y = X*
and let
X'
are compact n-dimensional
C
and C'
be submanifolds of
respectively, consisting of whole components of these Assuming that
Cr-diff eomorphism map
r ^ 1,
X and
4>:
C ->■ C*
C* •-1~ > X 1
C and
C*
are diffeomorphic, pick a
and attach
(see 1.2.4.8 ).
X to
X'
by the composite
The resulting space
U. .X is obviously a compact, n-dimensional, topological in° (J) manifold. However, if X and X' have collars then it turns out that t* r Y has a natural C -structure that makes it into a collared C -manifold.
210
The atlas that defines this Cr-structure consists of the charts of Atl(X ^ C)
and
Atl(X' ^ C')
as well as the charts and the collarings
¥
(we regard
X
and
X'
as parts of
constructed from both the charts
k: 9X x I + X
k 1 : 8X 1 x I
and
X1
Y) ,
^ £ AtlC by the
formulas supp Y = k (supp 11> x [0,1)) U k ' (supp
x [o,1))
and ¥(k(z,t)) = ( (t) (x) ,t) ,
f (4>t
for
if
|t | ^ cr
f (x,t)
Then
f~
t
if
f(x,t),
satisfies all the conditions imposed to
of the lemma.
Moreover,
f~
£ c f
in the statement
satisfies the extra conditions under which
the lemma has already been proved, namely that the composite map pr.
is constant on the sets corresponding to because
f
f~
x x [-c,c],
X’
with
c = c^/4.
7.
f
on
Suppose that
C2
1 £ r £ 00,
X^ , X^, X2 , ,
are C -dif feomorphisms.
C -diffeomorphisms F' (C Jj) = C2 ,
g
(X x [-1,-1/2])U (X x 0)U(X x [1,1/2]).
and
F: X
and
1
and
X2
are collared
are pieces of their
boundaries consisting of whole components, and 2 : C 2
The map
via the above procedure has the needed properties
agrees with
Cr-manifolds,
1
X' x [-1,1]
X x [-1,1]
:
C,j
and
Assume that there are F': X'
X',
such that
F (C ) = C
'2 '
and the diagram C’ ^1
ab F 1
ab F C 21 is commutative. and
Y
If
Y^
is the result of glueing
is the result of glueing
X.
and
1
X ’ b£
and
X^
(¡>2 t
then the Y 2 are C -diffeomorphic. Moreover, there exists a C -diffeomorphism G: Y ^ Y 2 such that G (X^ ) X2 , G ( X ’ X2 ' G (C, = C 2 ' and [abG: C2] = [ab F
manifolds
and
C2 ]
PROOF.
Let
be two-sided collarings formulas
H
[in: X 2
X
C 1 x [-1 ,1 ]
Y1
and Y2
Denote by H: Y^ Y 2 ] o f and
¿ 2 : C 2 x [-1 , 1
the map defined by the [in: X ’ * Y2: o F ’
'x i
and choose c > 0 so that H ° x [-c ,e]) ■ C 2 x [-1,1] given by f(z,t) = , - 1 (H ^r C -embedding
g:
t
(z,ct)). x [-1 ,1 ]
Now
This lemma guarantees the existence of a C 2 x [-1,1]
which agrees with
f
on
213
(C.j x [— 1 ,—1/2] ) U (C1 x 0) U (C1 x [1/2,1]), g(C 1
X
[-1,0]) = f(C 1
X
g(C 1
[-1,0]),
and satisfies
[0,1]) = f(c
X
[0,1]).
X
Clearly, (y) ,
h
if
y i
if
y =
1 ( C 1 x [_F-
) '
G(y) = 12
° g (z ,t/e),
(z,t)
z1 e C ,
with
t £ [—e ,e ] defines the required C -dif feomorphism
G:
->•
-
Cutting 8.
Let
Y
be a C -manifold,
be compact submanifolds of Y = X U X 1.
rf
Y
C = X n X'
such that
z E C
and
C x [-1,1]
¿:
Y
and
dX
= dim X 1
9X',
such that
t (C x [-1,0)) c= int X,
i(C x
r Fix a C -embedding
PROOF.
dim X
and let
X
j:
l ( z,0)
and
= dim Y
is a piece of both boundaries
consisting of whole components of Cr-embedding
1 < r £ «>,
3X
X'
and and
3X*
then there is a = z
for any point
(0,1]) c int X ' . cr IR ,
Y
r a C -transversalization
ofthe embedding j|P : c 3R^, and a neat tube Tub p. Consider cr— 1 the map $: C which takes each point z £ C into the unit t
vector tangent to
j(Y)
at the point
j (z),
contained in
(z), and r—1 pointing towards j(X'). (p is continuous (in fact, of class C )/ r cr— 1 and so Theorem 4.2 yields a C -map cf)^ : C + such that the inner t
product (z) (z)> is positive on C. Denote by ¡¡j : tub^_p C x IR the map defined by the formula \p(z) = (pr^ (z) ,) . Clearly,
i¡j
is of class
Cr
and
TP)
for
ze C
the differential
+ Tang ( z , 0 ) (C x3R) = TangzC) © IR
induces an isomorphism of vector and
(z)
(p (z )
into
Tang., .j(C) onto Tang C and carries the ] IZ ) z e IR. Moreover, both T a n g ^ zjj(C)
are contained
Tangj (z)j (Y )
onto
15
5.
J \Z)
Tang(z,0) (C x :R) *
= dimTang(Zi0) (Cx IR) , the linear map
in Tang.. .j (Y) ;
we see that
dj (z) ^ j j (Y)ntub p} '
hence
since
d., .^ J \Z)
dim Tang. (z)
takes =
, defines a dif feomorphism from a neighborhood of ' v |] (Y) fltub^p j (C) onto a neighborhood of C x 0. Accordingly, C x [-r, ,e] will
214
lie in the previous neighborhood provided that Now it is plain that embedding
i ( z,t)
X
dimX'
X1
and
Let
Y
is small enough.
defines the desired
be a Cr-manifold,
be compact submanifolds of
= dim Y
and Y
boundaries
3X
3X',
id X
then
> 0
C x [-1,1] ->■ Y .
I:
9 (COROLLARY) . let
= j~1 (^ 1 (z,et))
e
= X U X'.
If
X il X'
Y
1 £ r £ 00,
such that
and
dim X
=
is a piece of both
and 3X!,
consisting of whole components of 3X 27 andid X 1 together define a C -diffeomorphism
and of
Y
onto the manifold obtained from the appropriately collared manifolds X
and
X1
glueing X
and X 1
b^
id (X fl X').
The Simplest Application 10. When
Every smooth compact manifold is a CNRS. the manifold is closed, this is a consequence of
2.1, 3.7, and 3.5, because the image of a smooth
manifold under a
differentiable embedding in Euclidean space is the retract of the interior of a neat tube corresponding to a smooth transversalization of Theorem 1.3.6 .4 enables us to reduce the case of
the given embedding. manifolds with
boundary to the closed case; namely, any compact
smooth
manifold has a smooth closed double (see 5), and is obviously a retract of this double.
6.
Smoothing Maps in the Presence of a Boundary
1.
The main results of this subsection are Theorems 5 and
which generalize Theorem 4.2.
Lemma 2 is necessary to the proof of
Lemma 3, Lemma
3 - to the proof of Lemma 4, and Lemma 4 - to the proof
of Theorem 5. Theorem 9.
Finally, lemmas 7 and 8 are necessary to the proof of
2 (LEMMA) . Let Y be f : Y x 1R_ jr be a C-function. defined by
a C^r-manifold with r < 00, and let Then the function F :Y x 1R + IR
f (y /1 ) ,
if
t £ 0,
Yr (-1 )^ r + 1 f(y,-kt), k +1 ¿k =0 * u
if
t ^ 0
F (y ,t)
is also of class
Cr .
215
PROOF. F/
All we must check is that the two expressions defining
as well as their partial derivatives with respect to
coordinates on Y that the equality
agree for
t = 0.
t
and local
To see this, it suffices to note
l L n < - i ) k + s f rk++11 k SDS X' x2 “ x2 “ are transverse onX ^ ,X ^ aresimplyreferredto as transverse. Let us make three obvious remarks. dimX^ + dimX 2
= 0 .
A^, A^
and
and
1
" 11
then Tang, , >X' r ^tx ^;
2.
then
if
3x )
1
d f - (Tang X ); if x2 ^ x2 by d f (Tang X )
and
space
X )
f 1 ( x 1)
X ^
+ X' on A 1 ,A0
be transverse (oneto the other)
2
A1
be smooth manifolds, and let
the map f .
v £ IRq
which
Consider the four maps
int X 1
X int X 2 ■+ IRq , int X 1 X 3X2 -> IRq , 3X1 x int X 2 -> 3Rq , and q1 3X^ x 9X2 + 3R ,given by (x^ ^ 2 ) ** f 2 3R which is zero on H f^ (suppcp') , negative
on Int X 1 n f~1 (suppcp'),
are independent at
and is such thatip ,ip^ +1,...,ip^,
x .
The existence of such a function is equivalent i to the restrictions of ip +1 ,••, to 8X1 n f 1 (suppcp’) being q2 * 1 1 independent at x ^ . The latter can be proved as in (i), employing the _
equality
Tang,
,
^
,X‘ = Im d (f I
\ ^
^
«j
I
) + Tang, 10 A
..X~
^
X
^
rather than
^
Tangf 1 (x1)X ' = ImdXlf1 + Tangfl (Xl )x23 (COROLLARY). of a smooth manifold
Let
X ’,
X^
and
be transverse submanifolds
and assume that
X^
is neat.
Then
is a (dim X^ + d i m X 2 - d i m X ’) -dimensional submanifold of X2
neat whenever
X ',
X^ D X 2 and is
is neat.
The Simplest Applications 4. U
Let
A
and
let
be a neighborhood of
U a
compact submanifold PROOF.
Let
B
A.
(f>: X
I
value of
tj>
X —
I
~*~n > 3R,
Set
(-°°,c]
B of
=
JR
0.
then thereis in
such that
A c int B .
Cr-function for the pair Then
is not a critical B
is the preimage 37
under the composite C -map (-°°,c],
B
is a
It is immediate from the construction
B is closed as a subset, that 5.
0
c £ (0,1)
([0,c]) .
(p
r £ °°,
Since the latter is transverse to
submanifold of codimension that
1 £
be a Urysohn
(see 4.7), and suppose that (see 1).
_If
of codimension
A, X ^ U
of the submanifold
£■ closed C -manifold X,
be a closed subset of a
A 27 is a closed n-dimensional C' -manifold with
and let
j: X
IRqbe anembedding of class
be a positive integer such that
0 < m < q.
Cr .
Also,
We shall need two
constructions. The first construction: we denote by specifically by
Aux^(j;m),
that subset of
of the pairs
(u,y)
such that
Further, let
aux1 : Aux1 ^ G ’(q,m)
aux1 (u,y) = j(pr(u)) + y,
where
Aux^
or, more
Tang X x G(q,m)
= 1
and
consisting
dj (u) G y.
be the map defined by pr = [pr: Tang X + X].
Aux1
is a
234
[2n-1 + (m-1) (q-m)]-dimensional submanifold of it is the preimage
of the
under the mapping
Tang X
(u,y) h-
submanifold
aux
those m-planes of
is
3R^
^ x G(q,m)
x G (q,m) 1R^ x G' (q,m)
(dj(u),dj(u) + y ) ;
x G(q,m)].
Tang X x G(q,m)
of class
Further, let
(x,x',y)
Cr 1
aux2 (x,x 1,y ) = j(x) + y. submanifold ((X x X)
\ diagX)
of
by
Aux2
j (X) . or, more
X x x x G(q,m)
xf xf
G' (q,m)
and
consisting
j (x 1) - j(x)
€ y.
be the map defined by
A u x 2 is a [2n+(m-1)(q-m)]-dimensional
X x X x G(q,m)
G(q,m)
x g '(q,m)
and its image consists of
the subset of
such that
aux2 : Aux2
submanifold of
given
which contain lines tangent to
Aux^ijjm),
of the triples
of
this mapping is transverse to
The second construction: we denote by specifically by
[indeed,
[indeed, it is the preimage of the
G ’(qfm)
under the mapping
x G(q,m) ->G 1 (q,m)
given by
(x,x',y)
j(x') - j (x) + y; this mapping is transverse to G(q,m)]. r cr is of class Cand its image consists of those m-planes of 1R^
aux2
which intersect
j(X)
at more than one point.
The Basic Theorems >if be a closed n-dimensional C ' -manifold, q 27 ]R^ be an embedding of class C together
3 (LEMMA). Let
X
1 £ r £ 00, and let j : X j7 with a C -transversalization ------------------------------------------------------
t
: X
G(q,q-n)
and a neat tube
Tub T p.
Then there exist a neighborhood U of the map t~: X G f (q,q-n) r r (see 3.2) in C (X,G' (q,q-n) ) and a continuous mapping $ : U -*■ Diff X such that, for each map (i)
g £ U:
[j ° 0(g)] (x) £ g(x)
(ii)
the map
T
y
for all
:X -+ G(q,q-n),
is a transversalization of the embedding (iii)
x £ X;
T„(x ) = g(x) - [j ° 0(g)] (x) 9 j ° $ (g ) : X IRq ;
some neat tube of this transversalization contains
TubT (p/2)
.
PROOF.
Given
g £ CT (X ,G ’ (q ,q-n) ) ,
denote the map which carries each point
y E Tub^p
under the orthogonal projection onto the plane g n- hg if
is a continuous mapping
g= t ,
neighborhood
then 1/
let
h : Tub p -* m q g t into its image
g(pr (y)).
Obviously,
Cr (X,G ’(q ,q-n)) -* Cr (Tub^p ^Rq ) ,
h^ = [in: Tub^p -*■]Rq ] . inCr (X,G’ (q,q-n) )
such
Consequently, that, for any
t~
has
g £ V,
and a h g
235
is a Cr-embedding and let
i
hg (tubTP) => TubT (p/2)
(see 9.5).
For
g € 1/,
denote the composition - 1 h • (ab h ) 1 x — -J--> TubT (p/2) ----- 2--- ► h~ '(TubT (p/2) )
.
pr TubTP ---^
X
An obvious verification shows that g *+ i is a continuous mapping r 9 ^ 1/ -+ C (X,X), and that i^~ = id. Therefore, x has a neighborhood in
1/ such that i -1 ^ $ (g) = i for g € U .
Ü
and
U
$
is a dif feomorphism for all It is immediate that
$
g EU.
Set
is continuous and that
satisfy the conditions (i)-(iii). 4.
1 £ r £ 00, n' ^ 2n,
Suppose and
X1
X
is a compact n-dimensional C' -manifold, ^r is a closed n-dimensional C -manifold. Then for
Immr (X,X')
Embr (X,X ')
is dense in
is dense in
Cr (X,X*),
and for
n* ^ 2n +1 ,
Cr (X,X').
Without loss of generality, we shall prove these statements in the case
r =00;
to reduce to
the first case.
Let have to show for
fEC
when oo
(X ,X '), and let
that, for
n 1 ^ 2n+1,
U
r < °°, we simply apply Theorems 9.6 and
n ! ^ 2n,
Q
j: X
J': X'+IR^+(^ = TubT ,p '.
J^: X
enough so that
Then
3R^+C* ,
X',
and the tube
are a neighborhood
U1
of
a continuous mapping
' , (x ' ) =
embedding
g ' (x
J' ° (iii)
!
of
€ g 1 (x1)for all
(x ' )
£
small
simply by J',
J.
the
g'
x' 6 X ';
defined as
is a transversalization of the
1 (g ’) ; some neat tube of this transversalization contains
TubT , (p'/2). Now consider the mapping [T '(g')](x) = pr , (J(x)).
V
J1
defines a
Pick
the embedding
the map t ^,:X'G (q '+q ,q '+q-n ') , [ J ’ o Diff X' such that, for each
[J1° $' (g1)] (x1)
') -
and define
Tub .p '), we conclude that there T (t ') in C (X',G '(q'+q,q'+q-n'))
the map U'
t > 0.
and denote
x'
t
1
j': X 1 + M 1 ,
for any fixed
transversalization
(ii)
and
Jfc(x) = (j '(f (x),tj(x))
J£ (X) 2 dimX, show r r C^iX^X') consisting of all C -immersions that
27 be closed C ' -manifolds
and X*
Show that the set of all C -maps Tang,. ,
vX' = Im d
I IX 3dimX,
£
1
z
€ X
Cr (x,xf).
be closed C^r-manif olds
with
1£ r
f: X
£
.
X'
for all but a finite number of points
rank dxf = dim X - 1, Let
two distinct pointsx ,x
show that the set of all Cr-maps
= dim X
1£ r
such that
for any
is dense in
= 2 dim X - 1,
13. If
X2
f(x^) = f(x2), 12.
If
f + Im d
f: X X '
with
and X' show that
is dense in
Cr (X,X')-
>27
be closed C " -manifolds the set
such that the preimage of each point 27 two points, is dense in C (X,X')-
of X'
with
of all Cr-maps under
f
1£ r
£ 00.
f: XX'
contains
at most
239
§5.
THE SIMPLEST STRUCTURE THEOREMS
1. 1.
Morse Functions
The central result of this section is Theorem 2.10, whose
main conclusion is that every compact n-dimensional C -manifold can be obtained from an empty n-dimensional manifold through a finite number of fairly standard operations, namely, by attaching handles.
The entire
present subsection and that part of Subsection 2 preceding Theorem 2.10 are essentially devoted to the preparation of its formulation and proof. The remaining part of Subsection 2 contains corollaries of Theorem 2.10. In Subsection 3 this theorem is used to effectively classify the compact smooth two-dimensional manifolds. It should come as no surprise that, in contrast to the oo
previous sections, here we consider, in general, only the C -case: the theorems concerning smoothing of diffeomorphisms and manifolds (i.e., Theorems 4.4.4, 4.6.11, and 4.9.6, 4.9.8) show that we may replace the class
oo
C
27
by any class
C ,
1 £ r < 00,
without affecting the theory
discussed here.
Cobordisms and Morse Functions
boundary
00
2.
A compact C -manifold
3X
is the disjoint union of two parts,
consisting of whole components of
X
3X.Those two
beginning and the end of the cobordism when both are empty,
X
is closed.
is called a cobordism if its 3^X
is the number of components of
one without beginning (3QX = 3X,
(3QX = 0,
each
X.Each of them may be empty?
In general, given a compact 21
ways, where
3X. Among these cobordisms, there is ^ X = 3X)
and one without end
31X = 0) . Two cobordisms,
X
and
X', are said to be diffeomorphic if oo
there is a diffeomorphism (and hence a C -diffeomorphism) such that
3^X,
parts are termed the
C°°-manifold, one can transform it into a cobordism in 1
and
f(3^X) = 9q X'
and
f (3^X) = 3^X!.
f: X
X1
240
Suppose that and
are two cobordisms such that 3 ^ 0° are dif feomorphic, and let cp: 3^X 3q X' be a C -diffeo-
morphism.
Then one can form a manifold
lared manifolds
X
X
and
and
X'
by
cp.
Y
orientation reversing
3q Y = 3q X
X
and
X'
X'
Y,
cp.
and
Now
Y
naturally
3^Y = 3^X'.
We say that and
X1
are oriented and cp is
(here the orientations
those induced by the orientations of Y
by glueing the somehow col
is the result of glueing the cobordismsX
If the cobordisms
can orient
Y
with the aid of
becomes a cobordism if we set the cobordism
X'
X
of
and
3^X and
X 1;
see 1.3.4), then one
in such a manner that both embeddings,
become orientation preserving.
are
Warning:
X
Y
and
this definition of
the orientation of the glued cobordism is not in accordance with the definition of the orientation of a glued manifold, given in 4.5.5. Two smooth closed manifolds,
and
,
are cobordant if
there is a cobordism with the beginning and the end diffeomorphic to Vq
and
,
respectively.
If, in addition,
Vq
and
are oriented,
and there is an oriented cobordism X such that one of the diffeomorphisms V q -> 3q X and -* 3^X preserves orientation, whereas the other reverses it, then we say that cobordant.
Vq
and
are oriented
Clearly, the cobordism and oriented cobordism relations are
reflexive and symmetric, and since cobordisms can be glued, they are also transitive, i.e., they are genuine equivalence relations. 3. X
is aC
A critical point
^2
-manifold
x
2
of a C -function
f: X
is nondegenerate if for some chart
(and hence for any such chart)
cp(x)
IR,
where 2
cp £ Atl^C X
is a nondegenerate critical point
of the function
(f I J ° cp 1 : im cp ]R (see 3.3.1). The |supp cp corresponding index is independent of the choice of the chart 3.3.1), and is called the index of the
point
xrelative
to
cp
(see
f.
Suppose X is a cobordism, and let f : X + IR be a °o _1 C -function; f is a Morse function if: Im f c I; f (0) = 3„X, and 0 f (1) = 3^X ; and all critical points of flie in int X and are nondegenerate. We say that a Morse function is proper if its values at distinct critical points are distinct.
The Local Structure of Morse Functions 4. f:
X-+JR
Suppose that
X
is a Morse function.
is an n-dimensional cobordism and Then for every point
x E X there
is a
241
chart (p£ Atl X with cp(x) = 0, x coincides with the composite map
such that therestriction
fl
|supp cp
cp ► im cp -- > 3R , supp cp -where the second arrow denotes one of the following functions: (t^,...,^) *■> -t^ f
if
(t^,...,^) ^
,
x £ 9qX; if
(t^,...,t^) *-► f (x) + t , point
x £ 9^X ; _if
x £ int X
is not acritical
of f ; (t
I
f
n
(x) -
is a critical point of index
t 2
1
-
.. . - t2
k
+
k +1
+ ...
+
t2 ,
n'
if
X
—
k.
To prove the first three cases we need only remark that the function
X
3R,
(respectively, by
defined by y h- -f (y)
y b» f (y) - x for
for
x £ 3QX)
x £ int X
U 9^X
can be completed, in a
neighborhood of x, to a system of coordinates (see 1.2.12). fourth case, we refer to Theorem 3.3.3. 5 (COROLLARY).
For the
A Morse function has only a finite number of
critical points.
An Existence Theorem 6 (LEMMA). an open dense subset Dn
1R
oo
Given any C -function A
of
lRn
f: D
such that for
y\
+ 1R,
a £ A
there exists the function
defined by x
f (x) -
(1 )
has no degenerate critical points. PROOF. functions where
D f,...,Dnf.
F =
x£ Dn
[grad f] (x) of (1) at
gradf : Dn + 3Rn
One may take
A
to be
(x £ Dn | rank d^grad f < n}. F
4.7.4 implies that if
Consider the map
that itis also dense is a = a,
x
in 3Rn .
with coordinate
Mn \ [gradf](F) ,
is clearly open, and Theorem Moreover, i’t is evident
critical point of the function (1), then
andthe matrix of the second-order partial
is precisely the matrix of the differential
derivatives
d^gradf
242
relative to the standard coordinates in Therefore, if
a £ A,
Tang x Dn
and
Tang a IRn .
then this matrix of second-order partial
derivatives is nonsingular. 7.
On every cobordism there is a proper Morse function.
First, let us show that if there exists some Morse function on the cobordism
X,
then there exists a proper Morse function on
X.
Let
x„ ,...,x be the critical points of the Morse function f: X -> IR, 1 m and let ,...,U^ be pairwise disjoint neighborhoods of these points in
intX .
Further, let
V . ,...,V be neighborhoods of x . ,...,x_ 1 m 1 m such that Cl V, cz U. , ...,Cl V e U , and let IR defined by
x * f (x) + G.d).(x) + ... + e 9q X !, and
it suffices to produce two C-embeddings,j: X
j ': X' -* X,
such that
= j (3^X ) = j M S ^ X 1)/
j (X) U j 1 (X' ) = X,
X
j (X) flj ' (X1) =
and the composite dif feomorphism
9QX ' -a^ j ' > j ' (9QX ') -^-3--- ► 9 1X coincides with
_i cp .
In order to accomplish this, let us fix: OO
a collaring such that
k: 9X * I -*■ X; f (x 1) = (x',0)
C°°-function a(t) = t
a:
for
I + I,
for all
such that
t ^ 7/8.
8 (t) = (1 - t)/2,
a C -diffeomorphism x' € 9QX';
f: X' + 9QX' x I
and an increasing
a(t) = 1/2 + t/3
Further, using the function
for
6: I
set
j (x ) = x ,
if
xex^kO^xtoj)),
j(k(z,t)) = k(z,a(t)),
if
z £ 9^X,
t € I,.
and
j'(x') = k o (cp-1 x B) o f (x') ,
if
t g 3/4
x' € X'.
I,
and
248
We can verify directly that
j
and
j’
have the required
properties. 6.
If on a cobordism there is a Morse function without
critical point, then the cobordism is trivial, PROOF. points. -1
f ^ (t) -1 (t) f
-1
Let
f : X ->■IR
be a Morse function with no critical
According to 1.5.8 (or, if one prefers, to 4.8.2), the preimage of any point
t E (0,1)
is a neat submanifold of
X;
moreover,
is obviously closed as an independent manifold (the preimages
(0) = 8nX
f
-1
are also closed manifolds). By -1 Theorems 4.5.3 and 4.5.8, the manifold f (t) has a neighborhood
(1) = 9 X
oo
together map on
and
with a C -submersion f
-1
F_j_: Uj_
(t),
tt :
for each fixed
f ^ (t) x i
-1
U
-> f
t E I.
by
(t)
U
which is the identity
Define, for
t E I,
a C -map
= (7Tt (x) ,f (x) ) . Obviously, the
differential
d F is nondegenerate for x E f ^ (t), and F induces x t _1 X: a diffeomorphism of f (t) onto f (t) x t. Consequently, F is a oo
C -embedding on a neighborhood of a neighborhood
A^_
of the point -1
diffeomorphism of
f
F^_ (At )
so that if we divide
I
t
11
(t)
in
(see 1.5.5) , i.e., there is I
such that
-1
onto
into
-1
f(t) x Afc.
m
Let
f 1 ([ (i-1)/m,i/m]) ,
= f ^((i-1)/m)
and
with
3Qf
X
be large enough
X
1/m,
then each
Then all the
3^f 1 ([(i-1)/m,i/m]) = f 1 (i/m),
If on a cobordism
single critical
A .
induces a
([ (i-1)/m,i/m]) =
now Lemma 5 shows that the entire cobordism 7.
m
intervals of length
such interval is contained in one of the sets cobordisms
F
X
are trivial, and
is trivial.
there is a Morse function with a
point of index k
and noother
is an elementary cobordism of index
critical points, then
k.
The proof is quite long and we shall begin by constructing an auxiliary cobordism
Y.
critical point of index
Fix a Morse function k,
say
x,
f: X
I
with a single
and no other critical points.
Theorem 1.4, there is a chart
2
Int Dn_k)) n f" 1 ([f (x) - T 5-,f (x) + £§-] ) ,
and the map E (n,k) fl mo
cp" 1 (lm
X
eDn_k))
fl f _1 ([f (x)
2
-
given by the formula (t1 , .. .,tn ) ►> CP 1 (Gt1 ,...,Etn ) , which together provide the desired diffeomorphism.
2
^§-,f(x) + -^§— ])
252
8 (COROLLARY). cobordism
X
Suppose that on a given n-dimensional
with connected boundary there exists a Morse function
with a unique critical point.
Then
X
is diffeomorphic to
Dn .
A t t a c h i n g Handles
9. ip: S^
Let X
^ x Dn k
be an n-dimensional cobordism and let
9^X be aC^-embedding.
the elementary cobordism 3 ^X
El(3^Xfcp)
3q E1(8^X,cp) (see 2)
The result of glueing
X
and
by the canonical diffeomorphism
is said to be obtained from
X
byattaching
a handle of index k . By attaching a handle of index
0
to
X
we replace, up to a
diffeomorphism, X by x| |Dn ; the new component of the boundary, n“1 i.e., in2 ^S -*-s added to 3^X. To attach a handle of index n, we actually glue X and Dn by a diffeomorphism of one of the components of 10.
8^X
onto
Sn ^.
Every cobordism
X
can be obtained, up to a diffeomor-
phism, from the standard trivial cobordism finite number of handles. f: X
3R,
3^X x I, by attaching a
Moreover, given any proper Morse function
one may choose these handles so that their number will not
exceed the number of critical points of
f.
We prove this statement by induction on the number of critical points of f
has
f.
m ^ 1
If
f
has no critical points, Theorem 6 suffices.
critical points, then there is
one of the critical values of
f
c E (0,1)
is greater than
remaining ones are smaller than c. We cut -1 -1 -1 f ([0,c]) and f (tc ,1]) .On f (t0,c])
X
c,
If
such that
while the
into two cobordisms:
there is a proper Morse
function with m-1 critical points, for example, x » f(x)/c. -1 f ([c,1]) there is a Morse function with a unique critical point, for example, x (f (x) - c)/(1 - c) . the second cobordism is elementary. 11.
Finally, note that by Theorem 7 oo
A closed n-dimensional C -manifold
X
on which there is
Morse function having only two critical points is homeomorphic to PROOF.
We remark (leaving the trivial case
n = 0
Sn .
aside)
that every Morse function with only two critical points is proper (the two points are necessarily a maximum and a minimum). shows that
X
two handles. index
n,
Thus Theorem 10
can be obtained from an empty manifold by attaching Obviously, the first handle has index
and hence
X
0,
and the second
actually results from glueing two copies of
On
253
Dn
by
a diffeomorphism
of
Sn ^ .
AHomotopy Corollary
to
12(LEMMA). k V IU D , where
The f:
cobordism El(V,tp) ishomotopyequivalent k _1 S V is given by f (y) =tp(y,0). Moreover,
there is a homotopy equivalence with the inclusion
V Uf D
El(V,tp)
which agrees on
V
V[= B^El (V,tp) ] + El(V,tp).
One can assemble such a homotopy equivalence from the above v inclusion V + El (V ,tp) and the embedding D El(V,tp) which takes k each point x E D into the point x/4 £ E(n,k). To complete the proof, it is enough to remark that the constructed mapping V Dk El(V,cp) is a topological embedding whose image is a strong deformation retract of
El (V ,tp) . 13.
Every compact n-dimensional smooth manifold is homotopy
equivalent to a finite cellular space of dimension PROOF.
£ n.
The discussion in 1.2 implies that one may assume that
the given manifold is a cobordism with an empty beginning.
Therefore,
all we have to show is that if an n-dimensional cobordism is homotopy equivalent to a finite cellular space of dimension
£ n,
then it
retains this property after we attach to it an arbitrary handle; see 10. But from Lemma 12 it follows that attaching a handle of index k to a k cobordism X has the same homotopy effect as attaching D to X by k- ^ some embedding f: S X. Now replace X by a finite cellular space Y
of dimension
£ n
with the same homotopy type,
by its composition with a homotopy equivalence
replace the map
X
Y,
replace this composition by a homotopic cellular map 2.3.2.4).
f
and subsequently k-1 g: S Y (see
By Theorem 1.3.7.8, the cobordism which results by attaching
a handle of index k to X is homotopy equivalent to the space k k Y Ug D ; according to 2.1.5.5, Y D is a finite cellular space of dimension
£ n.
Spherical Modifications oo
14. Let V be a closed n-dimensional C -manifold, and let k— 1 n—k + 1 00 tp: S x D ->• V b e a C -embedding. Fix arbitrary collars on Y ^ cp(Sk_1 x IntDn_k + ^) by the dif feomorphism
and
Dk x Sn k , and then glue these manifolds k—1 n —k k —1 n —k ab tp : S xs +tp(S xs ) of the
254
boundary of the second onto the boundary of the first. glued manifold is obtained from the embedding
cp.*
15.
The number
V k
by a spherical modification along is the index of the modification.
is obtained from the cobordism X k— 1 n —k by attaching a handle using an embedding cp: S x D ^ 9 ^X , then 9^Xf
If the cobordism
We say that the
is obtained from
i • embedding
9^X
X'
by a spherical modification along the same
/■'«k 1 n-k « .. cp: S x D + 9^X . PROOF.
Since
9^X ' = 9 ^El (9^X ,cp) ,
9 ^El (9^X ,cp)is obtained from
9^X
cp.
is the result of glueing the spaces
Recall that
El(9^X,cp)
by
we actually claim that
a spherical modification along
[9^X v. cp(S^
^ x int (^-Dn ^) )] x i
and E(n,k)
Obviously,
[9^X \ cp(S^ ^ x Int Dn ^)] x 1
by
and
el
(see 2) .
E(n,k) D 9 ^El (9
are compact (n-1 )-dimensional submanifolds of the manifold
^X ,cp)
9^El (9 ^X ,cp) ,
which they cover, and they intersect along their common boundary. Consider the mappings pr 1 : [a.jX V tp(Sk 1 x Int Dn k )]
x 1 -► 9 X \ cp (Sk 1 x Int Dn k )
and Ip: E(n,k) n 3 nEl (3 1X ,cp) -* Dk x sn-k-1, \l>(t1 , ... ,tn )
I6,t t , 15 1..... k
(tk*1.....tn ) (t?
k +1
n
oo —1 is a C -diffeomorphism such that pr^ ( (z fZ^)) = _k — 1 k—1 = cp(z^,z2) for all z 0,
then
handles,crosscaps, and
X
q„.
If
q . = 0,
can be glued from a
l^+l^-l
sphere with one handle, one crosscap, and
holes and a
one hole.
But we already
proved that this second manifold is diffeomorphic to a sphere with three crosscaps and one hole. sphere with
g^-1
Consequently,
handles,
h2+2
crosscaps,
so diffeomorphic to a sphere with holes. 4 (LEMMA).
Let
X
2g^+h2
of two components of (i)
if
holes, then
1-2
1
X
X1
1^+12~2
crosscaps and
holes, and
1 +12«2
be the result of attaching a
1-2
Then:
is diffeomorphic to a sphere with is diffeomorphic to a sphere with
jlf X
holes, then
caps and
X'
9x.
holes, or to a sphere with (ii)
and
and
X by a diffeomorphism of the boundary of the handle onto
the union
1
is diffeomorphic to a
be a smooth, compact, connected,
two-dimensional manifold, and let handle to
X
2g+2
crosscaps and
g handles and g+1 handles and
1-2
is diffeomorphic to a sphere with X'
holes; h
is diffeomorphic to a sphere with
crosscaps h+2
cross
holes.
This is a corollary of Lemma 3: indeed, in both cases one can cut
X1
into two manifolds, such that the first one differs from
X
by having one hole less, while the second is diffeomorphic to a sphere with one handle and one hole, or to a disc with an inverted handle. 5.
Let
X
and
X2
be smooth, compact, two-dimensional
manifolds, and
let cp be a diffeomorphism of a nonempty union of whole
components of
3X2 onto a nonempty union of whole components of
Denote by both
X^
X
the manifold glued from
andX2
X^
and
X2
by means of
are diffeomorphic to model surfaces, then
X
3X^. cp. If is also
diffeomorphic to one of the model surfaces. This is a consequence of Lemmas 3 and 4, because glueing by means of
cp
is equivalent to first glueing by the diffeomorphism of
one of the components of obtained by compressing handles equal
9X2 cp,
onto the corresponding component of
and
subsequently attaching a number of
to half the number of the components of
which remain to be identified.
9X^
and
8X^,
260
The Main Theorem 6.
Every smooth, connected, compact, two-dimensional manif
is diffeomorphic to one of the model surfaces. Applying Theorems 2.10 and 5, all we need to show is that the components of the elementary two-dimensional cobordisms are diffeomorphic to model surfaces.
And this is not hard to check directly by examining
all possible cases, if we recall that every smooth, closed, one-dimensional manifold is diffeomorphic to a sum of circles. it out,every elementary cobordism of index m
circles is diffeomorphic to a sum of
a sphere with one hole. constructed from a sum of
0 m
constructed from a sum of spheres with two holes and
Next, every elementary cobordism of index m
2
circles (and a differentiable embedding
of a circle in this sum) is diffeomorphic to a sum of two holes and a sphere with one hole. cobordism of index
To spell
m-1
spheres with
And finally, every elementary
1
constructed from a sum of m circles and a dif0 1 ferentiable embedding of S * D in this sum is diffeomorphic to one
of the following three manifolds:
a sum of
and a sphere with three holes; a sum of a sphere with three holes; a sum of
m-1
m-1
spheres with two holes
spheres with two holes and
spheres with two holes and a
sphere with one crosscap and two holes (for cases in Fig * 11).
m-2
m = 2,
one see the three
261
7 (INFORMATION).
Every compact, connected, two-dimensional
topological manifold is homeomorphic to one of the model surfaces.
Cellular Decompositions of the Closed Model Surfaces 8.
The closed model surfaces possess standard rigged cellular
decompositions, which generalize the canonical decompositions 2
sphere
S ,
of the
2
the complex projective space
1
(CP , and the torus
into two cells, three cells, and four cells, respectively.
S
1
xS
Each of
these standard decompositions, except the no-cell decomposition of the empty model surface, contains only one 0-cell and only one 2-cell, while the number of 1-cells is for a sphere with with
g
h
2g
for a sphere with
crosscaps.
handles is a bouquet of
a sphere with
g
handles,
and
h
Therefore, the 1-skeleton of a sphere 2g
circles, while the 1-skeleton of
h crosscaps is a bouquet of
h
circles.
Moreover, the
description of the entire rigged cellular decomposition reduces to the characterization of the attaching map for the 2-cell, i.e., of a certain map of
S^
into the aforementioned bouquet. We disregard the values
g = 0,1
and
considered, and for the case of a sphere with
g
h = 0,1,
handles, we represent
S^
as the contour of aregular polygon with first vertex
4g
edges, arranged successively as
In the case of a sphere with
h
already ort^
and
crosscaps, we represent
as the contour of a regular polygon with first vertex
ort^
and
S
1
2h
edges, which are arranged successively as C1 ' C1 ' •••' ch' ch • In both cases we form a quotient space of
S
1
by identifying
each edge with the correspondig "primed" edge, as follows: identified with
a|,
and
b^
with
b
cu
is
through a reflection with
respect to a line (relative to which these edges are symmetric), c.
is identified with
its center).
c|
while
through a rotation of the polygon (around
In either of cases the quotient space is a bouquet of
circles: in the first case the number of circles is 2g, and in the 1 second h. The projection of S onto this quotient space is the required attaching map.
262
Of course, we still have to convince the reader that the cellular spaces produced in this manner are homeomorphic to the model surfaces.
To this end, let us divide our 4g-gon into a g-gon and
pentagons, by drawing diagonals which cut out quadruplets Similarly, we divide our 2h-gon into a h-gon and drawing diagonals which cut out pairs
Identifying the edges
ci'ci
and
h
g
a^f b^,a^,b^.
triangles, by
(see Fig. 12).
the way described above,
all the vertices of the remaining g-gon become one and the same point, thus transforming the g-gon into a sphere with
g
circular apertures;
at the same time, the edges of the pentagons are identified in such a manner that each pentagon becomes a torus with a circular aperture. Attaching these holed tori to the holed sphere in such a way as to restore all that was destroyed by the auxiliary (diagonal) cuts, we obtain, up to a homeomorphism, a sphere with the prescribed identifications of the edges
g
handles.
ci'ci
Similarly,
take all the
vertices of the h-gon into one and the same point, thus transforming the h-gon into a sphere with
h
circular apertures; at the same time,
each triangle becomes a Mobius strip, since two of its edges are identified.
Attaching these strips to the holed sphere, we obtain, up
to a homeomorphism,a sphere with
h
crosscaps.
[Warning: the boundaries
of the previous circular apertures (in the sphere) have a common point, and for
g = 2
or
h = 2,
they even coincide.]
263
The Hoinotopy Structure of the Nonclosed Model Surfaces 9.
A sphere with
equivalent to a bouquet of caps and
1
2g+l-1
g
handles and
circles.
1
holes is homotopy
A sphere with
holes is homotopy equivalent to a bouquet of
h
cross
h+1-1
circles. To prove these assertions, we first note that by attaching the 4g-gon to the bouquet of
2g
circles as in 8, we produce, up to a
homeomorphism, a sphere with
g
first remove the interiors of interior of the 4g-gon.
handles and 1
Denote by
(i)
holes, provided we
pairwise disjoint discs from the
Now let us arrange these discs such that every
line passing through the first vertex, one of them.
1
A
ort^,
intersects no more than
the set consisting of:
the contour of the 4g-gon;
(ii)
the
21-2
discs and passing through (iii)
segments tangent to
1-1
of the removed
ort^;
the outer arcs of the boundaries of these discs having
as endpoints the tangency points. Then
A
holed 4g-gon.
is obviously a strong deformation retract of the
If we now project this
handles, the above strong deformation
4g-gon onto the sphere with g retraction is transformed into a
strong deformation retraction of the holed sphere with the image of
A
under the projection.
handles onto
Finally, note that this image
is manifestly homeomorphic to a bouquet of The proof for a sphere with
g
h
2g+l-1
circles.
crosscaps and
1
holes
is a
verbatim repetition of the previous argument, with the 4g-gon replaced by the 2h-gon.
4. 1.
Exercises
Show that every smooth, connected, noncompact, one
dimensional manifold is homeomorphic to a line or a half-line (see 3.1). 2.
Define a submanifold of
by the equation to a sphere with 3.
z™ + z™ + z™ = °, (m-1)(m-2)/2
2
CEP
in homogeneous coordinates
and show that it is diffeomorphic
handles (see 2.4.4 and 2..4.5).
Show that the subset of
1
(CP
1
x (CP
consisting of the
264
points
((z :z2),(w1:w2))
such that
+ w 2* = Z2 ^
manifold diffeomorphic to a sphere with 4.
(p-1)(q-1)
~ W 2*
iS 3
handles.
Show that every smooth, closed, connected, orientable,
three-dimensional manifold can be obtained by glueing two copies of a handle-body by a diffeomorphism of its boundary. (A handle-body is a 3 part of 3R bounded by a sphere with handles which is standardly 3 embedded in IR ) . 5.
Consider the manifold obtained by glueing two copies of 1 2 1 1 the solid torus S x d by a diffeomorphism of its boundary S x S , given by the formula integers satisfying 3 morphic to S for for
(z^z^)
(z^ Z^/Z^ z^) ,
ad - be = ±1. a = 0,
to
S
2
where
a,b,c,d
are
Show that this manifold is diffeo1 3 * S for a = ±1, and to 1RP
a = ±2. oo
6.
Show that on every connected closed C -manifold there is
a Morse function with a unique local minimum and a unique local maximum. 7. 9qX
and
Show that on every connected cobordism
d ^X
int X .
Show that on every cobordism there is a proper Morse
function such that, for any of its critical points indices
and 9.
k2,
k^ < k2
implies
Suppose that on a cobordism
with no critical points of index orientable.
with nonempty
there is a proper Morse function with no local maxima
and minima lying in 8.
X
1
Show that the cobordism
orientation of
9^X
x^
and
of
f (x^) < f(x2>. X
there is a Morse function
and that the manifold X
x^,
9QX
is
is orientable and that every
is induced by some orientation of
X.
Chapter 4. Bundles
§1.
BUNDLES WITHOUT GROUP STRUCTURE
1. 1.
A bundle
is a triple
topological spaces and and
B
General Definitions
p: T
denote
Tand
pr £ ,
p
is its projection.
£ over the point
A section of the
bundle £
thatpr ^ ° s = idbs^.
can be connected homotopy
Two
sections of
such that
(pr £ ^ (B) ,ab pr ^,B) ,
£,
we
tl £, bs£,
£
^
map s: bs £
tl£
arehomotopic if they of sections, i.e.,
bya
equals
to a subspace
B c
bs ^
is
£ ID • I^
and
is the bundle
x tl C2 ,pr £ x pr i 2 ' h s ^1 * bs ^2* ' denoted bY £ bs £ ,
£
is a pair of
such that
the
266
tl E '
tl K (1 )
Pr K ' bs E is commutative.
If
:£ 1 + tl (p
and an equivalence if, in addition,
bs
tl £
and
B
tl 4>
of
in: B -+ bs E,
and
bs f, ,
bs i>
the
form the inclusion
£ I in £. IB The commutativity of the diagram (1) implies that
F
is
a fiber preserving map (or a fibered map), i.e., it takes each fiber of into a fiber of
£.
Obviously, if
an arbitrary fiber preserving map map
f: bs£'
if the map
bs E,
pr £'
continuity of
f.
pr E, * (tl £ ') = bs £ 1,
F: tl E,1
tl £
is factorial, then the continuity of £1
is one and only one continuous map Let
f
Moreover,
F
implies the
is a bundle with factorial
projection, then given any fiber preserving map
4.
there is a unique
which makes diagram (1) commutative.
Therefore, if
then given
: E,1 -* £
F : tl £ ' -* such that
tl E,
tl c}> = F.
be a continuous map of a topological space
into
the base of a bundle
£.
B,
total space {(b,x) £ B x tl £ | f (b) = pr E(x)} ,
there
B
We may define a new bundle having base
the restriction of the projection
pr^: B x tl £
This new bundle is called the bundle induced from i denoted by f *E,.
and projection B
E,
by —
to the last space. f,
and is
It is clear that the restriction of the projection pr9 : B x t U + tl £ to tl(f’£) defines for each b £ bs(f’£) a ^ i homeomorphism of the fiber of f *£ over the point b onto the fiber of
E,
a map
over the point f (b) £ bs EJ , and determines, together with f, i f *£ £. This map is called the adjoint of f and is denoted by
ad f . If
f
The following observations also need no proofs or explanations. i is a homeomorphism, then the adjoint map ad f : f*£ £ is an
isomorphism; if, in addition,
f = id bs 5/
then
adf
is an equivalence.
267
If
f
is an inclusion, then
between
f*£
and
^ |g •
5
establishes an equivalence
Finally, given arbitrary continuous maps
f: B -> bs £ and g: B' + B, canonically equivalent.
x
ad f : f *£ the bundles
(f o q ) 1 Z
and
g ! (f!?)
are
5- If : K 1 K is a map of bundles, then the formula (pr £ ' (x) ,tl (x) ) defines a continuous map tl £ 1 tl ((bs cf>) 1£) .
This map defines, together with id bs C ', a map of i (bs (j>) £ ,which we denote by corr cj) ; we say that the map
.
Obviously,
corrects
The obvious example of a bundle having a given base homeomorphic to a given space
bundle
(or
the product bundle)
fibers
b x f
of the product
homeomorphic to
F
is
the
B
standardtrivial
(B x F,pr^,B). Its fibers are the
B x f,
and are obviously canonically
F.
Notice that the sections (B x F ,pr^,B)
continuous functions
B
A bundle
B
B x f
of the standard trivial
are in a one-to-one correspondence with the F:
corresponding section s: and s are associated. 2.
corr
Locally Trivial Bundles
and fibers
bundle
into the bundle
ad(bs({)) o corr =.
2. 1.
£'
£
for each function
B -> B x f ,
f : B ■+ F
s(b) = (b,f(b));
there is
the
we say that
f
is trivial or, more specifically,
topologically trivial, if it is equivalent to a standard trivial bundle. Any equivalence between a standard trivial bundle and to as a trivialization of A bundle
£ is
topologically locally hood
U
F,
is referred
£. locally trivial or, more specifically,
trivial, if every point of
such that the bundle
bs £
has a neighbor
is trivial.
Since the projection of a product of topological spaces onto one of its factors is an open map, the projection of a trivial bundle is open, and hence so is the projection of a locally trivial bundle. It is immediate that the product of two trivial (locally trivial) bundles is a trivial (respectively, locally trivial) bundle. Furthermore, any bundle induced from a trivial (locally trivial) bundle is trivial (respectively, locally trivial). If f : B i constant, then f ‘£ is a trivial bundle, for any £. 3.
bs£
is
The fibers of a trivial bundle are, as those of the
standard trivial bundle, homeomorphic to each other.
However, in a
268
trivial, but not standard trivial bundle, these homeomorphisms are not canonical any longer.
If the base of a locally trivial bundle is
connected, then its fibers are also mutually homeomorphic; indeed, the set of the points of the base having fibers homeomorphic to a given fiber is open, and the sets of this type form a partition of the base (see 1.3.3.5).
On the other hand, the example of the locally trivial
bundle ( (B x F)J |_(B' x F'),pr^J |_pr -j ^BJ | _B ') * where B, F, B ' , and F* are arbitrary topological spaces, demonstrates that in a locally trivial bundle the fibers over points situated in different components of the base are not necessarily homeomorphic.
Moreover, we see that
there are locally trivial bundles which are not trivial. A nontrivial, locally trivial bundle may have a connected base; see 5 and 6.
Coverings 4.
A locally trivial bundle is a covering in the broad sense
if all its fibers are discrete spaces.
In this case the total space
and the projection are usually called a covering space and a covering projection, respectively.*
Clearly , every point of a covering space has
a neighborhood such that the restriction of the projection to this neighborhood is a homeomorphism onto its image in the base. A covering in the broad sense is said to be a covering in the narrow sense or, simply, a covering, if both the covering and base spaces are connected and nonempty.
According to 3, all the fibers of a
covering have the same cardinality, called the number of sheets (or the multiplicity) of the given covering. 5. A covering whose number of sheets is greater than one cannot be trivial. Indeed, the total space of a trivial bundle is homeomorphic to the product
of the base and a fiber, and hence it cannot
when the fiber
is discrete and has more than one point.
beconnected
6 (EXAMPLES). is defined as
The bundle (s\hel ,S1), where hel : S^ -> S^ m m m hel^lz) = z, is an m-sheeted covering for any m ± 0.
The bundle
OR1 ,hel,S1) , where hel: TO ->■ S1 is defined as 27Tix hel(x) = e , is a countably-sheeted covering. If
k / 0,n,
then the bundle having total space
G (n,k),
* Translator's note: Frequently, the terms covering space and covering projection are themselves used to designate the whole covering .
269
base
G(n,k),
and projection equal to the submersion exhibited in
3.2.2.3, is a two-sheeted covering. for n ^ 1.
In particular, so is
Finally, let us show that every sphere with admits as a two-sheeted covering space a sphere with h-1 3.5.3); here
h
one may construct it starting with
h
2
For
2
crosscaps h = 1 , we
2
(S ,pr, IRP ).
Generally,
2
copies of 2
h
handles (see Subsection
is an arbitrary positive integer.
already encountered such a covering, namely
(Sn ,pr, 3RPn )
2
(S ,pr, IRP ).
this, restrict one copy of
(S ,pr, IRP )
projective plane with
holes, and restrict the remaining
h-1
To do
to a covering over the h-1
copies to coverings over the projective plane with one hole (i.e., over the Mobius strip).
Now glue the bases of these
into a sphere with
h
the holes.
h
restricted coverings
crosscaps by diffeomorphisms of the boundaries of
The resulting glued space is thebase of a new covering,
whose total space is obtained by glueing the
h
total spaces of the
above restricted coverings: one of these total spaces is a sphere with h-1
pairs of antipodal holes, while the remaining
h-1
total spaces
are spheres with two antipodal holes, i.e., cylinders over circles. (Each of these
h-1
cylinders has two possible covering attaching maps,
and we mayuse either one of them.) a cylinder
Since "sealing" a
pair of holes by
results in replacing this pair by a handle, what we actually
obtain is a two-sheeted covering having a sphere with the base and a sphere with
h-1
3. 1. condition:
A bundle
£
Pr K ° f0 = f pr £ ° f
= f
face of
Ir
f: ir
crosscaps as
handles as the total space.
Serre Bundles
is a Serre bundle* if it satisfies Serre1s
for any positive integer
continuous maps
h
bs £
and
r
or
f -: ir ^
there is a continuous map
r = 0,
and every
tl £ , related by -■ Pr f : I tl £ such that
ir „ = f„. ■j-r-1 0
anc^
(We identify the cube
2T_ 1 I
with that
whose points have the last coordinate equal to zero; see
1.2.5.7.) The requirement that
pr E, ° f
= f
appearing in Serre's
condition is fundamental in the theory of bundles, and is encountered also when maps,
f
f~: X *
fibration.
and tl K
f
are defined on spaces other than cubes. and
f: X -> bs £ ,
Translator's note:
If two
satisfy this last requirement,
Frequently called a Serre fiber space or a weak
270
we say that
f~
covers
we also say that
f
for arbitrary
and
£
f
(or that
f~ is a lifting or lift of
can be lifted to
Obviously,
f;
tl £) ; this terminology is valid
X. the p rod uc t of two Serre b u n d l e s and a b u n d l e
induced from a Serre bu nd le are a g ai n Serre bundles.
2. are take
Examples of bundles which do not satisfy Serre's condit
(I,p,I), r = 1,
where
p(x) = x/2
f = id I , p o f
p(x) = 4x(1-x).
f ~ (0) = 0;
f(x1,x2) = 4x1 (1-x1) (1—x 2) , such that
or
= f
in the second case, take
f~ = id I .
and
In the first case,
f
r = 2,
Then there is no continuous map
r-1
f0'
We remark that the first bundle has both empty and nonempty fibers, while the second has a single connected fiber, the others being not connected.
As we shall see later (see 5.4.3.6), such features of
a bundle are not compatible with Serre 1s condition vfrien the base is connected.
Serre's Condition is Local 3.
If
neighborhood
every point of the
Usuch that
£ |u
base
bs £
of a bundle
is a Serre bundle, then
£
£
has a
itself is
a Serre bundle. PROOF. maps satisfying
Let
f : in
bs £
pr £ o f~ = f |
and
.
sets such that the restriction of
f ^ : in ^
Since
£
bs £
tl £
be continuous
can be covered by open
to each of these
sets satisfies
Serre's condition, Theorem 1.1.7.16 yields a positive integer that every cube of edge
1/N
contained in
one of these open sets.
Divide
ln
into
arrange these cubes in dictionary order n — 1 i W± = I U (Uj_ B x f be continuous maps such that
(B x F,pr^,B),
Let
f: ln
pr^ o
B
= f in-i "
Define
f : in
B x f
as
f (x1,...,xn ) = (f (x1,•••,xn ),pr2 o f0 (X l ,...,xn-1)) . Clearly, 5.
pr^ o f
-
f
and
In-1
f0
The following example demonstrates that there are Serre
bundles which
are notlocally trivial.
with vertices
(0,0),
defined by
f
(0,1),
p^ (x ,x2) = x^ ,
Let
and (1,0),
T
be the
and let
p2 (x^,x2) = x 2 .
triangle in
p ^ ,p2 : T -*■ I
The bundle
not locally trivial; indeed, the fibers over the points
0
JR
2
be
(T^^I)
is
and
are
1
not homeomorphic. However, (T,p ,1) does satisfy Serre's condition: n ~ n~ 1 rw if f: I -*• I and f^: I -*■ T are continuous, and p^ o f^ = f zn-i then the map f~: in T defined by f~(x1,...,xn ) = (f(x1,...,xn ),min(1-f(x1,...,xn )/P2 o f 0 (X 1 ^ is continuous, covers
f,
and equals
f^
on
•' X n - 1 )))
n “1 I
This example shows also that in a Serre bundle with connected base there can be nonhomeomorphic fibers.
Actually, there are Serre
bundles with connected base and in which some fibers are not even homotopy equivalent, being instead equivalent in a certain weaker sense (see 5.4.4.3 and 5.4.3.6) .
272
The Covering Homotopy Theorem 6.
Suppose that
cellular pair.
£
is a Serre bundle and (X,A)
Then for everycontinuous
homotopy
F: X xI ->
bs £ of
G: A x I
tl £
f ~ L covering
f~
covers
which
of
PROOF.
bs £ , e e
while the formula f (cha (x)), e
if
t = 0,
if
x E Sr ^
^0,e(x't) (cha^ (x) ,t) ,
r 27” 1 n : (D x 0) U (S x I) -*tl £ . u ,e (Dr x I,(Dr x 0) U (Sr ^ x i) ) and (ir + \ i r )
defines a continuous map Obviously, the pairs are homeomorphic , and
j
^ = ^e (Drx0)u (S17-^xi)# Consequently, r there is a continuous map (J> : D x I -> tl £ covering $ and ^ ~ ^ r—1 extending n . Since (x,t) =F (cha (x),t) for all x ES , u ,e e r— i e the maps ~ corresponding to all r-cells from X \ A together with F~_^
pr ^ o ^
yield a continuous map
evident that
,_M , _ ^p r s£ o F~r = F I|(AUske^X)xi
Hence, we may use induction on sequence
(F~:
each other. extending
F~: (A U ske^X)
r,
(A U ske^X) x I -> tl
x I + tl £ , and it is
and r|(AUske^_^X)xi F ~ | /7VM , _ = r-1 F~ . .
settingF~^ = G,
to
£ ^r-_^ homotopies
These homotopies define a homotopy of
produce a which extend
f~covering
F
and
G. 7.
Let
X
be a cellular space and let
f~: X
tl £
be
continuous. If £ is a Serre bundle, then every homotopy of pr £ is covered by ahomotopy of f~.
© f~
This is precisely Theorem 6 for the absolute case A = 0, ] and hence the proof is immediate. We note t that for X = in , Theorem 7 reduces to Serre1s condition for r = n+1.
273
The Case of Coverings 8.
Suppose that
is a covering in the broad sense,
K
a connected
topological space, and
I_f
= pr£o g
pr£Jo f
PROOF.
and
f
f,g: X -> tl £
equals
g
X is
are continuous maps.
at somepoint, then
Since the set {x E X | f (x) / g(x)}
f = g.
is open and, by
assumption, its complement is not empty, it suffices to show that this complement is also open. = g(Xg), all
then
x € U.
x^
Let
has a neighborhood
V
anyneighborhood of
U
such that
be a neighborhood of
pr £|v : V -> pr E, (V) pr £ (f (x) )
In other words, let us verify that if f(x) = g(x)
= pr£(g(x))
with
f (U)
for all
c= v
for
such that
isa homeomorphism (see 2.4) , and take x^
=
andg(U) c: v.
x £ X,
we have
U
to be
Since
f(x) = g(x)
for all
x € U. 9.
Suppose that
£
is a covering in the broad sense,
a connected cellular space with a distinguished Q-cell f ,g:
X
£
tl
are continuous. If the maps
f(x^) = g(x^),
XQ-homotopic and
PROOF. pr
K° g
f
then
pr £ and
o
g
f
h(xQ) = f(xQ) = g(xQ)
and
pr ^ ° h = pr
f g,
and
and pr £
are
By Theorem 6, any x^-homotopy from
is covered by an x^-homotopy from
Xq ,
X is
o
g
are
XQ-ho m o t o p i c .
p r £ © f to
to some map
h.
Since
Proposition 8 yields
h = g.
4. 1.
Bundles with Map Spaces as Total Spaces
We say that a bundle
£
satisfies the strong Serre
condition* if for every topological space f~: X -> tl £ , of
f~
and every homotopy
which covers F. If we replace X
F of
X,
every continuous map
pr £ ° f7
there is a homotopy
by a cube of arbitrary dimension, then this
becomes the simple Serre condition; moreover, when
X
is restricted to
be an arbitrary cellular space, we obtain again a condition equivalent to the simple Serre condition; see 3.7. 2.
Let
space, respectively. bundle
(X,A) and If X
Y
is Hausdorff and locally compact,
(C(X,Y),C(in,id),C(A,Y))
* Translator's note: space or a fibrat i o n .
bea Borsuk pairand a topological then the
satisfies the strong Serre condition.
Such a bundle is frequently called a Hurewicz fiber
274
PROOF. f~ :
Z
Since and
+ C(X,Y), X
Consider a topological space and a homotopy
F: Z x I
Z,
a continuous map
C (A ,Y )
of
is Hausdorff and locally compact, the maps
G: Z x A x i
y
given by
G(z,x,t) = [F (z ,t )] (x)
C(in,id)
of
.
g : Z x X ■+ Y
g~(z,x) = (f~ )A (z,x) = [f (z) ] (x)
are continuous (see 1.2.7.6).
It is clear
and that
G is a homotopy of 9~| z x a ‘ N o w (Z x X,Z x a ) is a Borsuk pair(see 1.3.5.5. and 1.3.5.3), and hence G extends to a homotopy G of g . Finally, the formula F : Z x i
C(X,Y) 3.
[F (z,t)](x) = G (z,x,t) of
f which covers
defines a homotopy
F.
In a bundle with connectedbase and satisfying the strong
Serre condition, the fibers are pairwise homotopy equivalent. Let
£
be the given bundle, and let s be a path joining -1 -1 two given points of bs £ . Set Fq = pr £ (s (0 )) and F^ = pr E, (s (1 )) Now consider two homotopies of the composite maps
: F^
Fq —
I -> bs £
x
and
and
(t).
Since
£
tl
Jg(x,t)
£
= s(t) and
satisfies the strongSerre condition,
are covered by two homotopies,
J~: F^ x I
bs
— > tl £ --^r ^ •>bs £ and
F^ — ^S— ► tl £ —P.f ■§..-> bs £ , respectively, given by J^(x,t) = s
: F^ x i
of the maps
Jq : Fq
in: F q -* tl £
i
x
and
tl £
Jq
and
in: F
tl £ ,
respectively. Now j q ^f q x c F 1 ' JT C F0 ' andhence there are well-defined maps fQ : FQ -+ F^ , fQ (x) = J~(x,1), and f 1 : F -+ FQ , f^ (x) = J^(x,1).
We next show that f^ o f^
and since the construction is symmetric, id F 1 .
is homotopic to
f^ o f^
id F q ,
will be homotopic to
The formulas J~(x,2t),
if
t £ 1/2,
J1 (fQ (x) ,2t-1) ,
if
t * 1/2,
j(x,t) = and H (x,t ,t ) = s ((1- t ) (1 - I1-2tI define a map
j: Fq x I -> tl E,
and a homotopy
H: (Fq x i) x i
of p r £ o j. Again, using Serre's strong condition, H to a homotopy H~: (FQ x I) x i -*tl £ of j. Since (1- t ) (1 -
|1 — 2 11 ) = 0
f or
t
=
H~((FQ x (0 U 1)) x I) u H~((fq
1 or
t = 0,1,
we
s ee
bs £
can be lifted
that
x I) x1 ) c F . Therefore, the
formula
275
K(x,t) =
defines a homotopy
t O
if t * 1/3,
H~( (x,3t-1) ,1) ,
if 1/3 £ t * 2/3,
H~( (x,1 ) ,3-3t),
if t 5 2/3,
K: F q x I -* f q .
= j(x,0) = J~(x,0) =
H ( (x,0) ,3t) ,
= xand
o
K(x,0) = H~((x,0),0) =
K (x,1) = H~((x,1),0) = j (x,1)
= ^1 ^ 0 f l
Since
'it follows that
K
=
is a homotopy from
id F q
f Q .
4.
Given arbitrary points
topological space
X,
C (I ,0 ,1 ;X,Xq ,x^j )
have
PROOF.
thespaces the
,x^x|
of a connected
C(I,0,1;X ,x Q ,x 1) and
same homotopy type .
C (1,0,1 ;X,Xq,x^ )
fibers of the bundle
x^x
and
C (1,0 ,1 ;X ,x^ ,x^j )
(C (I ,X) ,C (in,id) ,C ( (0 U 1) ,X))
are the
over the points
(xQ ,x^) and (xq ,x'j) of its base C ((0 U 1 ) ,X) = X x X; theorems 2 and 3, they have the same homotopy type.
hence by
The Adjoint Serre Bundle 5. bundle
Given an arbitrary bundle
£,
we let
ad £
denote the
with the samebase, total space { (x,s) E tl£ x C (I ,bs £) | s (0) = pr£(x) } /
and projection
(x,s)
Notice that
-* s(1).
We call ad £
the total spaces tl ad £
same homotopy type: the formulas u
X
is the constant path in
homotopy equivalences
bs £
while the
the first one is homotopic to st (t
)
=
S
where
(x ,u ^)
with
Indeed, the
id tl £,
((x,s),t) b (x,s ),
x b-
tl £ + tl ad £
inverses to one another. the second one is
the bundle adjoint
and
and
tl £
havethe
(x,s) h*
x
,
where
u (0) = pr£(x) ,
define
tl ad £ -* tl £
which are
x
composition of thesecond map with via the homotopy
is the path in
bs £
defined by
(tT) . 6.
The bundle
for any bundle
satisfies the strong Serre condition,
E,.
PROOF. f~: Z -* tl ad £, pr ad C o f~.
ad £;
Consider a topological space and a homotopy
Denote by
g^
and
Z,
a continuous map
F: Z x I -> bs ad £ (= bs t ) g2
£.
composition of the first mapwith
id(tlad^)
s^
and
to
the composite maps
of
276
Pr i Z — — » tl ad K
in -> tl Ç x C (I,bs Ç)
tl C
pr.
C (I,bs Ç) , and define a h o m o t o p y
g:
Z x I -*
(I,bs Ç)
[g2 ( z )]( t (1 +t) ) ,
by
if
t
£ 1/(1+t),
[g (z ,t) ] (T F ( z , t (1+t) - 1), It is readily verified that F~: Z x I
tl ad £
of
f~
F (z,t) = (g (z) ,g (z ,t )) and that
5. 1. a sphere with 2.
g ^ 1
covers
F.
a sphere with
g
handles admits
handles as a covering space.
Show that for any
admits a sphere with
F~
defines a homotopy
Exercises
Show that for any 2g-1
T ^ 1/(1+t).
if
2h-2
h ^ 1
a sphere with
h
crosscaps
crosscaps as a covering space.
3. Show that the spaces C (S^,ort ; IRPn /(1:0:...:0)) 1 n 0 C (S,ort^;S ,ort^) x s are homeomorphic for any n ^ 1 . 4. base
Sn ,
Show that the bundle with total space
and projection
s h * s (1) ,
§2.
and
C (1,0;Sn ,ort^) ,
is locally trivial (see 1.2.9.4).
A DIGRESSION:
TOPOLOGICAL GROUPS AND TRANFORMATION GROUPS
1. 1.
A set
G
Topological Groups
is a topological group or a group space if it
is endowed with both a topology and a group structure such that the group operations, i.e., the maps g h- g
-1
,
are continuous.
G x G
G,
(g,h)
g h , and
G
G,
Obviously, the continuityof these two maps
is equivalent to the continuity of the single map
G
x g G,
(g,h) ►> g 1h. By the definition of the (product) topology on
G x g,
the
277
continuity of the map
(g,h) h- gh
for every neighborhood
W
U
hQ
and
V
of
gQ
and 1 g h
at the point
of the point such that
gQh 0
(g0 ,hQ)
means that
one can find neighborhoods
UV c w.
Similarly, the continuity
-
of the map point that
(g,h)
g^ h^
means that for every neighborhood
there are neighborhoods
U
and
V
of
g^
W
and
of the h^
such
U_1V S2n_1, SU (n) /SU (n-1 ) -*■ S2n_1 , 4n-1 Sp(n)/Sp (n-1) + S (see 7) equal the injective factors of the
submersions
V(n,n)
CEV (n ,n) + CEV (n ,1) ,
[= 0(n)]
V(n,1)
[= SR "*], V(n,n-1)
(CV (n,n-1) + CEV(n,1),
defined in Subsection 3.2.1
and
V(n,1),
lHV(n,n) ->1V( n,1),
(see 3.2.1.3, 3.2.1.5, and 3.2.1.6).
If we restrict 0(n),
U(n), and
Sp(n)
(n > 1)
to their
subgroups which consists of scalar multiples of the identity matrix, and which are usually identified
with S^,
we obtain continuous actions
x s n^
and
S3 x s 4 n _ 1
orbit spaces CDPn_1 , the
S4n_1.
Sn~1/S°,
0(n) ,
S11 \
S3 , respectively,
S^ x s n
+
S n
,
These are free actions, and the corresponding
S2n_1/S1, and
and H P n‘1 . We remark also that
actions of
S^
and
s \
U (n) ,
S4n 1/S3
Dn ,
D2n,
and
and
Sp(n)
on
are simply
D4n are IR ,
CD
,
nRPn ,1,(CPn
invariant under and H
.
Hence
292
0(n)
and
SO(n)
act continuously on
continuously on
D2n,
and
Sp(n)
Dn ,
U(n)
and
SU(n)
acts continuously on
act
D n.
All these
are effective actions. 12.
The groups
0(n)
and
SO(n)
(0(k)
and
SO(k))
continuously from the left (right) on the Stiefel manifolds the left actions are v £ V (n ,k );
g
are given by
(v,g)
SU(k)) on
defined by
andv
(g,v) ^ g o v
0(n)
V(n,k): or
SO(n),
are regarded as linearmaps]; the right actions v o g . Similarly,
U(n)
and
SU(n)
(U(k)
and
act continuously from the left (respectively, from the right)
(CV (n ,k ) ,
and
Sp(n)
(Sp(k))
acts continuously from the left
(respectively, from the right) on For intransitive (CV(n,n), point
HV(n,k).
k ^ 0, all the left actions are effective, and the only ones are
n > 1.
SO(n) x V(n,n)
V(n,n)
The isotropy subgroups of
and 0(n)
are considered as linear isometric maps O(n-k)
SU(n), and of (CV(n,k) Sp(n-k),
and
SO(n-k).
at the
(the elements of coincide
Similarly, the isotropy subgroups of
U(n),
(0, ... ,0 ,x^ ,.. .,x^)] SU(n-k), and
The corresponding homeomorphisms
0(n)/0(n-k) -+ V (n ,k) , U(n)/U(n-k)
SO(n)
k n IR ■+IR )
Sp(n) at the points [(x^,...,x^) and lV(n,k) coincide with U(n-k),
respectively.
SU(n) x (CV(n,n) and
[ (x^,...,x^) b (0,...,0,x^,...,x^)] £ V(n,k)
V(n,k) with
[g £
act
SO(n)/SO(n-k) ->V(n,k) ,
(CV (n ,k ) ,
SU (n)/SU (n-k) ->CCV(n,k),
and Sp (n)/Sp (n-k)
3HV (n ,k ) ,
are precisely the injective factors of the maps SO (n) -> V (n ,k) ,
U (n) ->• (CV (n ,k ) ,
defined in Subsection 3.2.1 k = 1,
SU(n) + (CV(n,k),
and
(see 3.2. 1.3, 3.2.1.5,
Sp(n) + HV(n,k),
and 3.2.1.6).
When
these actions reduce to those discussed in 11. All the right actions are free.
spaces, and
0(n) -* V(n,k),
V (n,k )/0 (k) ,
H V (n ,k )/S p (k ),
manifolds
V (n,k )/SO (k) ,
The corresponding orbit
(CV (n ,k)/U (k) ,
(CV (n ,k )/SU (k ) ,
are canonically homeomorphic to the Grassman
G(n,k), G+ (n,k),
CEG(n,k),
and
]HG(n,k),
respectively;
the corresponding canonical homeomorphisms are the injective factors of the maps
V(n,k) + G(n,k),
and 3HV (n ,k) ^]HG(n,k), 3.2.2.7, and 3.2.2. 8) . 13.
V(n,k) + G+ (n,k),
defined in Subsection 3.2.2 (see 3.2.2.3,
The same formulas, i.e.,
define left actions of
GL(n,3R)
GL(n,(C)
and of
on
(CV1 (n,k) ,
(CV(n,k) + (CG (n,k),
and
(g,v) GL+ (n, IR)
GL(n, 1H)
on
g o v, on
(g,v)
V'(n,k),
3HV 1 (n,k) ,
v ° g, of
and right
293
actions of
GL(k, IR)
(CV* (n,k) ,
and of
and
GL+ (k,IR)
GL(k, IH)
on
on
V ’(n,k),
of
GL(k,(E)
on
3HV' (n,k) .
All the left actions are effective and, excepting the action GL+ (n, 3R) x V 1 (n ,n ) GL (n , 3R) , GL (n ,(E) ,
V 1 (n,n) , transitive. and
-► (0, . ..,0 ,x1 ,... ,xk )]
GL (n , IH) of
at the points
v ’(n,k),
GL(n-k, HR) , GL(n-k,(C) , and corresponding homeomorphisms
The isotropy subgroups
CCV1 (n ,k ) ,
GL(n-k, 3H) ,
[ (x , ...,x ) *+ I .K and HV' (n,k) are
respectively.
GL(n, IR)/GL(n-k, 3R) + V'(n,k),
of
The
GL (n ,(C)/GL (n-k ,(C) -»■ E V ’ (n ,k) ,
and GL (n, IH) /GL (n-k , IH) -> 3HV ' (n,k) , are the injective factors of the maps GL(n,(C) + (CV' (n,k) ,
and
GL(n, H)
GL (n, IR) -> V'(n,k),
3HV’ (n,k) ,
3.2.1
(see 3.2.1.7, 3.2.1.8, and 3.2.1.9).
GL+ (n,
IR)
is
at the point
defined in Subsection
The isotropy subgroup of
[ (x^,...,x^) h- (0 , ...,0 ,x ,. ..,x^)] E V ’(n,k)
GL+ (n-k , IR) . All the right actions are free.
spaces,
V ’ (n,k)/GL (k,
]HV1 (n,k)/GL(k, ih) , manifolds
IR)
,
The corresponding orbit
V 1 (n ,k) /GL+ (k , IR) ,
(CV 1 (n,k) /GL (k ,(C) , and
are canonically homeomorphic to the Grassman
G(n,k),G+ (n,k), £CG(n,k),
and
3HG(n,k);
the corresponding
canonical homeomorphisms are the injective factors of the maps V 1 (n,k )
+G(n,k), V 1 (n ,k)
H V 1 (n,k) -*IHG(n,k),
G (n,k) ,
(CV!(n,k)->(CG(n,k),and
defined in Subsection 3.2.2 (see 3.2.2.3, 3.2.2.7,
and 3 .2 .2 .8) . 14. S0(n)
GL (n, IR)
GL+ (n, IR) ,
0(n),
and
obviously act continuously from the left on the Grassman
manifolds
G(n,k),
U(n)
SU(n)
and
GL(n, IH) For
and its subgroups
k
and
G (n,k).
Similarly,
GL(n,(C)
act continuously from the left on
Sp(n)
odd,the actions
of
0(n)
and SO(n)
and
GL+ (n,k) x G+ (n,k) G + (n,k) for k matrices with positive diagonal elements. k = 0
and
(EG(n,k),
while
act continuously from the left on IHG(n,k).
The noneffectiveness kernels of the actions
cases
and its subgroups
on
G + (n,k)
GL (n, IR)
x
are effective.
G+ (n,k) -> G + (n,k)
odd consist of scalar If we exclude the trivial
k = n, the noneffectivennes kernels of the remaining
actions consists of all scalar matrices contained in the corresponding group.
The only intransitive actions are
GL+ (n, IR) x G+ (n,0) SO (n) x SO (n) x
G + (n,0),
G (n,0) -+G + (n,0), g
+
GL(n, IR) x G+ (n,0)
0(n) x G + (n,0)
GL+ (n, IR) x G + (n,n)
(n,n) -+G+ (n,n) .Take the plane
x
G + (n,0),* G + (n,n),
=I 0,...,x
and
n , Js. = 0
G+ (n,0) ,
294
(oriented in the case of manifolds
G(n,k),
G^ + (n,k))
G (n,k),
subgroups of the actions
as a distinguished point in the
ŒG(n,k),
and
IG(n,k).
Then
the isotropy
GL(n, 3R) x G(n,k) -> G(n,k),
GL (n ,3R) x G (n,k) + G+ (n/k ) / GL (n,Œ ) x ŒG(n,k) GL (n, 3i) xüHG(n,k) ->]HG(n,k)
ŒG(n,k),
at these distinguished points
and are the
subgroups of all matrices of the form
and B are nonsingular matrices of order n-k and k, where respectively, and C is an arbitrary (n-k)xk matrix (and B E GL+(k/IR) in the case of
G (n,k)).
If we restrict the acting group to a subgroup, then the new isotropy subgroup is the intersection of the original isotropy subgroup with the new acting group. G(n,k) U(n)
and on
G (n,k),
(EG(n,k),
In particular, for the actions of
the action of
and the action of
SO(n) Sp(n)
on
G + (n,k),
on
]HG(n,k),
0(n)
on
the action of the
corresponding isotropy subgroups are the images of the monomorphisms O(n-k) x 0(k)
0(n),
O(n-k) x SO(k) -* 0(n),
U (n-k) x U (k)
U (n) ,
and
Sp(n-k) x Sp(k)
SO(n-k) x SO(k) Sp(n),
SO(n),
all defined by
the matrix formula (A,B)
(A I lo
If we identify these product with their images, we obtain canonical homeomorphisms 0 (n) / [0 (n-k) x 0 (k) ]
G(n,k),
0(n)/[0(n-k) x SO (k )]
G+(n,k),
SO (n) / [SO (n-k ) x SO(k)] -> G (n,k), U (n) / [U (n-k ) x U (k) ] -v (EG (n ,k ) , Sp (n) / [Sp (n-k ) x Sp (k ) ] +IG(n,k) . 15. Let m, The complex-number formula
be relatively prime positive integers. 2ttikL . / m
(k , (z1 ,.. .,zn )) *+ (z ^e
2itikt ,.,w zne
/m
n
),
where k G 7L , (z^ ./2n ) £ S n ^ , defines an action 7L x S^n ^ 2n-1 with noneffectiveness kernel m2Z , which becomes, by shifting to the effective factor, a free action of the group
295
s2tl 1 - The orbit space S2n 1/S is denoted by m is called a lens (or a lens space). There are also infinite lenses m , t ^ , ¿ 2 •' • •
L
I
L(m;£1 , t 2 ,...),
relatively prime positive integers.
)
n
and
with
The lens
L (m ;£.|/¿2 » •• •) defined as the orbit space of the free action resulting from passing to the effective factor of the action 2iti k i
/m
(k, (z1 ,z2 , ...) ) h- (z 1e
2iTikl ~ / m ,z2e 1 ,...)
OO
of
7L
on
S
.
L (m ;£ , ¿ 2 > •• •) =
An equivalent decription:
= lim(L(m ; £ . . . , 1 ) ,in: L(m;£1,..., I ) + L ( m ; l . , . . . , 1 )). The i n i n 1 n +1 inf inite lens L (m ;1 ,1 , ...) is denoted simply by L (in) . 2n-1 According to 8, the triples (S ~ ,pr,L( m ; l , . . . , 1 )) and 00
i
(S ,pr,L ( m ; l ^ , ¿ 2 '• * - ) ) 16.
n
are coverings.
The formula
(y,x) ^ yxy
where
x
and
y
are
quaternions and y has norm 3 4 4 3 S x hr ir „ The space HR^
of imaginary quaternions is invariant
under this action, and hence
3 IR ,
[We identify
JR^j
with
1R^
1,
,
defines a continuous action
via the map
3 S -spaces.
are
shi: JR^ ->■1R^;
The noneffectiveness kernel of the action S°,
3 HR ,
and also
S
3
x
jr
3
see 3.2.3.1.]
3 ]R
is obviously
and now it is clear that the effective action of the factor group
S^/S^ = IRP^
on
]R^
becomes the standard action of
S0(3)
(see 11) under the canonical identification of the spaces S0(3)
on IRP^
IR^ and
(see 3.2.3.1) . 17.
Let
P
be a convex regular polyhedron in IR^
(a tetrahedron, cube, octahedron, dodecahedron, or icosahedron) with center
0.
Let
GP
rotations which take GP G~P
be the subgroup of P
under the projection
S0(3)
into itself, and let S
S0(3)
do not change if we replace
P
P
G P
(see 16).
be the preimage of
Obviously,
GP
and
by the dual polyhedron, while they
are transformed into conjugate subgroups of replace
consisting of those
S0(3)
and
if we
by any convex regular polyhedron with the same number of
faces and center
0.
Therefore, in
three classes of conjugate subgroups
S0(3) GP
(S3)
there are exactly
(respectively,
G P) .
The
groups in the first class are called tetrahedral groups (respectively, binary tetrahedral groups), those in the second class - cube or octahedral groups
(respectively, binary cube or octahedral groups),
and those in the third class - dodecahedral or icosahedral groups
296
(respectively, binary dodecahedral and icosahedral groups). To every rotation in
GP
we may associate the image of a
marked oriented edge of the polyhedron invertible mapping of the group P.
GP
P,
onto the set of oriented edges of
Consequently, the order of the group
edges of
P,
i.e.,
12
when
P
and in this way define an GP
is twice the number of
is a tetrahedron,
24
when
P
cube or octahedron, and 60when P is a dodecahedron or an icosahedron. Thecorresponding binarygroups G Phave order 48,
and
is a
24,
120. The coset
spacesSO(3)/GP
3 ~ S /G P
and
are orbit spaces of
the free actions induced by the left canonical actions of SO(3) and 3 — 3 S under the inclusions GP -* SO(3) and G P -> S . Therefore, the 3 3 ~ triples (SO(3),pr,SO(3)/GP) and (S ,pr,S /G P) are coverings (see 8). Obviously, we can write
SO(3)/GP = S^/G P.
4. 1.
Show that for any smooth manifold
second topologies 2. 0 on
and
2n ,
Top X
Exercises
on Top X
the first and the
coincide.
Let X denote the subset of all
X
n £ 7L .
HR consisting of the
points
Show that the first and the second topologies
are distinct. 3.
Show that the canonical diffeomorphism
SU(2)
S
3
(see
3.2.1.5) is a group isomorphism. 4.
Show that the lenses
L (m ;£1 , ..., 1 , ) I k i the sum
are homeomorphic whenever for each difference
I , -
5.
Z\
is a multiple of
and L (m ;£ ', .. .,-£/) I k or the
m.
Show that the submanifold
Tang^ 3RP
2
of
Tang IRP
2
consisting of the unit tangent vectors (i.e., of the images under the map
d pr : Tang S
2
morphic to the lens 6.
-* Tang 3RP
2
of the unit tangent vectors) is homeo
L(4;7,7).
Consider the action of
unit vectors tangent to
2
S ,
ffi
on the manifold
where the nonzero element of
each vector v into -v. Show that the orbit space homeomorphic to L(4;7,7). 7.
Consider the action
where the nonzero element of Show that the orbit space
V(3,2)
ZZ2 x Tang^ 3RP
2
takes each vector 2
Tang^ ]RP /S^
takes
V(3,2)/ZZ2
-* Tang^ 3RP v
into
of
9
is
(see 5) ,
-v.
is homeomorphic to the coset
297
space
3 S /H,
quaternions
of
takes each point 2
that the orbit space 9. nonzero
(EP / Z 2
consisting of the
Z>2
x TP
(z :z i
z
J
2
2
-*(CP ,
^
((z
Consider the action of
nonzero element of
a
that the orbit space
(S
§3.
2
2
x s )/ ^ 2
1
z
Show
3
S . (EP1 ,
where the into
((EP^ x (CP^ )/22^
on
2
2
S
(x,y)
x S, into
is
where the (y,x).
Show
2
is homeomorPhic to
(EP .
BUNDLES WITH A GROUP STRUCTURE
1. 1.
7L^
takes each point
(z : z n : z 0 ) .
:z ) , (w :w )) I A I A
((z^ :z^) f (w^ :w^) ) . Show that the orbit space 4 homeomorphic to S . 10.
a
on (EP 1x
of
7Ltakes each point
where the nonzero
:z )into
is homeomorphic to
Consider the action
element of
3
±ort^, ±ort^.
Consider the action ^
S
is the subgroup of
±ort^, i o r t ^
8. element
H
where
Spaces With F-Structure
The bundles which we encouter most frequently have fibers
thatbesides being merely topological spaces, carry some additional structure: for example, they may be vector, Euclidean, or Hermitian spaces.
In the present section we shall introduce this concept of
additional structure into the theory of bundles. We begin by giving an exact description of the necessary type of structures and then fit them systematically into the basic definitions of the theory, given in § 1 2. G-space.
Let
G
(see Subsections 1.1 and 1.2).
be a topological group, and let
We say that the topological space
F-structure if there is given a nonempty set
W
6: F -> W
belongs to
A
A
from
A
of homeomorphism a €A,
if and only if
transformation induced by one of the elements of of
be an effective
is endowed with an
such that, for an arbitrarily fixed homeomorphism homeomorphism
F
G.
F
a given 3
o a
is the
The homeomorphisms
are called marked. Every marked homeomorphism naturally carries the action of F to W.
If
G
W
is commutative, then the resulting action
G
298
G x w
W does not depend upon the choice of the marked homeomorphism,
and hence G
in this case the F-structure reduces to the action of
G.
If
is not commutative, then an F-structure does not define a canonical
action of
G on W. We remark that
F
itself has a canonical F-structure, namely
that whose marked homeomorphisms are the transformations induced by the elements of G. In the simplest case when
G
is the trivial group, a space
with an F-structure is simply a topological space canonically homeomorphic to
F. 3 (EXAMPLES).
action
If
G = GL (n, JR)
and
F = IRn
with the
usual
ofthis group, then a space with an F-structure is nothing else but
an n-dimensional vector space, and fixing a marked homeomorphism is simply fixing a basis of the space. If and
F
G
is JRn
is one of the groups
GL (n,3R),
0(n),
or
SO(n),
with the usual action of these groups, then a space
with an F-structure is an oriented n-dimensional real vector space, an n-dimensional Euclidean space, or an oriented n-dimensional Euclidean space, respectively.
When
with the usual action of
G G,
is
GL(n,(C)
or
U(n),
and
F
is
CCn
then a space with an F-structure is an
n-dimensional complex vector space, or an n-dimensional Hermitian space, respectively. If and
G
G = DiffrX,
where
is a Cr-manifold
(1 £ r £ a)
acts as usual, then a space with an F-structure is a Cr-manifold 27
which is C -diffeomorphic to If and
X = F
F = X
G = Top X ,
X.
where
X
with the usual action of
is a locally compact Hausdorff space, Top X ,
then a space with an
F-structure is simply a topological space homeomorphic to If
G
the unit simplex
X.
is the group of all simplicial autohomeomorphisms of Tn ,
and
F = Tn
with the standard action of this
group, then a space with an F-structure is simply an n-dimensional topological simplex. 4.
A homeomorphism
W -+■ W 1,
where
W
and
W1
with F-structure, which takes the set of marked homeomorphisms of into the set of marked homeomorphisms of
W 1,
are spaces
W
is called an isomorphism
or, more specifically, an F-isomorphism. In each of the previous examples, the F-isomorphisms form a well-known class of maps: in the first and the fifth cases they are the linear isomorphism, in the second - the orientation preserving linear isomorphisms, in the third and sixth - the linear isometric isomorphisms, in the fourth - the orientation preserving linear isomorphisms, in the
299
seventh - the C -diffeomorphisms, in the eighth - the homeomorphisms, and in the ninth - the simplicial homeomorphisms. 5.
Given a space
with an F 1-structure, the product F x F ’-structure
a
x
If the G^-space reducing the group W^
with an F-structure and a space
W x W'
G
a
'
,
F^
to
where
a
and
a
W
are marked homeo
'
then by returning to
with an F^-structure becomes a space
topologically,
F x F1 ^ W x W1
is obtained from the G-space
G^ ,
is the same as
W^,
W'
is obviously a space with an
(see 2.3.6); the marked homeomorphisms
are those of the form morphisms .
space
W
W
F
F
from
by F^
every
with an F-structure:
while the new marked homeo
morphisms are defined as the compositions of the transformations induced by the elements of W
G
is obtained from
with the old marked homeomorphisms.
W^
We say that
by extending (or prolonging) the group
G^
to
G.
2. 1.
Steenrod Bundles
Let
G-space, respectively.
G
A bundle
if eachof its fibers is endowed F
and
£
F
be a topological group and an effective
is a weak F-bundle, or a W-F-bundle,
with an F-structure.
In this case,
Gare called the standard fiber and the structure group of
respectively. fibers of
and
£
the right on
The set of all marked homeomorphisms from is denoted by MH(£)
MH(£).
by the rule:
The group
G
[ag](y) = a(gy)
F
£,
onto the
acts naturally from [a
E MH(£),
g E G,
y E F] . If
is a W-F-bundle and f : B bs £ is continuous, then i clearly the induced bundle f ‘£ is a W-F-bundle: the F-structures on i -1 its fibers are defined via the homeomorphisms ab tl ad f : pr f "£ (b) -* -+■ pr E, ^ (f (b) )
£
[b E B] .
Given two W-F-bundles, is called
5
and
a W-F-map if the maps ab tl f
the fibers of
n
n,
a map
f
of
from the fibers of
are isomorphisms (see 1.4).
£ £
into n into
A W-F-map which is an
isomorphism (respectively, equivalence) in the pure topological sense, i.e., in the sense of 1.1.2, is called a W-F-isomorphism (respectively, a w-F-equivalence).
Two W-F-bundles which can be mapped into each
other by a W-F-isomorphism (W-F-equivalence) are said to be W - F -isomorphic
(respectively, W-F-equivalent).
To each W-F-map
f: 5 + n
corresponds the map
300
MH(£) -► MH(n),
which takes each marked homeomorphism
into the composite homeomorphism Moreover, we see that right actions of
G
M H (f ) on
pr C ^ (b)
F —
MH( D
space,
pr £ 1 (b)
ab tl f ^ pr ^ ^ (bs f (b) ).
is a G-map with respect to the natural and
M H (n )•
The standard trivial bundle, a r bi tr ar y topolo gi ca l
a: F
(B x F,pr^,B),
with
is o b v i o u s l y a W-F -bu nd le :
on its fibers are de fi n e d by the h o m e o m o r p h i s m s
B
an
the F - s t r u c t u r e s
F -* b x f ,
y
(b,y).
As in Subsection 1.2, every W-F-bundle which is W-F-equivalent to a standard trivial W-F-bundle is called a W-F-trivial W-F-bundle. 2.
A bundle
£
is a strong F-bundle or, simply, an F-bundle
if it is a W-F-bundle and If
£
MH(£)
is endowed with a topology.
is an F- bu ndl e and
f: B
bs £
is conti nu ou s,
then
i the induced b u n d l e
f"£
is also an F-bundle:
on
i M H (f “O ,
by
a »-> (pr f #Uot(F) ) ,[MH(ad f) ] (ot) ) .
we use the injective mapping
A map
f:
E,
n/
where
E, and
be an F-map if it is a W-F-map and
M H (f )
to i n tr od uce a t o p o l o g y
i MH(f'C) ^ n
x MH(£)
B
given
are F-bundles, is said to
is continuous.
An F-map
f
is an F-isomorphism (F-equivalence) if it is an isomorphism (respectively, equivalence) in the pure topological sense and The standard trivial bundle
MH(f)
(B x F,pr^,B),
is a homeomorphism. with
B
an
arbitrary topological space, is obviously an F-bundle: the F-structures of its fibers were already introduced in 1, and one can introduce a topology on
M H ((B x F,pr^,B))
B x g -* MH ((B x F,pr^,B)), homeomorphism
by means of the invertible mapping
which takes each pair
F -> b x f ,
y
(b,gy) .
(b,g)
into the
An F-bundle which is F-equivalent
to a standard trivial bundle is called F-trivial, and every such equivalence is an F-trivialization. 3. bs
E, has a neighborhood
F-trivial.
E,
The F-bundle U
is locally F-trivial if every point of
such that the restriction
E,|^
is
The locally F-trivial bundles are called Steenrod F-bundles. Steenrod bundles play a major role in what follows, which
accounts also for the importance of the F-bundles. are only auxiliary.
The weak F-bundles
We remark that for Steenrod bundles the canonical right action of the structure group on the space of marked homeomorphisms is continuous and free. This is plainly true in the standard trivial case, to which the general case reduces. 4.
If
C
is a Steenrod F-bundle and
f: B
bs £
is
continuous, then the induced bundle f "£ is again a Steenrod F-bundle: i t , by 2, f “£ is an F-bundle, and the obvious fact that f ' E , is F-trivial
301
if
£
is
soimpliesthe local F-triviality of
f*£.
Clearly, the
map
ad f : f’£ £is an F-map, the canonical equivalence i (idbs^)“^ ^ C/ and the canonical equivalences of the form i i i g*(f*U (f © g)*£ (see 1.1.4), are F-equivalences. Moreover, given _
any F-map h of £ into another Steenrod F-bundle, the correcting map, corr h , is an F-map. The product of a Steenrod F-bundle F*-bundle
is a Steenrod
£
with a Steenrod
F x F 1-bundle: the
its fibers is defined as in 1.5; the topology on introduced by means of the invertible mapping given by
(a,a1)
F x f 1-b un d l e
£
a x a';
If the
MH(U
is
x MH (£ 1)
MH(^ x ^')
the local F x F 1-triviality of the resulting
is
F'-trivial.
-space F^
reducing the group
G
topologically,
£
comes from the effective G-space
to G^ ,
every Steenrod F^-bundle £
MH(£; x £')
f o llo ws from the fact that it is F x F '- tr i v i a l wh en ev er
is F-trivial and
of
F x F 1-structures on
then by returning to
F
from
becomes a Steenrod F-bundle
is the same as
;
F
by
F^,
£:
the F-structures on the fibers
are those described in 1.5; further, to define a topology on
MH(£),
consider the action of -1
g 1 (g,a)
^ (g^g/ag^),
MH(£^)
(see 1), and
where
into the homeomorphism to
G^
on
G x MH(^1)/
defined as
acts canonically from the
right on
then use the invertible mapping
(G x MH ( ) )/G^ -> MH(^), (G x MH(^^))/G^
G1
which takes the orbit of the pair y
a(gy),
MH(£);
(g,a)
to transfer the topology of
finally, the local F-triviality of the
resulting
F-bundle is a consequence of its F-triviality in the case
when
is
F^-trivial.This transformation of F^-bundles into
is
knownas the extension (or prolongation) of the structure
^
F-bundles group.
It takes
F-equivalences.
F^-maps into F-maps, and F^-equivalences into It is also clear
group commutes with the
that the extension of
the structure
induction operation; that is to
say,
if
obtained from
byextension of the structure group and f: B 1 i i is an arbitrary continuous map, then f ‘£ is obtained from
£is
bs £ ky
extension of the structure group. 5.
E ve ry S t e e n r o d F - b u n d l e with trivial
s tructure g r ou p is
F-trivial.
PROOF.
Let
£
be a Steenrod bundle with standard fiber
and trivial structure group. that the bundle n=
is
(bs £ x F/p r^bs F) .
unique for any F-trivialization
U G V, n
Let
F
be an open cover of
F-trivial for any
U G T.
bs £
such
Set-
Clearly, the F-tr ivialization n |y
i|0
and these F-trivializations together £•
F
is yieldan
302
Theorems Ab out F-maps
6.
Suppose that
standard fiber
F,
B
factorial m a p .
If
t : tl £
an F-map
Ç
and
is a t op olo gi ca l
( t ° tl a d p , B
such that
£
tl £ '
° p)
space,
and
is an
£'
3 : bs £
F - ma p
3
the c omp os i t i o n
£
Ç’
and
given by
and
and the fact that
MH(t,3),
p ‘Ç +
p
are maps
then
K ' t
x(b,y)
=
3/
t
,
(t,3)
and
is
M H ( t ,3)«
it is eno ug h to ve ri f y their c o n t i n u i t y wh en
(3 (b) , G.
bs Ç
(see 1.2.3.4).
is f a ct or ial
are st andard trivial F-bundles.
MH (p ’Ç ) ,
$
(b) y ) ,
whe re
M oreover,
(j)
In this
t
s ituation,
is some m ap from
is
bs £
into
if we use the h o m e o m o r p h i s m s
x G -> MH (Ç ) ,
define the topol og ie s on see 2),
+ bs £ '
is a
is an immediate c o n s e q u e n c e of the c o n t i n u i t y of
3 ° P
the structure g roup В x G
bs£
.
The c on ti n u i t y of
t
p: B
and
We need only check the c o n t i n u i t y of
As for
are St e e n r o d b u n d l e s with
MH(p*£),
and
bs Ç ' x G -> MH(Ç')
MH(£),
and
MH(£'),
(which
re s p e c t i v e l y ;
then the maps MH(t
° tladp,3
° p) : MH(p*Ç)
MH(Ç')
-+
and М Н( т ,3) : MH(Ç)
MH ( Ç ' )
are t ra ns f o r m e d into the maps
B x G + bs Ç' x g,
(b ,g) » (3 ° p(b) , (ф о p (Ь) )g) ,
and bs Ç
x g -> bs Ç ' x
respectively. since ф
p
ф
Suppose that
standard fiber
F
-> t l Ç '
an d
(b ,g) »
(3 (b) ,ф (b)g) ,
shows that
is co nt inuous.
implies the c o n t i n u i t y of
: tl Ç
,
The first formula
is factorial,
V.
t
g
т
£
3 • bs £
an d
ф ° p
is co nt in u o u s ,
F inally,
the c o n t i n u i t y of
M H ( t ,3).
and
are
-*■ bs £ ’
Steenrod bundleswith
is c o n t i n u o u s .
is a map such that the r e s t r i c t i o n s
If
т
.
pr Ç form a n ‘F- m a p of
bs £ ,
£ j^
then
,
(x,3)
for ea ch el e m e n t
8.
E,
,
U
, 3I
(U)
lU
of some f u n d a m e n t a l
c ov e r
is an F- ma p
This is a co ro l l a r y of 6: U -> bs
and
where
T
take
p
to be
the m ap
is the given f u n d a m e n t a l
If the S t e en ro d F - b u n d l e s
£
an d
% '
c o v e r of
have
the
bs C .
same
303
base, then every F-map
f: £
with
e/
bs f
= id bs £ is an
F-equivalence. All we need to prove is that
tlf
—1
continuous, and it suffices to examine the case when is a standard trivial F-bundle. are given by (b,y) b (b,cf)(b) y ) t where
and
\fj
Then
are
£' = £
and
tl f ,tl f"1 : bs £ x f
(b,y) H» (bf^(b)y)
are some maps from
—i MH(f)
and
bs £
£
bs £
[b E bs £ ,
F
y € F] ,
into the structure group
Moreover, if we use the topologizing homeomorphism bs£ x g + -1 then MH (f) and MH (f) become the maps bs ^ x G ^ b s ^ x g
G.
given
by (b ,g) b
(b ,cf>(b)g) _
Obviously,
iJMb) = [cf)(b) ]
first the continuity of and
and
*] ,
(b,g)
(b,ip(b)g )
[b C bs £ ,
and thus the continuity of
and
ip ,
MH (f )
y € F] . implies
and then the continuity of
MH(f) \ 9 (COROLLARY) .
The correcting map,
F-equivalence for every F-map
f
corr f ,
is an
between Steenrod F-bundles.
Principal Bundles 10.
A Steenrod bundle is called principal if its standard
fiber is the structure group on itself (see 2.3.6). simply by group
G
G
G
which acts canonically from the left
We take the liberty to denote the last G-space
and, accordingly, the principal bundles with structure
will be referred to as Steenrod G-bundles. A fundamental property of the principal bundles is that their
spaces of marked homeomorphisms can be identified with their total spaces. a
More precisely, given a principal G-bundle
*+ a(e^)
defines a homeomorphism
MH(£)
tl £.
£,
the formula
For a standard trivial
bundle, this is evident, and the general case is readily reduced to the standard trivial one. If we identify
MH(0
and
then the natural right action of
a •+ a ( e „ ) ,
G
becomes the free right action of tl £ x G
tl £ via the homeomorphism
tl £,
the fibers of
£,
G
on
G
tl£ .
on
MH(£)
(see 1)
This free, action,
can be also described directly: its orbits are exactly and on each fiber the action is simply the right
canonical action, transferred from
G
to the fiber by means of marked
304
homeomorphisms. 11.
This construction of the free right action of
G
on the
total space of a principal bundle with structure group
G
can be
partially reversed.
G
acts
Assume that the topological group
continuously and freely from the consider the bundle
right on the topological space _
_
g
xg,
and
(X,pr,X/G).Its fibers (orbits) carry natural
G-structures: the marked homeomorphisms given by
X,
x £ pr
distinct homeomorphisms
1
(b).
g
G
pr
1
(b)
(b € X/G)
Since to distinct pointsx
xg,
are
correspond
we obtain also an invertible map of
X
onto the set of marked homeomorphisms, and thus we get a topology on the last set.
Therefore,
(X,pr,X/G)
is a G-bundle.
To explain why we called this last construction a partial inversion of the original one, apply it now to the right action tl^ x G ->■ tl £
described in 10; the resulting bundle is exactly
More precisely, the injective factor of the projection tl £/G
onto
bs C ,
and together with
id(tl^)
pr C
£.
maps
forms a G-isomorphism
(tU,pr,tl £/G) + 12. action of
If the G-bundle
G,
(X,pr,X/G),
defined by a free right
has a section, then it is G-trivial.
In particular,
every Steenrod G-bundle having a section is G-trivial. Indeed, if f:
s: X/G
X
is a section, then themap
((X/G) x G,pr^ ,X/G) ->(X,pr,X/G),
a G-trivialization of the bundle 13 (COROLLARY).
given by
tlf(b,g)
= s(b)g,
is
(X,pr,X/G).
If the G-bundle
(X,pr,X/G),
defined by a
free right action of G, is topologically trivial, then it is G-trivial. If (X,pr,G/X) is locally topologically trivial, then it is locally G-trivial, i.e., it is a Steenrod G-bundle.
3. 1.
Let
G
effective
G-spaces.
F-bundle
£
Associated Bundles
be a topological group, and let
F
and F'
be
The construction below associates to each Steenrod
a certain Steenrod F'-bundle having the same base. -] The formula g(a,y) = (ag,g y), where g € G, a £ MH(£), _
and
y 6 F',
defines a right action of
acts canonically from the right on the bundle with total space
MH(£);
(MH(£) x F')/G,
projection takes the orbit of a pair pr £ (a(F)) .
G
on
MH(0
x F'
see 2.3).
Let
base
bs £ ,
(a,y) 6 MH(£) x f ’
(here
G
denote and whose into the point
The fibers of this bundle carry a natural F '-structure:
305
the marked homeomorphisms where
a
£ MH (£)
morphisms
F1
(pr
is such that
are given by
a(F) = pr £~1 (b) .
yield distinct homeomorphisms
a
the same time an invertible map topologize
^ (b)
MH(£'),
MH(£)
y
and thus make from
pr(cx,y) ,
Since distinct homeo
pr(a,y),
MH (5 1) /
y
we obtain at
which we use to
an
F 1-bundle.
Finally,
S'Ju is F '“trivial for each set U such that is F-trivial. Consequently, £' is locally F*-trivial, i.e., it is a Steenrod F 1-bundle.
We say that
denote it by
(i) with
and
We add four remarks to the above description of the The map
tl £
(MH(£) x F)/G
which takes each point
into the orbit consisting of the pairs
a(y) = x,
(a,y) £ MH(£) x F
is obviously a homeomorphism; together with
this map defines an F-equivalence asso(C,F)
£
asso(^,Ff).
2. construction: x G tl £
is the F 1-bundle associated with
£ ^ asso(£,F).
id bs £ ,
Therefore, the bundle
is canonically F-equivalent to (ii)
to topologize
The invertible map MH(asso (£,F 1)) ,
canonical actions of
G
on
MH(£)
MH (asso (^,F 1))
is a G-map with respect to the right
MH(£)
and
MH(asso(£, F 1)).
we may state that, given an arbitrary effective G-space of the above invertible G-map with -> MH (asso (^ ,F1) ) x F",
where
that we used
G
id F"
is a G-map
As a corollary, F",
the product
MH(£) x f"
acts from the right on
MH(£) x F"
_ -i
and
MH(asso(£,F')) x F"
by
g(a,y) = (ag,g 'y).
The resulting homeo-
morphism (MH(£) x F")/G -»• (MH (asso (£ ,F ') ) x F")/G, id bs £ ,
define an F"-equivalence
Therefore, the bundles
asso(£,F")
asso(asso(C,F'),F")
together with
asso (asso (£ ,F') ,F" ) . and
asso(£,F")
are
canonically F"-equivalent. (iii)
The bundle
associated with
asso(£,G),
i.e., the principal bundle
is canonically G-isomorphic to the G-bundle
(MH(£),pr,MH(£)/G)
defined by the canonical right action of
MH(5)
The canonical G-isomorphism
(see 2.11).
asso(£,G)
is given by the homeomorphism
which takes each (iv) then (MH(U
a
If
(MH(£) x f')/G * F')/G
6 MH(£) F'
(MH(£) x F")/G
inclusion of the bundle MH
(asso (5 ,F '))
(a,eG ).
(MH(£) * F")/G,
together with
asso(£,F')
into
is exactly the set of maps
a e M H (asso(?,F")).
(MH(C) x G)/G
is a subspace of the G-space is a subset of
on
(MH (£) ,pr ,MH (£) /G)
MH(£)
into the orbit of
G
id bs E,
asso(£,F").
F"
(see 2.3.6),
and the inclusion yield an Moreover,
ab a : F ’ -> a (F ' )
with
a
306
Behavior With Respect to Maps 3. that
£
f: £
Let
and
n
n
F
and
F*
again be effective G-spaces, and supp
are Steenrod bundles with standard fiber
is an arbitrary F-map.
F,
and
Define the map
asso(f,F '): asso(£,F ’) + a s s o ( n , F ’) by the formulas
bsasso(f,F')
= bs f
and
tl asso(f ,F' ) =
= [fact (MH (f) x id F 1) : (MH(£) x F ’)/G It is clear that asso(f,F')
asso(f,F’)
(MH(n) x F')/G].
is an F'-map.
Moreover,
is an F '-isomorphism (F'-equivalence) whenever
F-isomorphism (respectively, F-equivalence).
f
is an
Next, consider the
diagrams Ç --- > asso (Ç ,F)
asso (Ç ,F") ----> asso (asso (£ ,F 1) ,F fl
asso(f,F)
f
asso(ri,F),
n
asso(asso(f,F'),F")
asso(f,F") asso (rs,F" )
» asso(asso(r»,F’) ,F" ) ,
and (MH(Ç) ,pr,MH(Ç)/G) --- ► asso(Ç,G) (MH (f ) ,fact MH (f )
asso(f,G)
(MH(n) t pr,MH(n)/G) --- > asso(n fG) , where
FM
is any effective G-space, and the horizontal arrows denote
successively the canonical F-equivalences described in 2(i) and 2(ii), and the canonical F-isomorphisms from 2(iii)
These diagrams clearly
commute. 4.
The
asso
and induction operations commute.
Namely, the
map corr [asso (ad h ,F 1) ] : a s s o f h ^ F 1)
h !asso(Ç,F')
is an F 1-equivalence, for any Steenrod F-bundle map h: B ^ bs Ç ; see 2.9. Furthermore, the of the structure group.
asso
to a subgroup
G^ .
and any continuous
operation commutes with the extension
That is to say, let
effective G^-spaces obtained from
Ç
F
and
F'
If the Steenrod F ^-bundle
F^
and
F^j
be the
by reducing the group Ç
is taken into
£
G by
307
the extension of the group
to
G,
fact (in x id F 1) : ( M H ^ ) where
in = [in: MH(£^) -*■ MH(£)],
the bundle obtained from asso (E, ,F 1) .
then the map
x Fjj)/G1 + (MHU) x F ')/G , defines an F '-equivalence between
asso^^F^)
by extending
G1
to
G,
and
Weakly Associated Bundles 5.
The construction described in 1 can be generalized to the
situation where the action of
G
on
F1
is not effective: we need only
shift, as a preliminary step, to the effective factor of this action, and thus transform
F'
into an effective
is the noneffectiveness kernel. for any Steenrod F-bundle
G/K-space,
Therefore,
asso(£,F')
and any G-space
E,
F*
case, a Steenrod bundle with structure group F^ .
We
F^ ,
G/K
where
K
may be defined
and is, in the general and standard fiber
say that
asso(£,F')
is weakly associated
The map
asso(f,F')
defined in 3 remains viable under this
extension of the properties of
asso
asso
with
construction, and becomes an
discussed in
2 , 3 , and 4
obvious manner; for example, when
F"
F^-map.
must be modified in an
is not effective (but
effective), the canonical F"-equivalence
The
asso(£,Ff')
Ff
is
asso (asso (£ ,F 1),F")
becomes an F^-equivalence.
Sections Associated with F-Maps 6. G
Let
£
and standard fiber
and F,
be Steenrod bundles with structure group and let
f: bs £
bs E, 1
be continuous.
The construction below establishes a one-to-one correspondence between the F-maps
h: E, -> E, '
constructed bundle, Let the group
G
G x G
with
bs h
= f
and the sections of a specially
Fibr(£,E, 1;f) . denote the group
given by
G
endowed with the action of
( g ^ g ^ g = 9 ^ 9 9 21
this is not an effective action).
(generally speaking,
Set
Fibr (£,£'; f) = asso(diag'(£ x f'£'),GX), where
diag = [diag: bs C ^ bs £ x bs £ ],
weak sense of 5. bs h
= f
and
asso
It is clear that for every F-map
and every point
b € bs £ ,
is taken in the h
such that
the composite homeomorphism
308
pr £~1 (b)
ab t l ^
(prC’) 1 (f (b) )
(ab tL ad f)--
i -1 g-1 ► (pr f •£’) (6(F) ) -2--- . where = b,
a £ MH(£),
pr£(ct(F))
= b,
and
3 €
is simply one of the transformations
elements of
G.
MH(f!£'),p r f !£'(B(F)) F + F
We denote the corresponding
=
induced by the
element by
g(a,3), and
note that g i a g ^ S g ^ = g 1g(a,3)g2 for anV V y ?2 e G £ 1
Therefore, when
with £
and
yields a one-to-one and the sections
£'
= f
and
f = id bs £ ,
an
is simply an F-equivalence (see 2.8).
have the same base, the above construction
correspondence between
of the bundle
4. 1.
bs h
bs £ ' = bs £
the F-equivalences £ -> £ 1
Fibr(£,£';id bs £) .
Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles
An Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle is a W-F-bundle which is
locally W-F-trivial; the last means that every point of the base has a neighborhood such that the restriction of the bundle to this neighborhood is W-F-trivial. The theory of Ehresmann-Feldbau bundles is a variant of the theory of bundles with a group structure; it is simpler than the theory of Steenrod bundles (there are fewer structures), but also less pithy (there are no associated bundles).
This relative poverty nearly deprives
309
it of any independent value; however, the fact that it is equivalent, for a large class of standard fibers which includes the most important cases, to the theory of Steenrod bundles, makes it useful, as it enables us to simplify the latter.
The Case of Topologically Effective Actions 2.
A continuous effective action
G x X
X
topologically effective if given any topological space f: Y
G,
is said to be Y
and any map
the continuity of the composite map Y x X —f X ld > X x G -> X
implies the continuity of G-space
X
f.
(1 )
In this case we also say that the
is topologically effective. Clearly, if we reduce the group, a topologically effective
action remains so, and every G-space which has a topologically effective subspace is itself topologically effective. The free actions are immediate examples of topologically effective actions; in particular, the left canonical action of a topological group (on itself)
is always topologically effective. Also,
the usual actions of
and of its subgroups on
GL(n, 3R)
lRn
are
all
topologically effective. In order that a G-space be topologically effective, it is necessary that the map
c : G -> C(X,X),
the transformation induced by
g,
which takes each
g £ G
into
be a topological embedding; if
X
is
locally compact and Hausdorff, then this condition is also sufficient. - 1 The necessity is plain (take Y = c(G) and f = [ (abc) : c (G) G] ). Now assume that the condition
is satisfied.
Then the continuity of
f : Y -* G
is equivalent to the continuity of the composite map
Y— —►G
» C (X,X) .
By Theorem 1.2. 7. 6, for
X
locally compact and
Hausdorff the last map is continuous because so is the map (1). particular, for
G
In
compact, every effective, locally compact Hausdorff
G-space is topologically effective (see 1.1.7.10 and 1.2.7.2).
If
X
is Hausdorff, locally compact, and locally connected, then the usual action of the group same holds when 3.
X
Top X
on
X
is topologically effective, and the
is Hausdorff and compact (see 2.2.5 and 2.2.6).
If the standard fiber
F
is topologically effective,
then every W-F-map (respectively, W-F-isomorphism, W-F-equivalence) between Steenrod bundles is an F-map (respectively, F-isomorphism,
310
F-equivalence). In fact, let
£
and
be Steenrod F-bundles.
prove the continuity of the map
M H (f )
W-F-map
assume that
f: £ +
and we may
trivial bundles. and of
tl f
In this case,
is given by
bs£
tl
(b,y) ^
corresponding
g
(see 2.2), then
the map
(b,g)
becomes
(bs f (b) ,(b) g) .
the composition
bs Fy x F
denotes the action.
is some map
and bs £ 'x G -> MH ( ^' ) bs ^ xg
bs £ ' x g ,
tl f
implies the
pr^ o tlf : b s £ x p - ^ F ,
ft x
G x f --- ► F,
which equals
where the last arrow
Since this action is topologically effective,
is continuous, and so is 4.
-> MH(£)
The continuity of
continuity of the composition
where
At the same time,if we use the
canonical homeomorphisms bs £ x MH(f)
are standard tl £ 1 = bs £ 1 x F,
(bs f (b) ,(b)y ) ,
into the structure group G.
to the given
£ and
£ = bs £ x F,
We need only
(p
MH(f).
Given an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle with a topologically
effective standard fiber, there is a unique topology on the set of its marked homeomorphisms which transforms this bundle into a Steenrod bundle. The uniqueness of this topology is a consequence of Theorem 3. Let us prove its existence.
Let
topologically effective fiber that
is
ijy-
F.
£
be an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle with
Cover
bs £
by open sets
W-F-trivial, and fix W-F-equivalences
Now topologize the sets
MH (£|^)
MHihy): MH((U x F ,pr 1 ,U) ) + MH (£|^) . topological spaces
MH (£| q )/
U
such
h ^ : (U x F,pr^,U)+
with the aid of the maps
We obtain a cover of
MH(£)
by
and Theorem 3 shows that these spaces
induce the same topologies on their intersections, as required for the construction in 1.2.4.3. construction transforms
The topology on £
MH(£)
produced by this
into a Steenrod bundle.
Locally Trivial Bundles as Ehresmann-Feldbau Bundles 5.
If
F
is a locally compact Hausdorff space endowed with
the usual action of the group
Top F ,
then an Ehresmann-Feldbau
W-F-bundle is simply a locally trivial bundle with fibers homeomorphic to
F.
Therefore, any ordinary locally trivial bundle whose fibers are
locally compact Hausdorff spaces homeomorphic one to another, may be regarded as an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle, and as such it has an implicit group structure.
If* in addition, the fibers are locally connected or
compact, then such bundles can be also regarded as Steenrod bundles.
311
We remark that the last assertion is also true for all coverings in the broad sense with connected bases.
5. 1.
Exercises
Show that all the effective actions listed in 2.3.11,
2.3.12, 2.3.13, and 2.3.14. are topologically effective. 2. dimension.
Let
I* be an arbitrary C -manifold
X
Show that the usual action of
Diffrx
(r ^ 1) on
X
of positive is
topologically effective. 3. (n € 7L ,
Consider IR
t € IR) ,
as a 7L -space with the action
(n,t) ^ t + n
and using the same formula, extend this action to
an action of the additive group
]R,
equipped with the discrete topology.
Show that this extension of the structure group takes
asso ((ER,hel,S ) JR)
into a bundle which is not trivial as a Steenrod bundle, but is trivial as an Ehresmann-Feldbau bundle. 4.
Suppose that
an effective
G-space,and
simply connected base. ped with the
G £
Denote
(Cf. 4.3.) is a connected topological group,
£,
6
G ,
6
F ,
and £
6
the group
regarded as a W-F -bundle, respectively.
makes from
£
6
a Steenrod F -bundle.
§ 4.
G
equip-
F, regarded as a G -space,
there is no topology on the set of marked homeomorphisms of 6
is
is a nontrivial Steenrod F-bundle with
discrete topology, the space
and the bundle
F
Show that £
which
(Cf. 4.4.)
THE CLASSIFICATION OF STEENROD BUNDLES
1. 1.
Steenrod Bundles and Homotopies We now turn to the problem of classifying the Steenrod
bundles with a given standard fiber with respect to F-equivalence.
F
and a given cellular base
B
Our main achievement in this section
is to establish a canonical one-to-one correspondence between the classes of F-equivalent bundles over maps from
B
B
and the homotopy classes of
into a specially constructed space that depends only upon
the structure group.
This correspondence reduces the given classifi-
312
cation problem to a problem in ordinary homotopy theory.
Lemmas About F-Trivial Bundles 2. let
B1
= bs£ and
Let
and
B2
and
£ |„ IB2
£
be a Steenrod bundle with standard fiber
be closed subspaces of
B . n B\
is a retract of
2,
PROOF.
such that
£
B_ .
Choose a retraction
p:
^
fl
and
B^ U B2 =
If the restrictions “ " is also F-trivial.
'
are F-trivial, then
bs £ ,
F, £| |^
and two
F-trivializations, h 1 : n1 = (B1 x F fpr1/B1) + I |B and
1 h 2 :
and denote by
n 2
=
(B 2
f
where
$
tl f
F , p r 1 , B 2 )
-►
£ | B
»
the composite F-equivalence
, n2|BinB2 Obviously,
x
id
| ' ni |B flB2
is given by
is some map of
abh1
(abh2 )~1 ” ? |b nB2
(b,y) ^
B^ 0 B^
” n2|BinB2 *
(b, B^ x F ,
together with id B2 , obvious equality
x G -+ (B
g £ G] . ,
(b,y)
y £ F] , G.
More
MH(M0
2
n B2 ) x G,
given by
Therefore, the continuity of
which in turn yields the continuity (b,d) o p(b)y).
form an F-equivalence
But this last map,
f's n2 -> n2 *
and the
f * [abf' : n2 | shows that the composite F-maps "1
^
coincide on
C |b ,
0 B2 .
C
and
*2 —
"2 —
Let
5
Finnally, by 3.2.8, the last
Every Steenrod F-bundle with base
PROOF.
i|B2 —
By 3.2.7, from this it follows that these two
maps yield an F-map (B x F ,pr 1 /B) ->• £. map is an F-equivalence. 3.
n
),
l B 1n B 2
In
is F-trivial.
be an arbitrary Steenrod F-bundle with
313
bs n
= In .
Find a positive integer
any cube of edge into
Nn
1/N
contained in
such that
ln .
n
is F-trivial over
Now divide
In ,
as usual,
such cubes, arrange them in dictionary order Q ,...,Q , ± Nn Q j • Induction shows that n is F-trivial over each
and set
of the sets
W^,...,W n :
^ =
B i = w -i'
l^i+l
over
N
'
1
1
to go from
to
and
B 0 = Q..1 .
and
£
z
'
aPPly Lemma 2 to
We conclude that
i+I
n
is F-trivial
W = In . Nn 4-
fiber and
Let
F and common base E, ^
B,
be Steenrod bundles with common standard and let
A
be a retract of
are F-trivial, then for every F-equivalence
there is an F-equivalence = h.
h ’: ^
£2
such that
B.
If
h:
£
^ ^2 |A
[abh1 : ^ |a ^ ^2 |a ^ =
It is enough to prove this assertion for the case where is the standard trivial F-bundle p: B
A be a retraction.
(a,y)
^
(a,cf>(a)y)
[a E
the structure group
Obviously,
A,
G.
(B x F,pr^,B), tl h
y £ F] , where
and
£
= £-j• Let
is given by
is some
map of A
into
Moreover, via the canonical homeomorphism
A x G + MH(£^|a ) [= MH (? 2|a )1 'becomes the map A x G A x (a,g) h- (a,({)(a)g) [a € A, g £ G] . Therefore, the continuity of implies the continuity of the map B x F
(p ,
B x F,
(b,y)
yield an F-equivalence
h ’: £
G, MH (h)
which in turn implies the continuity of b-
(b,cj) ° p(b)y).
The latter and
which extends
id B
h.
The Homotopy Invariance of the Induced Bundle 5. let If
f f^
1
and and
Let fn z
f^
£
be a Steenrod bundle with standard fiber F,
becontinuous
a cellular subspace of
X,
which is the identity on
f2 ,
and set
^
Pick
x(I,id 1,1)
respectively.
£
f ’£
bs £ .
,
and are t
is
f ’^j^.
an A-homotopy, H: X x I
=(f!C)
transforms
bundles
into
f1 and f^are A-homotopic, where A I z , then there is an F-equivalence f ’£ -*
?l|(xxO)U(Axl) = ?2 |(XXO)U(AXI) X -»■ X x 1
,
are homotopic, then the
F-equivalent. Moreover, if
PROOF.
maps of a cellular space X
and
, ^2 = H !?.
bs £ , It is
from
f^
to
clearthat
and that the canonical homeomorphism i 1 1 and ?2 Xx1 into and ,
Therefore, it suffices to
find an F-equivalence £ ^ -* £2
314
which is the identity over
(X x 0)
(A x I).
U
We produce such an F-equivalence by taking the limit of a sequence of F-equivalences, where
(X x 0)
C± -
hu: C-||c ^ ^ 2 IC ' where ’ i i (A x I) u (skeiX x I), such that each map
U
extends the preceding one.
Take
h_^
hi
to be the identity map, and
assume that the F-equivalence h^ is already constructed. To get hj_+ 1 , suppose that X is rigged, and for each cell e € cell^^X \ cell^ + ^A consider the bundles [ab(chae x idl)]l(?1|c ) = [(chae x i d I ) T * i
(Dl+1xO)U(S1xi;
and [ab (cha e
x id I )]'(£., I ) = [(cha x id I ) 'g ] I . ^'Ci e | (D1
, , x 0)U (S xi)
where ab(cha Let
e
x id I)
=[ab(cha
e
x
id I ) : (D1+ ^
x 0) U (S1
x I) ->• c .]. 1
g
denote the F-equivalence of these bundles defined by h.. By e , , i Lemma 3, (chae x i d l ) ’?>| and (chae x i d l ) * ^ are F-trivial, and since(Di+^ x 0) U (S1 x I) that
g^
is a retract of
Lemma 4 shows
extends to an F-equivalence ^
g^: (chae x id I)
i
Further, note that of the partition (with
D^"+ ^ x i /
i
-* (chae x id I) ‘ ^2 • the map
tl g^"
zer (tl ad (cha^ x id I))
B = Di+^ x I
and
is constant on the elements and apply Theorem 3.2.6
p = [abicha^ xid I) : D"*"+ ^ x I
cl e
x I] )
to conclude that the composite map , (chae x M D - q
defines an F-map
g~ , ab ad (cha x id I) ----► (chae x idl)'^--------- ®
?-,|cle
xi
^jcie
x I* By Theorem 3.2.8,
is an F-equivalence, which we denote by h. e i , e 2 £ cell^ +^X v cell^+^A,
cells (Cl e.
xI) n (Cl e„
1
tlh C Cle
Now note that for
tl hg
and
tl hg
and that for each cell
x I,
tlh._L
any
e € cell. „X ^ cell. „A, 1+1
agree over
(Cle
e £ celli+1X \ cell^ + 1A,
WB use 3 *2 *^ to conclude that
form together an F-map
this
agree over
Z
and
Ci+1 '
x i),
y x
U l|Li+1
x i) n C..
C.
and
constitute a fundamental cover of h^
and
-*• L | . ^ ,Ci+1
and note that it obviously extends
Since the sets
1+1
hg ,
e £ ce l l ^ X \cell.+1A,
We take this map for
h ^ ; moreover, by 3.2.7,
h. „ 1+1
h~ 1-| is
315
also an F-map. To check the rest, i.e., that the sequence converges to an F~equivalence the sets
{h^ : ^ U ^ ^Ic ^ Ii 'i it is enough to remark that
£
constitute a fundamental cover of
Theorem 3.2.7 to the sequences
{h^}
The Sets 6. We let
Stee(B,F)
of Steenrod F-bundles over
and
X x I,
and then apply
{ h ^ }.
Stee(B,F)
denote the set of F-equivalence
B.
classes
Below we shall study the mappings of
this set into itself, defined by the induced bundle construction, by the extension of the structure group, and by the associated bundle construction. For any continuous map
f: B 1
B,
the rule
Ç
f
i
defines
a mapping f ’: Stee(B,F) +Stee(B',F). If
B'is a cellular space, Theorem 5 shows
the homotopy class of cellular
andf
f.
In particular, if
i f"depends only on
that B
is a homotopy equivalence, then
and B' are both i f ‘ is invertible.
The extension of the structure group, which transforms -space
F into the effective G-space ext: Stee(B,F^)
for any
F,
the
defines a mapping
Stee(B,F),
topological space B.
This mapping is natural: that is to say,
the diagram pvf Stee(B,F 1) ----- > Stee(B ,F ) i i f* f‘ Stee(B’,F1) -xt— > stee(B',F) commutes for any continuous map
f: B'
B; see 3.2.4.
Given another effective G-space, defines for any topological space asso: Stee (B,F)
B
F',
the rule
Ç
h-
asso(Ç,F')
a mapping
Stee(B,F').
This mapping is invertible [its inverse is Stee (B,F) ] and also natural, i.e., the diagram
asso: Stee(B,F')
316
asso Stee (B ,F) ------ > Stee(B,F' f* Stee (B 1,F)
aSS° > SteefB'j')
commutes for any continuous map
f: B' + B; see 3.3.4.
Moreover, the diagram Stee(B,F1)
aSS° » Stee(B,F.|) f•
Stee(B,F) — aSS° » Stee(B,F') commutes for any topological space F,j , F^j
and any effective G-spaces,
F
any effective
and
F f,
-spaces
obtained from
F^
F^
and
and
by extension of the structure group; see 3.3.4 and 3.3.5.
2. 1. f: B -> bs £ ,
mapping
Universal Bundles
Let
any Steenrod F-bundle map
B,
TT(B,bs£)
£,
F
be an effective G-space.
any cellular space
B, and any continuous i f*?. This defines a
we may consider the bundle -*■ Stee(B,F),
which we denote by
induz(B,£)(the homotopy class of
By Theorem 1.5, give
induz(B,£):
f) = the F-equivalence class of
The following diagram is obviously commutative for any topological space
C
and any continuous map ir(B,C) — induz (B,g *£)
7i(idB,g)
g: C
, stee(B>p)
n.
induz(B,£) 7T(B ,bs O
Similarly, the diagram TMB. bsU
bs £
induz ( Bfa s s o < S , F ‘ ))
induz(B,£)
,
asso Stee(B,F)
commutes for any effective G-space
F 1.
i f ’5
317
2. induz(B,£)
A Steenrod F-bundle
£
is called universal if the map
is invertible for any cellular space
Steenrod F-bundle
£ is universal if:
(i)
B.
In other words, a
givenany Steenrod
F-bundle
5
with cellular base, there is a continuous map f : b s £ -* b s £ such i that the bundle f*£ is F-equivalent to £, and (ii) if for two arbitrary continuous
maps,
,
the bundles homotopic.
f ’£
,
and
Condition
(i) has an equivalent formulation
Steenrod F-bundle Indeed,
if
f^£
f and f , of a cellularspace into bs£ I are F-equivalent, then f^ and f^ are
£
(i1):
given any
with cellular base, there is an F-map
f :bs £
bs £
is continuous and
F-equivalence, then ad f o
g: £
£
h: ^ £ is an F-map, then (see 3.2.9).
corr h : 5
g: 5 +
is an F-map,
f *K
is an
Conversely, if
(bsh)’£
is an F-equivalence
Similarly, condition (ii) is equivalent to (ii1): Steenrod F-bundle
£
5 £•
with cellular base and any F-maps
given any
hQ ,h^: £
£,
bs hQ and bsh i are homotopic. Indeed, suppose that hn u j , u ,h 1 have these properties; then both bundles, (bshg) £ and (bsh^)#£ , are F-equivalent to
£,
and so, by (ii),
Conversely, if into
fn and u , and h: f ^
bs £
f^ = bs(adf^ o h)
bs hQ
and
bs h^
f1 are continuous maps of a cellular space i , f ’£ is an F-equivalence, then fQ = bs ad fQ ,
and, by (ii'),
fQ
and
We remark also that both (i 1)
f
are homotopic.
and (ii1)
(and hence (i) and
(ii)) are consequences of the following condition: F-bundle
£
every F-map
given an arbitrary
with cellular base and an arbitrary subspace 5 |A * £
extends to an F-map
£ -* £.
condition implies (i1), it suffices to take implies(ii'), take A =
are homotopic.
the F-bundle
(bsKx o) U (bs K x 1)
of
of
bs £ ,
To see that this
A = 0.
£ x(I,id 1,1) ,
A
To see that it
thesubspace
bs(5 x (I,id 1,1) )=
bs 5 x
I,
and
take as the F-map that must be extended g:
£
x
(l,idl,l)
|( b s £
x
o)
U
(b s £
x 1)
^
^ '
with bs g (b,0) = bs hQ (b) ,
bsg(b,1)
tl g (x ,0) = t l h Q (x) ,
tl g (x,1)
3.
= b s h Mi G
Sr =
1 ,... ,k)
Mi G . b s £ = Dr+1, A = Sr ,
(Dr+1 x G ,pr^,Dr+1).
has an explicit description:
smallest number s such that denote the composite map
(i
every G-map
forsome
is G-trivial (see 1.3), and we may actually assume that
is the standard trivial G-bundle extension
A TG (k) —iS— > con G x . . x con G " "k ^ r +1 further, define ip : D x G ->• TG(k+1) by
. i
i— ► con G
'Mty,g ) = (tcj)n (y) , ... ,t$k (y) ,pr(g, 1-t) ) , where y £ Sr , t £ I, and pr = [pr: G * I tl h = [in: TG(k+1) -> TG] ° ij).
C
-+ con G] . Now set
321
The general case reduces to this special one. that the space
bs £
Indeed, assume
is rigged and that a G-map
extending
f
each cell
e e c e l l ^ b s £ \ cellr
h : £I , , + M i G it AllsKe Ds c, r The above argument shows that for
is already available.
,r f = h o [ab cha : S e r e
A a
the G-map U ske bs Ç ] : cha *Ç r e
^ MiG sr
extends to a G-map
g : cha1^ ^ M i G , and it is clear that tig is “ e e constant on the elements of the partition zer (tl ad cha^) . Applying
Theorem 3.2.6 (with that
g^
B = Dr+^
defines a G-map
and
K |C1 e
Further, note that for any cells tl h
and
tl h
1
p = [ab cha^ : Dr + ^
agree over
Mi G ,
Cl e] ) ,
which we denote by
we see
hQ .
e„,e0 E cell ,bs r \ cell „A, 1 2 r+1 r+1 Cl e fl Cl e0 , and that for any cell
2
e E cell^^bs £ \ cell^^A, Cl e fl (A U ske bs£) . r ^ cellr+1A ' extending
such that
A U skegbs £
tl h^
This implies that ^
(see 3.2.7).
{h,.: 5|A U s k h
and
h
r
agree over and e
h ,
eE cell ,bs K r+1 s
Y ield together a G-map
hr
a sequence
tl h^
s
extends
hr+ : ? L Uske bs £ + Mi G 1 r+1 Therefore, using induction, we can produce
bsC
+ M i G }“=_1
of G-maps with
h_1 = f,
h
. for all s > 0. Since the sets s— 1 constitute a fundamental cover of bs £ , using again
3.2.7 we conclude that the
hg 's
yield a G-map
^ + Mi G
extending
f.
A Promise 5.
The base of the bundle
However,we shall G
there
see in the next chapter that for any topological group
will imply the existence of k-universal G-bundles with
cellular base of dimension and any positive integer
4. 1. G
G^
is not a cellular space.
are also universal G-bundles with cellular base; see 5.6.1.4.
By 2.7, this
group
MiG
£ k,
for any given topological group
G
k.
Reductions of the Structure Group We say that the Steenrod F ^-bundle
is obtained from the Steenrod F-bundle
by reducing the group
G
to
G^
if
K
Ç
^
with structure
with structure group
is obtained from
Ç^
by
322
extending the group to G. While the extension of the structure group of a Steenrod bundle is a well-defined operation, the reduction of the structure group cannot be carried out for every Steenrod bundle, and even when it is possible, it may produce bundles which are not equivalent with respect to the reduced group.
In other words, the mapping
ext: Stee(B,F ) ->Stee(B,F)
(2)
defined in 1.6 may be both nonsurjective and noninjective. We remark that the set-theoretic properties of the mapping (2) are uniquely determined by the triple preserved when we replace
F
and
F^
B, G, G^,
i.e., they are
by other effective G-spaces and
their corresponding G^-spaces, while keeping
B, G,
and
G^
the same;
this is plain from diagram (1). 2.
Recall that given a cellular space
B,
Stee(B,F)
can be
interpreted as the set of homotopy classes of continuous maps from into a classifying space of the structure group.
Below we
B
describe (2)
in the same homotopy terms. Let
G, G^, F, F^
be as in 1, and let
universal bundles with standard fibers if;: bs ^
-+ bs £
F
is called classifying if
bundle obtained from
^
and i
\p*Z
£
and
^
F 1 . A continuous map 1 is F-equivalent to the
by extending the structure group
By the definition of a universal bundle, such amap exists bs^ and
is a cellular space, and so it certainly exists when C-| = Mi G^
(see 3.1).
be
G^
to
G.
whenever £ = Mi G
Our main claim is that the diagram
Stee(B,F1) — ext -> Stee(B,F) induz(B,£ ^)
induz(B,i)
* ( B , b s Cl >
(3)
------ . , ( B , b s t ]
commutes for any classifying map
ip and any cellular space
B.
PROOF. The composition induz(B,C) ° Tr(idB,c) takes the homotopy class of f : B -* bs i into the class of the bundle i 1 1 0 f-,)*?' while the same homotopy class is taken by ext ° induz (B,? ) into the class of the bundle obtained from structure group
G.)
to
G.
bY extending the
Since the extension of the structure group
and the induction construction commute (see 1.6), the last class ii l i t contains f ’(i|j'£), and it remains to observe that f * (if;*^) = (^ o f )*£. 3.
The commutativity of the diagram (3) and the invertibility
323
of its vertical mappings imply that
induz(B,ç^)
ping from the set of homotopy classes of maps o g
is homotopic to a given map
classes of
g : B -> bs z,
bs ç ,
such that
onto the set of
-equivalent F^-bundles which are obtained from
reducing the structure group F-bundle
f: B
is an injective map
Ç
G
to
G^ .
f 1ç
by
In particular, a Steenrod
with cellular base admits the reduction of the group
G
to Gn if and only if any continuous map f : bs Ç bs ç such that i 1 f"ç is F-equivalent to £ is homotopic to the composition of some continuous map
bs Ç -> bs
with
5. 1. denote by
\Jj.
Exercises
Given a topological group
Mi(G,k)
i.e., the bundle
G
and a positive integer
the restriction of the bundle (TG(k),pr,TG(k)/G).
Show that
MiG
to
Mi(G,k)
k,
TG(k)/G, is a
(k-1)-universal G-bundle.
MiiZ^fk) 1 Mi(S ,k)
£ «>.
oo 00 (S ,pr,3RP ), while k-1 k-1 (see Exercise 1) is isomorphic to (S ,pr, ]RP ). 1 OO 00 3. Show that Mi S is isomorphicto (S ,pr,(CP ), while 2k-1 k —1 is isomorphic to (S ,pr,(CP ).
2.
Show that Mi 2Z9
4.
Let
X
is isomorphic to
-£
be a compact n-dimensional C -manifold,
Consider the right action
(j / ft) ^ j ° ft [j £ Embr (X, 3Rq ) , action of Diff X on
ofDiffrx
on
Embr (X, IR^) ,
G Diffrx] , and the limit
1 £ r £ given by right
lim (Embr (X , 3Rq ) ,ab Cr (id X ,in) : Embr (X,TOq ) -> Embr (X, lRq+1)) . Show that universal
(lim Embr (X,lRq ) ,pr, [lim Embr (X,Kq )]/DiffrX)
Diffrx-bundle, while
is a
(Embr (X, ]Rq ),pr,Embr (X, lRq )/DiffrX)
is a ( q - 2 n - 1 )-universal DiffrX-bundle, for any
q 5 2n+1.
324
§5.
1. 1.
VECTOR BUNDLES
General Definitions
The main objective of this section is to study those
Steenrod bundles whose standard fiber is either action of one of the groups or
(Cn
GL(n, ]R) ,
with the usual action of
IRn
GL+ (n, IR) ,
GL(n,(C)
or
with the usual 0(n) ,
or
SO(n) ,
U (n) .
Since all the standard fibers listed above are topologically effective, the corresponding bundles may be also regarded as Ehresmann-Feldbau bundles with the same standard fibers (see Subsection 3.4). We shall proceed in this way and ignore completely the topology on the set of marked homeomorphisms in the course of the entire section. To simplify the discussion, we introduce a special notation for the above standard fibers:
GL IRn ,
Standard Fiber 2.
GL_IRn , OIRn ,
SOIRn ,
and
GL(C ,
GLIRn
A Steenrod bundle with standard fiber
GLIRn
is called
an n-dimensional real vector bundle. Since a space with a GLnRn -structure is simply an n-dimensio nal real vector space (see 3.1.3), a W-GL3Rn -bundle is simply a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional real vector spaces.
Moreover, a
W-GLnRn -equivalence of W-GL]Rn -bundles is an equivalence that is linear on fibers.
Therefore, an n-dimensional real vector bundle is a bundle
whose fibers are n-dimensional real vector spaces, and which is locally trivial in the natural vector sense: every point of the base has a neighborhood (U x]Rn fpr>j,U) 3.
U
over which the given bundle is equivalent to via an equivalence which is linear on each fiber.
A bundle
£
whose fibers are n-dimensional real vector
spaces is an n-dimensional real vector bundle (i.e.,
£
is locally
trivial in the previous vector sense) if and only if: (i) (ii)
K
the partial vector operations in
]R x tl £ and
is topologically locally trivial;
tl K ,
(X ,x ) b Xx,
tl£ ,
i.e., the maps
325
{(x1,x2) € tl £ x tl £ | pr £ (x1) = pr £ (x2)} -> tl £,
(Xl ,x2) ►> x
+ x2
are continuous. The necessity of these their sufficiency.
Let
of the vector space £ [u
b^ £ b s £ .
pr £-1 (bQ ) ,
Fix an arbitrary basis, a neighborhood
Define a map,
the formula
of the set _
(U x nRn ,pr^ ,U)
-> £,
h:
3Rn ] .
such that
(U x 3Rn ,pr ,U) +
linear on fibers, by where
Now pick disjoint neighborhoods,
pr^ ° tl h ^ ° tlh' (b^ x Sn ^ )
K
and N,
and of the point
1
P r 2 ° tl h
° t l h 1 (b ,0)
neighborhood of tl h (b x K)
tlh'(b,0)
h':
v^,...,v ,
of bQ
tl h 1 (b, ort. ) = tlh(b,pr9 ° tl h-1 (v .) ), -L ^ 1
P r 2 = ^Pr2 : U x lRn
bQ and
in
]R ,
respectively,
consisting of all tlh'(b,0)
£ tlh'(b x sn
b e U
e tl h (b x N) .
when
ab h ' : (V xnRn fpr^,V)
b E V,
and denote by
such that
V
the
tlh'(b x Sn~ 1)
It is clear that
and thus the map
is nondegenerate on each fiber.
Consequently, we can apply Theorem 3.2.8 to TRn ,
U
is topologically trivial, and a trivialization
?|u"
c
conditions is obvious. Let us verify
regarded as a Top 3Rn-space
abh' ,
((V x lRn ,pr^ ,V)
of as Steenrod F-bundles; see 3.4.5).
taking
and
We conclude that
equivalence in the topological sense, and since
abh'
£ |v
F
to be
are thought
ab h '
is an
is also linear
on fibers, the proof is complete.
Standard Fiber 4.
0]Rn
A Steenrod bundle with standard fiber
01Rn
is called
an n-dimensional Euclidean bundle. Since a space with an
0!IRn -structure is an n-dimensional
Euclidean space, a W-OIRn -bundle is simply a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional Euclidean spaces.
Moreover, it is clear that any
W-OIRn -equivalence of W-onRn -bundles is an equivalence which is an orthogonal map on each fiber.
Therefore, an n-dimensional Euclidean
bundle is a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional Euclidean spaces and which is locally trivial in the natural Euclidean sense: every point of the base has a neighborhood (U x ]Rn ,pr >j,U ) fiber.
U
over which the bundle is equivalent to
via an equivalence which is an orthogonal map on each
326
5.
A bundle
£
whose fibers are n-dimensional Euclidean
spaces is an n-dimensional Euclidean bundle (i.e.,
£
is locally
trivial in the Euclidean sense) if and only if it satisfies (i),(ii) of 3 and the following condition: (iii) the function
tl £ -> HR, which takes each vector into
its length, is continuous. These conditions are obviously necessary. that they are also sufficient. every point of
bs £
By Theorem 3, (i) and (ii) imply that
has a neighborhood
zation linear on fibers,
U
pr £ ^ (b) ,
standard orthogonalization of the basis Now (iii) shows that the vectors b,
together with a triviali-
h: (U x]Rn ,pr^,U) -+
be the basis of the vector space
on
Let us verify
Let b £ U,
v^ (b),..., v^ (b)
resulting from the
tlh(b,ort^) , .. .,tl h(b,ort^) .
v^ (b),...,v^(b)
depend continuously
and it is clear that the map linear on fibers,
h' : (U
x Ш П ,рг1 ,U)
£ |и /
given by tl h* (Ь,ог^) = v ^ b )
(i = 1,...,n),
is a trivialization, orthogonal on each fiber, of the bundle 6. bundle
£
Since
0(n) с GL(n,]Rn ),
every n-dimensional Euclidean
determines a unique n-dimensional real vector bundle
through extension of the structure group. as enriching the bundle
£*
£ ',
One may use Theorem 5 to
interpret the reduction of the structure group transforming £
£|u“
£'
into
with an additional structure: namely, a
Euclidean metric on each fiber, such that the corresponding length function
tl 5 *
Ж
is continuous.
termed a Euclidean metric on
£ *.
Standard Fibers 7. (respectively,
This additional structure is
GL+lRn
A Steenrod bundle with БОЖП )
is called an
and
БОЖП
standard fiber
GL ЖП
n-dimensional oriented vector
bundle (respectively, an n-dimensional oriented Euclidean bundle). Since a space with GL+nRn -structure (S01Rn -structure) is simply an n-dimensional oriented vector space (respectively, an n-dimensional oriented Euclidean space), a W-GL+3Rn -bundle (a W-SOHRn -bundle) is simply a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional oriented vector (respectively, Euclidean) spaces.
It is also plain
that a W-GL+]Rn -equivalence of W-GL+lRn -bundles (a W-SonRn -equivalence of W-SO]Rn -bundles) is simply an equivalence which is orientation preserving and linear (respectively, orthogonal) on fibers.
327
Consequently, an n-dimensional oriented vector bundle (Euclidean bundle) is a bundle whose fibers are n-dimensional oriented vector spaces (respectively, Euclidean spaces), and which is locally trivial in the following sense: every point of the base has a neighborhood over which the bundle has a trivialization that is orientation preserving and linear (respectively, orthogonal) on fibers. 8.
To obtain a version of Theorem 3 which is suitable for the
oriented case, note that the orientation existing on each fiber of an n-dimensional oriented vector bundle n-frames of the given fiber into
£
S^.
maps the set of nondegenerate Furthermore, the set of all
nondegenerate n-frames of the fibers of associated bundle
asso(£,V 1(n,n))
£
is the total space of the
[where
GL+ (n,3R)
acts on
V'(n,n)
as usual; see 2.3.1.3], and the orientations of the fibers combine to define a map Theorem
tl asso (£ ,V 1 (n, n) )
3asserts that a bundle
S^. £
The "oriented” version of
whose fibers
are n-dimensional
oriented real vector spaces is an n-dimensional oriented vector bundle if and only it satisfies conditions (i) and (ii) of 3 and the condition (iv): the function of the fibers of
tl asso (£ ,V 1 (n,n )) £,
,
defined by the orientations
is continuous.
Theorem 5 must be modified in a similar fashion. given an n-dimensional oriented each fiber of into
S .
£
Euclidean bundle
the orientation of
maps the set of orthonormal n-frames of the given fiber
Since the set of all orthonormal n-frames of all fibers of
equals the total space of the associated bundle obtain a function Theorem
£,
Namely,
tl asso (£,V (n,n)) -> S° .
5asserts that a bundle
£
asso(£,V(n,n)),
£
we
The "oriented” version of
whose fibers
are n-dimensional
oriented Euclidean spaces is an n-dimensional oriented Euclidean bundle if and only if it satisfies conditions (i),(ii) of 3, condition (iii) of 5, and condition (v) : the function by the orientations of the fibers of 9.
Since
real vector bundle bundle
£',
tl asso (£ ,V (n,n) ) £,
defined
is continuous.
GL+ (n,nR) ,n)
G (°°,n+q) ,
(see 2) are cellular. the image
of the second - ske G+ (cc,n+q),
(EG (m,n)
(CG(»,n) -»■ GG(«>,n+q)
The image of the first contains
ske2n+1tEG (oo'n +c2) • The inclusions and
G+ (°°,n) -> G+ (°°,n+q),
and the image of the third -
G(m,n) => skem_nG (°°,n) ,
ske2m-2n+110
skenG (°°,n+q) ,
G+ (m,n) = skem _nG+ (°°,n),
are ec3ually evident.
340
The Grassman Bundles 6. and
Let
(ET(m,n),
n < 00.
We let
T(m,n),
T + (m,n),
denote those subsets of the respective products
G (m,n) x ® m , (y,x)
0 ■ GraGL(n,JR), let g^ be the composite map
The desired
can be described explicitly:
Sr x 3Rn ~ tl ^ > tl Gra GL (n ,JR) — —
> G (°°,n) x JR°° --- -— ► hr00
341
f 1 : Dr+1 x ]Rn
and define
where
»■ ir°°
by
f 1 (ty, (x1 , . . . ,x ) ) =
= tg (y, (x ,...,x )) + (1-t2)1/2(0,...,0,x.,...,x ,0,...), 1 1 n V T— v I n m y E S , t E I, and m is the smallest number s such that
]RS => g 1 (Sr x s n 1 ) ;
finally, set
tl f (y,x)
=
(f^ty x ]Rn ) ,f/)(y,x) ) .
The general case reduces to this special situation. that the cellular space
bs £
Assume
is rigged and that we already have a
GL]Rn -map
f : ^|AlJske bs £ G r a G L (n,:iR) which extends g. The above 5 I r argument shows that for every cell e E cell „bs £ \ cell „A the n r+1 s r+1 GLIR -map g = f oad[abcha : S ^e r e n extends to a GLIR -map
r
* -*• A U ske bs g] : cha *f r e
* h ^ : °ha^£ -+ Gra GL(n,]R) ,
Gra GL (n, TR) S
and it is clear that
tlh
is constant on the elements of the partition zerftlad cha ). ^ r+1 r+1 e Applying Theorem 3.2.6 (with B = D and p = [ab cha^ : D + Cle] ), we conclude that we denote by
h
f^.
e
defines a GL!IRn -map ^
|Cle
-*■ Gra GL (n,3R) ,
Now note that for any two cells,
which
e^,e^ E cell^ + ^bs
\ cell
.A, tl f and tl f agree over Cle. fl Cl e0 , and that r +1 e^ e -2 1 2 for any cell e E cell .bs £ \ cell .A, tl f and tl f agree over i r+1 r+1 e r
Cl e fl (A U ske^bs £) . f
and
f^,
From this compatibility it follows that the maps
e E cell^^bs £
\ cell^^A,
combine todefine a GL3Rn-map
f • f| . . , >. -> Gra GL (n,IR) which extends f ; see 3.2.7. r+1 AUske ,bs £ ' r I r+1 Therefore, using induction, we can produce a sequence of GL]Rn -maps, ifs : 5 U s k e b s C - O r a G L I n , s u c h I s extends f ,s ^ 0. Finally, the maps s— 1 £
Gra GL (n,IR) 8.
Gra(m,O(n)),
extending
The bundles and
Gra (m,GL(n,(C) )
and
that f s
£.,=9
and fs n define a GL3R - map
g. Gra (m, GL (n,IR) ) ,
Gra(m,SO(n)) Gra(m,U(n) )
Gra (m, GL+ (n,IR) ) ,
are (m-n)-universal.
The bundles
are (2m-2n+1)-universal.
This is a corollary of 7 (see 5 and 4.2.7).
342
Associated Principal Bundles 9.
When
m < °°,
the total spaces of the principal bundles
associated with the Grassman bundles Gra (m, GL (n ,1R) ) ,
Gra (m,GL+ (n ,IR) ) ,
Gra (m, GL (n,(C) ) ,
and Gra(m,0(n)), are obviously (CV(m,n).
V' (m,n) ,
Gra(m,SO(n)), V 1(m,n) ,
Gra(m,U(n)),
(CV* (m,n) ,
and
V(m,n) ,
V(m,n) ,
The corresponding projections are the maps described in
3.2. 2.3 and 3.2.2.7: V* (m,n)
G (m,n ) ,
V' (m,n) -> G+ (m,n),
CCVf(m,n)
(CG(m/n)
(2)
and V(m,n) + G (m,n) ,
V(m,n) + G+ (m,n),
The same is true for and
CDV (00,n )
are understood as
lim (V (m,n) ,in), with
m = 00
(CV1 (°°,n) ,
m = m,
and
if
(CV(m,n)
V 1 (°°,n) ,
lim (V1(m, n ) ,in) ,
lim (CCV (m, n ) ,in) ,
(CG(m,n). (CV1 (°°,n) ,
and
CCV(°°,n)
and the projections
(2),(3)
m < 00.
V't“ ^ ) ,
are called Stiefel spaces. m < 00
It is clear that for
V(°°,n),
lim ((CV* (m,n ) ,in) ,
as the limits of the projections (21,(3),
V(«>,n),
(3)
the canonical right actions of
the structure groups on the above total spaces (see 3.2.10) are exactly the right actions described in 2.3.12 and 2.3.13, while for
m = °o
they are the limits of the latter.
The Bundles asso (Gra 0(1) ,0(1) ) 10.
and
as so (Gra U (1 ) ,U (1 ))
The principal bundle associated with
Gra 0(1)
is
0(1)-isomorphic to Mi0(1) . The principal bundle associated with Gra U(1) is U (1 )-isomorphic to Mi U (1 ) . PROOF. tl Mi 0(1 )
It suffices to find an 0(1)-homeomorphism
tl asso (Gra 0 (1 ), 0 (1 )) , OO
tl asso (Gra 0(1),0(1)) = V (°°,1) [= S ] viewing
tlMiU(1)
and
when we regard
tl Mi 0(1 )
as right 0(1) -spaces ;
and
similarly ,
tl asso (Gra U (1 ), U (1 ) ) = (CV (00,1 ) [= S°°]
as
right U (1)-spaces, we need only exhibit a U (1)-homeomorphism tl Mi U (1 ) + tl asso (Gra U (1 ) ,U (1 )) ; see 3.1.9 and 3.2.10. such a homeomorphism is given by the formula (pr (g± 't±) }”_ 1 -
.
In both cases
343
The meaning of the left-hand side was explained in right-hand side the elements
g.
of
0(1)
or
numbers (the following inclusions are used: 0(1) = S° c ]R, and U (1) = S1 c (C) .
4.
4.3.2, while in the
U(1)
V^l)
are thought of as cnR°°,
(CV(°°,1) c (E°°,
The Most Important
Reductions of the Structure Group 1.
The use of Grassman bundles enables us to apply the scheme
presented in Subsection 4.4 to the problems raised in Subsection 1 concerning reductions of the structure group.
This is the subject of
the present subsection. Recall that the reductions corresponding to the inclusions 0 (n) c= GL (n,3R) ,
SO (n) c GL+ (n,HR) ,
U(n) c GL(n, ske
n-s
G(°o,n),
G (°°,n-s) z> ske G (°°,n) + n-s +
and (EG (°°,n-s) => ske2n_2s+-,(I:G (°°,n) . From the first inclusion it follows that the pair (G(°°,n) ,G(°°, n-s))
is (n-s)-connected (see 2.3.2.2),
implies (by Theorems 2.3.2.4 and 2.3.2.5) that the map tt
(
id,in) :
7T
(B,G (°°,n—s ))
tt
(B,G (°°,n) )
which in turn
345
is invertible for any cellular space
B
surjective for any cellular space
with
B
with
dimB
dimB
$ n-s,
= n-s.
and
Consequently,
ext: Stee (B,GLlRn-S) -+ Stee (B,GL]Rn ) and ext: Stee (B,03Rn-s)
Stee (B,0]Rn )
are invertible for any cellular
B
for any cellular
= n-s.
inclusion
B
with
dimB
with
G+ (~,n-s) => sken_sG+ (°°,n)
dimB
$ n-s,
and surjective
In exactly the same manner the
leads to the invertibility
(surjectivity) of the mappings ext: Stee (B ,GL+3Rn_S) -* Stee (B,GL+]Rn ) and ext: Stee (B, S01Rn-S) -» Stee (B,SOUR11) for any cellular
B
with
dim B £ n-s
(respectively,
while the inclusion
(CG(o:',n-s) => ske„ __ (CGi^n) ^n ^ S 1 invertibility (surjectivity) of the mappings
dimB
= n-s),
implies the
ext: Stee (B,GL(Cn-S) -* Stee (B,GL(Cn ) and ext: Stee (B,U(Cn-S) -+ Stee (B,U(Cn ) for any cellular = 2n-2s+1).
B
with
dimB
£ 2 (n-s)
(respectively,
dimB
=
Therefore, every n-dimensional real (complex) vector bundle
with cellular base of dimension
£ n-s
(respectively,
£ 2n-2s+1)
is
GLIRn -equivalent (respectively, GL(Cn-equivalent) to the s-fold suspension of an (n-s)-dimensional bundle; furthermore, if given two (n-s)-dimensio nal real (complex) vector bundles with cellular base of dimension (respectively,
< 2n-2s+1)
< n-s
their s-fold suspensions are GLIRn -equivalent
(respectively, GL(Cn-equivalent), then the bundles themselves are GL3Rn S -equivalent (respectively, GL(Cn S-equivalent) .
5. 1.
Let
asso(£,IRn \ 0)
Let asso(Ç,Dn )
and
be an n-dimensional real vector bundle.
is equivalent (in the sense of 1.1.2) to the bundle
with total space restriction of
Ç
Exercises
{x G tl K | x f 0} pr Ç
£
and whose projection is the
to this subspace of
tl£ .
be an n-dimensional Euclidean bundle. Show that A assoit,S ) are equivalent to the bundles whose total
Show
346
spaces are the subspaces of £ 1
and
= 1,
Show that
consisting of the vectors of length
respectively, and whose projections are the appropriate
restrictions of 2.
tl £
pr £ .
Let
£
be an n-dimensional real (complex) vector bundle.
asso(£,V'(n,k))
(respectively,
asso (£ ,(CV1 (n,k ))
is
equivalent with the bundle with total space {(x^ . . . ^ ^ )
G tl £ x ...
x
tl £ | pr £ (x1 ) =
k
x ,... ,x \
K
... = pr£(xk ) , linearly independent} ,
and whose projection is the restriction of the composite map tl £ x . .. Let Show that
£
x
^r l pr£ tl £ --- -— > tl £ ■ ^ > bs £ .
be an n-dimensional Euclidean (Hermitian) bundle.
asso (£ ,V (n,k) )
(respectively, assso (£ ,(CV (n ,k ))
is
equivalent to the bundle with total space { (x1 , . ..,xk ) G tl £ x . .
x
tl £ | pr £ (x1) =
k
x^,...,xk
... = pr £ (xk ) ,
is an orthonormal frame},
and whose projection is the restriction of the composite map tl £ X ... X tl £ 3. 1.2. 9. 5. Clearly
Consider
Now
!— » tl £ ■■Pr 5 , bs £ .
the spaces
GL+ (1 ,HR) acts on
(T v 0)/GL+ (1,]R)
= S.
T and
S
introduced in Exercise
T\ 0
from the right by
Show that the
({x^},t)
{tx^}.
GL (1,3R) -bundle
defined by this action is locally trivial, but not trivial.
Show that
the associated oriented one-dimensional real vector bundle does not admit a Euclidean metric.
§6.
1.
r C , point
SMOOTH BUNDLES
Fundamental Concepts
1. Let 1 £ r £ a. A bundle r or a C -bundle if tl £ and bs £ bQ € b s £
£
is called a bundle of class r ------------- -— ~ are C -manifolds, and for each
there are a neighborhood
U
of
b ,
a Cr-manifold
347
F
with
dF
-1
-+ pr Ç
-
if
0
(U) ,
9U ф 0 ,
such that
and a Cr-diffeomorphism
pr Ç (h(b,x) ) = b
for all
h: U
b € U
F
x
and
x £ F.
The С -bundles with s ^ r will be referred to as bundles of class ^r ^r >1 С , or С -bundles. The C ' -bundles are called smooth. r If Ç is a С -bundle, then p r £ is obviously a r С -submersion. In particular, the fibers of a smooth bundle are neat submanifolds of the total manifold
tl ç
(see 3.1.5.8).
Moreover, the
fibers over points belonging to the same component of the base of a r . r С -bundle are pairwise С -diffeomorphic. If bs £ is connected and _
9 b s £ / 0,
then the fibers have no boundary, and
whereas if
3bs Ç = 0,
then
3tl £ = U ^ b s
situation, the restriction
(3tl Ç,ab pr Ç, 3bs Ç)
9bs £ is a С -bundle, whereas in the second x C -bundle. and
3tl
= 0,
the product
Ç. £
x
and £2
(3bs£),
Эрг £ ”*(b) ; in the first
X;
Given two Cr-bundles,
-i
3tl £ = p r £
of the bundle
£
(9tl £ ,ab pr £ ,bs £ )
such that r is a С -bundle.
to is a
3bs Ç . = 0
The restriction of a С -bundle to a neat submanifold of its £ base is clearly a С -bundle. r r Suppose that Ç is a С -bundle, В is a С -manifold, and r —1 f: В -> bs Ç is a С -map such that the fiber pr £ (f (b )) has no I xr boundary for all b £ ЭВ. Then f £ is aС -bundle, and we say that 1 2T‘ the bundle f "£ is neatly induced. For example, given a С -bundle £, I in’£ is always neatly induced when in is either the inclusion of a neat submanifold in bsÇ, or the inclusion 3 b s £ + b s £ ; obviously, ! jo in *£ coincides, as a С -bundle, with the corresponding restriction of Ç. 2.Let
0 £ s £ r.
A map
ф
>r from one C ' -bundle into another
is said to be a ÇS-map (a СS-isomorphism) if
tl £
СS-maps (respectively, CS-diffeomorphisms for for
s =
and
s ^ 1,
bs Ç
are
and homeomorphisms
0). A CS-isomorphism which is also an equivalence is called a
С S-equivalence. A C^r-bundle
£
is said to be CS-trivial if it is
CS-equivalent to a standard trivial bundle F
is a C^r-manifold (such that
3F = 0
if
(bsÇ x F,pr^,bsÇ) , 9bs Ç i 0 ) .
Every Cr-bundle
is obviously locally Cr-trivial, meaning that each point of a neighborhood
U
such that
Ç|y
where
bs £
has
is Cr-trivial; in particular, every
smooth bundle is topologically locally trivial. If f,
then
Cr-map,
ad f where
1
f'£
>r is neatly induced from the C ' -bundle
: £
f !Ç + U s and
Ç'
a Cr-map.Furthermore, if
are C^r-bundles,
and
(bs
injective on for all
(p(F) = yQ x f we see
is of class F;
x G F.
Cr ;
and the Since
F is
where
(U) ,
(see 3.1.5.5).
Using once
that the last neighborhood contains
V
is a neighborhood of
be a smaller neighborhood of -1
y^ G int Y ,
cp defines a diffeomorphism of a neighborhood
a neighborhood of
more the compactness of Let
(p
for
cj>(x) = (f (x) ,prT (j (x) )) .
is nondegenerate
we conclude that
Fonto
We show
from 3.4.8.2), it
and in both
cf> are immediate:
(tub^p))) c= 3 (Y x f ) ; d^(p
X
a Cr-transversalization
(j): j 1 (tub^p) + Y x f ,
differential
Y.
x G F.
is a neat submanifold of
and a neat submanifold of
-1
and closed
G Y there are a neighborhood U of y ,a r —1 F, and a C -diffeomorphism h: U xf -* f (U) ,
From 3.1.5.8 (or, if it is more convenient,
IR^,
indeed,
y
f(h(y,x)) = y
follows that
= Y:
yn ,
such that
and we can finally set
j (f
y —
1
(in
Y).
(u) ) c= tub p.
h = (ab tl £'
by x ^ pr^, (f(pr £(x)),j ’ (F(x))) . Obviously,
($(F,f),f) £ CS (£,£')
f(F,f) = ((F,f) ,f) ,
and the map
y : U -*■ C (£,£'),
JO U D (C (tl£,tl£')
is a retraction which takes
x
x Cr (bs £,bs £’)) into Cr (£,£’). Since Cr (tl£,tl£') x Cr (bs £ ,bs £ ’) is dense in CS (tl£,tl£’) x CS (bs£,bs£') (see 3.4.4.2), the existence r s of such a retraction implies that C (£,£') is dense in C (£,£'). >r 4. Let s < r s; °°, let £ and £' be arbitrary C ' -bundles such that
t l £ , tl £' , bs £ ,
f : bs £ -> bs £'be a Cr-map. is dense in
{
provided that
and
Then the
£ CS (£,£')| bs
tl £ , tl £'
PROOF.
Let
consisting of the
F
maps
bs £'
are closed manifolds, and let
set
{£ Cr (£,£')|
= f}.The same holds
'
of
j'
of class
U LS (£,£' ;f) , given by { [$() ] (b') } (y' ) = [pr2 : bs £
X
3Rm +
3Rm ]
(tl o p' (b* ,y' ) )
and [tl (T (h))] (b •,y ’) = p (f (b ') , th (b ')] (y 1)) ^
(where
r is a compact C -manifold with 1 £ r £ 00, then £ is
GLIRn -equivalent (GL(Cn-equi valent) to a real (complex) vector C^r-bundle. g If the base of the n-dimensional real (complex) vector C -bundle £ is a compact C^r-manifold,
where
1 £ s < r £ 00,
then
5
is CS-GLIRn -
-equivalent (CS-GL(En-equivalent) to a real (complex) vector C^r-bundle. We shall prove again only the real case.
Let
£ >r
be an
n-dimensional real vector bundle with b s £ a compact -manifold. n 1 By 5.3.8 and 3.5.2.13, £ is GLIR -equivalent to f *Gra (m,GL (n ,JR) ) , where If
£
m
is large enough
and
f
is some continuous map b s £ G(m,n). s is an n-dimensional real vector C -bundle such that bs £ is a
compact C^r-manifold, then by Theorem 5 £ is CS-GLIRn -equivalent to i g f *Gra (m, GL (n, IR) ) , where m is large enough and f is some C -map bs £
G(m,n) .
In both
cases
f
is homotopic to a C ' -map
g: bs £ -v G(m,n) (see 3.4.6.5, 1.3.6.6, and 3.4.5.10), so that £ n * is GLIR -equivalent to g *Gra(m,GL(n,IR) ) (see 4.1.5). This completes the proof of the first claim; as for the second, we need only add that, by 11,
£
is CS-GLIRn -equivalent to
g "Gra(m,GL(n,IR) ) .
Constructions 13. We conclude this subsection with a short review of the constructions described in § 5. s By definition, a C -subbundle of a (real or complex) vector C -bundle
£
is a subbundle of
£
in the sense of 5.2.2 or 5.2.3,
whose total space is a CS-submanifold of clearly a vector C —bundle.
tl£ .
A CS-subbundle is
The C —subbundles of Euclidean or Hermitian
C -bundles are similarly defined. simply referred to as subbundles.
The C -bundles of C -bundles will be
359
According to 5.2.5, every subbundle
n
of a Euclidean or
Hermitian bundle £ has an orthogonal complement n , and it is clear j_ g that: n is a C -subbundle of £ together with • n; the canonical equivalence
n'L -*■ £/n
(see 5.2.6) turns
£/n
into a Euclidean or
Hermitian CS-bundle (and thus becomes a C-equivalence). the (real or complex) vector Cs-case, by introducing on
£
£/n
We see that in
becomes a vector Cs-bundle
a (Euclidean or Hermitian) CS-metric.
Recall,
however, that we have established the existence of such a metric only under the assumptions that the base is compact and Let
£^
and
boundaryless base.
£2
s ^ a
(see 6).
be real vector Cr-bundles with a common
Then the construction of
£
© £.
shows that this sum is again a real vector C -bundle.
(see 5.2.9) The difficulty
occuring when the base has a boundary (i.e., the fact that the product £>1 x
not defined as a Cr-bundle) can be circumvented with the aid of the formulas ^~s
ti(?1 ® ?2) = ti( (Pr
h 2)
and p r ( ^ @ £2) = pr ?2 ° pr ((pr
) 1£2) .
Tf the conditions in 5.2.9. are satisfied, then these formulas are equivalent to the definition of
and this remains valid under
our present circumstances, provided that the base has no boundary; the same formulas are now taken as the definition of the sum when the boundary is present.
One can repeat the argument for complex vector, 27
Euclidean, and Hermitian C -bundles. In particular, we can define the 27 suspension (see 5.2.10) of a C -bundle. The C -variants of the other constructions described in §5 and their mutual relations are already evident. conjugate of a complex vector (Hermitian)
In particular, the
C -bundle is a complex
27
(respectively, Hermitian) C -bundle; the realification (see 5.1.12) of a complex vector (Hermitian) Cr-bundle is a real vector (respectively, Euclidean) Cr-bundle; the complexification (see 5.2.11) of a real vector (Euclidean) Cr-bundle is a complex vector (respectively, Hermitian) Cr-bundle; and in the Cr-versions of Theorems 5.2.13 and 5.2.14, the equivalences
conj
and
4. 1.
K
become (^-equivalences.
Tangent and Normal Bundles
The basic notions of tangent and normal bundles have
actually already been introduced and used in Chapter 3.
However, only
360
now,that we have acquired the ideea of a smooth vector bundle, can we present the full-fledged definitions of tangent and normal bundles and give them the general, correct treatment that they deserve.
Tangent Bundles 2.
Recall that in Chapter 3 we defined, for an arbitrarily
given Cr-manifold with r ^ 1, the real vector spaces Tang X the Cr-1 -manifold Tang X , and the projection p r : Tang X X 3.1.4.1 and 3.1.4.2).
(x € X) , (see
Comparing these objects with the general
definitions given in 5.1.2 and 3.2, we readily see that
(Tang X ,pr,X)
is a real vector bundle of dimension dim X and, for r > 2, a real r— 1 vector C -bundle of dimension dim X , calledthe tangentbundle of the manifold
X,
and is denoted by
tang X .
Similarly, confronting the definition of the differential df: Tang X
Tang Y
of a Cr-map f: X
Y
(see3.1.4.3)
with
the
general definitions given in 5.1.14 and 3.2, we conclude that (df,f) r— 1 r is a linear C -map tang X -*■ tang Y . If f is a C -dif feomorphism r—1 then (df,f) is a linear C -isomorphism. 3.
The notion of vector field has been defined twice: once
for smooth manifolds (see 3.1.4.5), and once for vector, Euclidean, and Hermitian bundles (see 5.1.15).
Now it is plain that the second
definition generalizes the first one: a vector field on a smooth manifold
X
is simply a vector field in its tangent bundle tang X . 5 In particular, the parallelizability (C -parallelizability) of an
n-dimensional smooth manifold X is equivalent to the GL3Rn -triviality s n (respectively, C -GLIR -triviality) of the bundle tang X . Comparing this with Theorem 3.11, we see that a parallelizable compact Cr-manifold r— 1 with r £ 00 is C -parallelizable. A smooth manifold is stably parallelizable if its tangent bundle is stably trivial.
The discussion in 5.4.4 and Theorem 3.5.2.13
show that if a compact manifold is stably parallelizable, then the stabilization occurs already at the first step, i.e., the bundle su tang X manifold
is GL}Rn+1 -trivial for any stably parallelizable n-dimensional X. 4.
each chart
Recall that, given a point £ Atlxx
x
of the
smooth
manifold
defines a (j)-basis for the tangent space
Tang X,
and the matrix of the transformation from the (j)-basis to the ifj-basis is just the Jacobi matrix of the map
loc (■ Z] (a result
of the discussion in 1)
whenever
X
is closed but Y is
and,in particular,
degf
= 0
not.
As examples, consider the maps f: (Dn/,Sn ^) (Dn ,Sn ^) and n“ 1 nw1 ab f : S S ,defined by an orthogonal (nxn)-matrix V (n ^ 2) . Obviously,
deg f
V € SO(n),
= deg ab f = det V ,
anddeg f = deg ab f = -1
degree of
the antipodal map
even and
-1
if
n
Sn ^
i.e.,
deg f = deg ab f = 1
if
£ 0(n) ^ SO(n).
V
Sn \
x -xf equals
if
Thus, the
1
if n
is
is odd.
The Nonoriented Case 5.
The discussion in 1, 2, and 3 can be carried over to n
oriented manifolds if we replace integers by integers modulo 2. enables us to define f: (X, 3X) and
Y
(Y ,3Y ) ,
deg f
€
where X and
for any continuous Y
map
are smooth, compact
is connected (no orientability needed).
the integral degree listed in 4 are preserved.
This
manifolds,
All the properties of For the case of oriented
manifolds, when both degrees (the integral and mod 2) are defined, we continue to use the same notation for both, because misunderstandings are usually eliminated by the context.
370
Applications 6.
Smooth closed manifolds of positive dimension are not
contractible. This is plain if the given manifold is not connected. connected case, the identity map of a closed manifold is
1,
In the
whereas
the
degree of any map which takes the whole manifold into one of its points is zero (here we use the 7.
If
-degree defined in 5).
n i m, then
Indeed,
if
m < n,
Sn and then
Sm
are not homotopy equivalent.
every continuous map
Sm + SD
is
homotopic to a constant map (see 2.3.2.3 and 2.3.1.6), whereas id: Sn
Sn
is not homotopic to a constant map (see 6).
8.
The boundary of a nonempty, compact, smooth manifold is
not a retract of the manifold. It suffices to assume that the given manifold smooth, connected, and with and let X —
Z be X
any component of >
10.
be a retraction,
Consider the composite map
On the other hand, this degree equals the
degree of
which is 1,
Every continuous
the
Then the map Sn ^
Sn ^
from the point
is a retract of
Dn :
id Z .
is continuous and has no
taking each point f(x)
Euclidean q-simplex.
into
is a retraction, and
locally Euclidean space is homeo-
morphic to an n-dimensional locally Euclidean space, then (Cf. 3.1 .1 .4) . Every point of
x E Dn
contradiction (see Theorem 8).
If an m-dimensional
PROOF.
0
Dn has a fixed point.
f :Dn + Dn
Dn
X,
last map being
map Dn
Suppose that
its projection on Sn ^
3X
degree is
PROOF.
hence
p: X
is compact,
its
ab(in ° p) : Z -* Z,
fixed points.
9X.
Let
X. Since its image is not all of
(see 4 and 5).
9.
9X / 0.
X
3Rq
n = m.
can be covered (in ]Rq )
by a
Therefore, every point of a q-dimensional locally
Euclidean space lies in the interior of a finitely-triangulated subset, and its link in this subset is homeomorphic to 2.2.6.4, spheres
Sg_1.
By Theorem
this link is a homotopy invariant, and 7 shows that the S
and 11.
S
cannot have the same homotopy type unless
m = n.
Theorem 10 clarifies not only the definition of a locally
Euclidean space, but also that of a cellular space.
Namely, it shows
that the dimension of a cell is uniquely determined by this cell.
371
Therefore, the dimension function which we introduced into the definition of the cellular decomposition as an additional element of its structure, is actually redundant, being completely determined by the decomposition itself. 12.
n ]R_
The boundary of the half space
ri“ 1 _is 3R^
(Cf. 3.1.1.4.) PROOF.
It suffices to show that the point
neighborhood homeomorphic to
3Rn ;
0
has in 3R^
no
see 3.1.1.4.
Assume that such a neighborhood exists.
Then
0
is an
interior point of a finitely-triangulated subset of this neighborhood, where its link is homeomorphic to On the other hand,
0
S
(cf. the proof of Theorem 10).
is an interior point of a finitely-triangulated
subset, where its link is homeomorphic to n-simplex which lies in of its (n-l)-faces.
3R^
Since
Dn ^:
and contains Sn ^
0
take any Euclidean
in the interior of one
is not contractible, whereas
Dn ^
is,
we contradict Theorem 2. 2. 6. 4.
6. 1. X
and
Y
(X,f ,Y )
Let
r £ 00,
and let
are Cr-manifolds, is a Cr-bundle.
that for
r
Cr-manifold
< °°, and
Exercises
X
f : X -> Y
be a Cr-submersion, where
compact and
Y
closed.
(Combined with Theorem 1.3, this result shows
(X,f ,Y )is a Cr-bundle whenever Y
Show that
is a Cr-manifold, while
f:
X is X ■+Y is
a compact a
C -submersion.) 2. base.
Show
k(z x I)
c 3.
Let
1 £ r £ °°, and let
that there isa collaring pr £ Let
9tl E,
= pr
and
1: 9tl E, x I
(pr £ (z))
k: 9tl E,
for every point
1 bs £
372
4. compact
Show that if
bs £
and
tl F3,
>r then for every C ' -bundle
r £ °°, Secr£
is dense in
(This generalizes Theorem 2.7 for r f a.) >r 5. Show that every C ' -bundle £ tl£
with
for any s < r.
with compact
bs £
and
r 00 _. is C -isomorphic to a C -bundle (cf. 2.8). 6.
Show that
sum of n+1 copies of
su tang ]RPn
7.
is Ca-GLIRn +^- equivalent to the
Gra (n+1 ,GL (1 ,3R) ) ,
Ca-GLCCn+^-equivalent to the sum of
G(m,n)
SecS£
£
n+1
while
su tang CCPn
copies of
is
Gra (n+1 ,GL (1 ,CC) ) .
Show that the normal bundle of the Ca-embedding
-+G(m+1,n),
Gra(m,GL(n, 3R) ) ,
described in 3.2.2.3, is Ca-GLIRn -equivalent to while the normal bundle of the Ca-embedding
(CG(m,n) -+ CG(m+1,n),
described in 3.2.2.1 ,
is Ca-GL(Cn-equivalent to
Gra (m, GL (n ,CC) ) .
degree m
8. in
Let P'l ' ***'Pn + 1 ke homogeneous complex polynomials of n+1 variables, whose only common zero is the point 0.
Show that the map
(EPn
CCPn
given by
* ,P1 ( Z 1 .....2 n +1 > " ■ • :pn + 1 < Z 1 .....!„ . l " has degree
m11.
9. Show that for n ^ 1 every continuous map degree is not (-1)n+ has a fixed point. 10.
Show that for
n ^ 1
every continuous map
Sn -> Sn
whose
Sn -> SR
having odd degree transforms some pair of antipodal points into another such pair. 11 .
Show that for odd
n > 1
the degree of any map
Sn -+ IRpn
is even. 12.
Let
f
be a simplicial map of the standard 2-simplex
onto the standard 1-simplex. Show that the symplicial mapping cylinder, Scylf , is not homeomorphic to Cyl f .
Chapter 5. Homotopy Groups
§1.
1. 1.
Let
THE GENERAL THEORY
Absolute Homotopy Groups
(X,Xq )
be a pointed space, and let
r 5 0
be an
integer.
To simplify the notation, let us agree to write Sphr (X,xQ ) 27 x 2T r for the set C (I ,FrI ;X,xQ) of all continuous maps (I ,Fr I ) (X,Xq and denote theset of homotopy classes of such r r tt ( I ,Fr I ; X ,xq ) ) by 7Tr (X,xQ). The elements
maps (i.e., of
Sphr (X,xQ ) will be
referred to as r-dimensional spheroids (or simply r-spheroids) of the space
X
with For
origin x^. r > 0
define their product,
and two arbitrary spheroids (pip,
as the spheroid in
(p,\p
€ Sph (X,Xg),
Sph^iX^^)
0
and
(b) .
d £ G2
c £ G^
cf>3
-1
((>4
i.e., £G3 .
= e. . 3 is an epimorphism.
h^ ° ^ 2 ^)
= 4>4 ((0 4 1
h^ o ^ (d )= a(cf)^(b))
a =
\
Let
a £ G3 .
= Imh^ .
Let
(b) ) _1 ) = ° h^ (a) ) (h3 (b) )_1 )
h^ (c) = ai^ib))
= ^3 ° h 2 (d) , and
Consequently,
On the
and so
o h 3 2 *
are h 3 ~ '
h 4 “ 'and
h^-homomorphisms, respectively; h 2 (oj)h^(a) = h 2 (00a)
for all
oj £
and
a £
An isomorphism is a homomorphism such that all isomorphisms. -
12.
11^.
h.'s
Among conditions (i)-(vi) above, tworefer to H4
are
p^,
namely (iv) and (v).
From (iv) it follows that if
on
IIc-,
is contained in the center of the group
(v)
it follows that if
then
Im p^
IT4
acts identically on
Abelian, and that the converse is true provided
n5 , p^
acts identically then
H5
IT^. From is
is an epimorphism.
395
In general,
(v) implies that
Ker
is contained in the center of
The Tr-sequence (6 ) is exact if ----and, in addition, the preimages of the 13.
i ^ 0
are nothing but
Ker p . = Im p . „ for all 'l i+1 elements of under p^ IT3 on n2 -
the orbits of the action of
If the ii-sequence (6 ) is exact and obviously the homomorphism
i ^ 0 is arbitrary, then
piis trivial if
and only if
P^ +1
epimorphism, while Ker p^ is trivial if and only if Pj_+^ In general, wheni ^ 3, Ker p^ is trivial if and only p^ injective, of
because
p. is a group homomorphism.
is an
^-s trivial. is
Further, the triviality
Ker p2
P2 (a3
-1
means that p2 is injective: if p2 (ct) = p2 (3), then _1 1 1 ) = p2 (a) 3 = p2 (3)3 = P2 (3B )= P2 (en ) [see condition (vi)
in 11], and hence the injectivity
a = 3. of
The triviality of
p^,
Ker p^
does not imply
and this is also valid for Ker p^
However, in thecase of an exact 7T-sequence (6 ), the is guaranteed if the group on
n^.
and
p^.
injectivity
of p^
is trivial, or if it acts identically
TI2 • The above discussion makes clear that, in the case of an exact
7T-sequence
(6 ) and for
i ^ 1,
equivalent to the invertibility of H^ + 2
and
14. n2
-*-s
Pj_+i' that the triviality of
IK
implies the triviality of
triviality of
on
P.^+2
the triviality of
^i +2
an and since
-1
£ Ker p2
B = P2 (en )3 = P2 (l3) = Y
Consequently,
= Im p ^ ,
is an epimorphism and that a £ II^
[see
and
y £ n2 ,
Bp3 ■ are
between pairs with base point.
(X' ,A' ,Xq) ,
all
r 5 1,
f* : Trr (X,x0> ■+ *r ( x ' ,
for
all r>.
are isomorphisms, then so 1; if f*: ^ (x,xQ)+ n (X’,x'Q) ,
401
all
r £ 1,
and
f*:
finally , if
f*
:
f* :
f*:
-*
7Tr ( X / A / x Q )
7t ^ ( X , A , X
q
->
)
tt ^
tt
', A
1, x^
+
TTr ( X 1 , x ^
all
r ^ 0,
TTr ( X , x Q )
(abf)* : tt^(A,Xq) + tt^ (A1 /xq ) / are
(X
),
all
r * 1,
(abf)* : 7Tr (A,x0 ) + tt (A',x^),
isomorphisms, then so are r > 1;
+ t\^
TTr ( X , A , x Q )
^ (X 1 ,A 1 /xq ) ,
(X* , A ' , X
q
),
all
are
for all
r ^ 0,
and
are isomorphisms, then so
for all
r ^ 2,
while
is an epimorphism with trivial kernel.
)
f*: tt^(X,A,Xq) -+ tt^ (X 1 ,A 1 ,x^)
In the last case,
necessarily injective; see 3.3.8.
is not
However, this map is certainly
injective (and hence, an isomorphism) if we assume, in addition, that all the homomorphisms
(abf)*: tt (A,x) + tt (A *,f (x) ) ,
epimorphic.
To see this, let
and let
and
w^
there is a path = f o w 2 (1 ),
w2
such that
f* (co^ ) = f*(w2 ),
and
m
are
s'(0)= f o w^(1),
a^.
Then
s'(1) =
and the loop
((f
o w ^ ) ( [i n : A 1 -*■ X 1] o s , ) ) ( f o w 2 ) 1
is homotopic to the constant loop. is an
with
^
be spheroids in the classes
s': I + A*
x G A,
isomorphism and
(abf)* :
epimorphism, there is a path s(1)
=w 2 (1) /
such
achoice of
and the path s,
Since
(abf)* : tTq (A,Xq )
(A,w (1
s: I A
(9)
tTq
(A',Xq )
)) -* tt^ (A ',f (w^ (1 )))isan
such that
ab f os: I + A*
s(0)
= w^(1),
is homotopic to
s'.
f takes the loop
(w^([in: A -*■ X] ° s))w2^ into
(10)
aloop homotopic to (9), and therefore homotopic
loop.
For
to theconstant
Finally, from the fact that f*: tt^(X,Xq) ■+ tt^(X',Xq)
is an
isomorphism, it follows that (1 0 ) itself is homotopic to the constant loop,
w^ and w 2
i.e., the spheroids
are homotopic, and
= w2 .
The Homotopy Sequence of a Triple 10. Xq
£
B.
Let
According
TTr (X,A,xQ ),
(X,A ,B )
be a t o p o l og ic al
to S u b s e c t i o n 4, w h e n
TTr (X,B,xQ ),
and
in* : TTr (A,B,x0 ) + TTr (X,B,xQ ) i n d u c e d by the
inclusions
are w el l defined.
9:
If
in:
r > 2,
(X,A ,xQ ) -> TTr _ 1 (A,B,xQ ) ,
homomorphism TTr_i(A,xo)
r ^
TTr (A,B,xQ ), and
tr iple wi th b a s e po in t
1
the h o m o t o p y g roups
and the h o m o m o r p h i s m s
rel* : TTr (X,B,xQ ) + TTr (X,A,x0 ),
(A,B)
■+
(X,B)
an d
rel:
(X,B)
(X,A) ,
we de fi ne an ad di t i o n a l h om om orp hi sm ,
as the composition of the boundary
TTr (X,A,x0) + Trr_1 (A,xQ)
and the homomorphism
TTr_1 (A, B,xQ), induced by the inclusion
(A,x0 ,xQ) -> (A,B,xQ ).
402
N ow we may ass em bl e homomorphisms
these three
series of g r o u p s and three
into a l e f t - i nf in it e
series of
sequence
tt2 (A, B ,xQ ) -— ■*-> 2 (X ,B ,xQ ) - rel*^ tt2 (X,A ,xQ ) —
...
(11 )
tt1 (A ,B ,xQ ) As was
(7),
(11)
is a ir-sequence:
2
(X,A , X q )
on the gr oups
tt (X,A fx Q ),
tt 2
(X,B ,Xq )
on the groups
Trr (A,B,xQ )
the ac tions
of
n
(A,xQ ) and
3: Tr2 (X,A,xQ ) + tt (A,xQ ) right act io n of of
tt ^
(A,X q )
tt2
4.5,
4.7,
5.11
are satisfied.
the triple
and
(X,A, x q )
the r i g h t g r o u p - a c t i o n s
and
tt^ (X ,B ,x Q ) ,
via
tt, j
(A,B, x 0 )
Tr-Sequence
i n du ce d by
the h o m o m o r p h i s m s similarly,
the
is ind uced by the a c t i o n
3: tt2 (X,A, x 0 ) -+ tt^(A, x 0 ); finally,
and 4.8 show that the c o n d it io ns
(X,A,B)
are
3: Tr2 (X,B,xQ ) -> tt^ B ^ X q ); on
of
and the rig ht g r o u p - a c t i o n s of
tt1 (B,xQ )
via the h o m o m o r p h i s m
4.4,
rel* » TT1 (X, A,xq )
^ (X,B,x0 )
(11)
i mposed by D e f i n i t i o n
is cal led the h o m o t o p y s e q ue nc e of
with base poi nt
xQ .
Sequence (11) is exact; cf. 2. Given any path
triple
B,
with base point
(X,A,B)
s(0)
with base point
Given any continuous map base point
xQ
Xq G B 1),
the t r a n s l a t i o n s
and
(X,A, s (0) )
tt^ (A, B ,s (0 )) ->
define an isomorphism of the homotopy sequence of the
(X,A,B)
the triple
I
(X,B,s (0) ) -+ 7rr (X,B, s (1 )),
TT^ (X, A, s (1 ) ) , -> it (A,B,s(1))
s:
into a triple
the homomorphisms
s(1); f
cf. 3.
from a triple
(Xf,A,,Bf) and
(X,A,B)
with base point
f*: Trr (X,A,xQ)
tt^_(X 1 ,B 1 ,Xq ) ,
f* : TTr (X,B ,xQ )
into the homotopy sequence of with
x^
(x
€ B,
tt^ (X ',A 1 ,x^ ) ,
(abf)* : TTr (A,B,xQ) -> tt^_ (A 1 ,B 1 ,x^ ),
constitute a homomorphism from the homotopy sequence of the first triple into the homotopy sequence of the second triple; cf. 4.
7.
The Local System of Homotopy
Groups of the Fibers of a Serre Bundle 1. fibers of and
Suppose that
£,
and
(f)^ G Sph^ (F^ fx
[in: Fq
tl £]
G Sph^_ (tl £ ,x^) spheroids of 4>0
and
c|)
o
xQ G F Q ,
£
x1 G F1 .
is a Serre bundle, Two spheroids,
FQ
and
F
Q G Sphr (F0 ,xQ )
) , are said to be fiber homotopic if the spheroids
(J)0 G Sph^ (11 £, x^)
and
[in: F ^ + tl ?]
o
G
can be connected by a free homotopy consisting of
tl £which take are fiber
ir
into fibers of
homotopic if there is a map
£.
In other words,
h: lr x I + tl £
are
403
such that:
h
is constant on each set
Fr ir x t,
t £ I,
h(y,0) =
= c()q (y) ,
h (y,1) = cf) (y) , y G Ir , and the map pr E, ° h is constant 3T on each set I x t, t G I. We say that h is a fiber homotopy from ^0
—
^1
along the path 2.
Given any spheroid
there is afiber homotopy tl£ . tl E,
t h* h(Fr ir x t) .
of
(y)
is manifestly a fiber homotopy of
s. To prove the second assertion of the theorem, it suffices to
show that two spheroids, along a loop
4>^
s: I + tl^
homotopic
homotopic in the usual sense. from
t}) to
ip
along
to the constant loop. H: Ir + 1
x I
G Sphr (F0 ,xQ),
s,
bs E, and G:
with the constant loop, are
Choose
a fiber homotopy
and a homotopy
Now define
f
Fr lr + 1
which are fiber homotopic $: I
h: I x I -*• tl E,
from
s
: lr + ^ ->• tl E, and homotopies
x I -»• tl E, ,
by the formulas
f~(tr ...,tr+1) = $((t 1 f...,tr ),tr+1), = pr E, ° h (tr + 1 ,t) ,
x I -* tl E,
=
and (t^/...ft^)f
if
tr+i — 1 t
^ (t^ / •• • h (tr+ ^ ,t) ,
— ^'
if
(t^ , ...
G Fr X
.
Since H (y,0) =pr£(f~(y)) for Y € Ir+1, and G(y,0) = f~(y) for y G Fr Ir + 1 , there is a homotopy H~: lr + 1 x I -> tl E, which covers H
and satisfies
= f (y) and note
H~(y,t) = G(y,t)
for y G ir ^ . thaty :
Now
ir x i -> fq
for
y G Fr lr + 1
4>0 € Sphr (FQ ,x0 )
H~(y,0) =
let ¥( (t , ... ,tr ) ,t) = H ((t^/..., t^_,t ) ,1 ) is a (usual) homotopy from
Let us prove the last part of the theorem. spheroids
and
and
., G Sph^F^x.,)
to
\p.
Suppose that the are fiber homotopic
404
along the path ^
u: I + tl £ ,
Sphr (F0 ,xQ) ,
e
I^ e Sphr (F1 ,x1), and the path
suppose that the paths that
(J)Q
and that the same holds for the spheroids
and
pr £ ° u >Pr £ ° v: I
bs E,
wQ = [in: FQ
tlEj o w.
pr £ ° (u ^ (wnv )) : I
bs £
tl E, .
Further,
are homotopic, and
are freely homotopic along a path 0
last means that there is a fiber homotopy from path
v: I
w: I + FQ . to
\J/Q
The
along the
It is clear that the loop
is homotopic to the constant loop, which in
turn implies that the path u w 1 : I -> tl £ with w 1 (I)c F
-1
[x E tl £]
(pr £ ^1 (pr £ ^ (tl cp(x))) ,tl cp(x) )
combine to define a homomorphism of the upper local system
of the r-th homotopy groups of the fibers of for bs cp
Furthermore, and
if the fibers of
abtlcp*: TT^(pr£ ^ (b) )
£
£
into the similar system
and
arer-simple,
(pr £^ (bs cp(b)))
then
[b E bs £]
combine to define a homomorphism of the lower local system of the r-th homotopy groups of the fibers of
8.
Then pr
into the similar system for
and let
Let B
£
be a Serre bundle with a base point
be a subset of
: TTr (tl£,pr£ 1 (B),xQ)
pr
.
The Homotopy Sequence of a Serre Bundle
1 (LEMMA). Xq E tl £ ,
£
: TTr (tl£,pr£
-
1
(bg) ,bg)
bs £
with
^ (bs £ ,B ,xQ )
7Tr (bs £ ,bQ)
bQ = pr £ (xQ) E B. and, in particular,
are isomorphisms for any
r > 1. PROOF. Let homotopies,
pr
is epimorphic.
(p E Sph (bs £,B,bn ) . r — 1 ^" H: I x I bs £ and
^ r— 1 Define f : I -+ tl £ and two r— 1 G: Fr I x I -> tl £ , by
H ((t1 , ...,tr _ 1 ) ,t) = 4>(t1 , ...
f~(lr_1) = xQ , G(FrI r _ 1
x i) = X(). SinceH(y,0) ^ r—1 G (y,0) = f (y) for y £ Fr I , and equals
,1-t) ,
y £ ir 1 , and ~ r—1 there is a homotopy H : I x i -*■ tl E,
= pr£(f~(y))
G on Fr I
r- 1
(see 4.1.3.6 ).
H
the formula
(t ,. ..,tr ) = H~ ((t 1 ,...,tj._1),1-tr ) such that
x I
for
which covers
ip £ Sphr (tl £ ,pr £ ~ 1 (B) ,Xq )
and
pr^ ^ (ip)
Now
defines a spheroid
= .
2)
pr £* is monomorphic. 1 Let ip £ Sphr (tl £ ,pr £ (B) ,Xq ) , _
prt^(ip)
£ Sphr (bs E, ,B,b0)
and suppose that the spheroid
is homotopic to the constant spheroid.
406
Choose a homotopy
spheroid, and define H: Ir x I h
x I -* bs £
0: I
bs £
f : ir -+ tl £
and
((t 1 ,...,tr ),t)
from
G: F r l r x I + tl[ ,
,tr- 1 ,1 -t),
Since
(t1 ,...,t^) G Fr I
if
H(y,0) = pr£(f~(y))
for
there exists a homotopy equals
G
on
Fr I
x I.
y G I ,
tl £
Let -1
Set
Fq = pr £
(b^)
Now it is plain that
Co
is the component of
for
by
Fq
a
.
bn G bs i .
then the loops
a G it^ (bs £ ,bQ ) ,
a.
That this action is
a path which ends
in
C and covers
of the pair
and which is carried into a loop in class w
s2 G Sph^ (tl
is a path in
pr^(s ^ w )
Now Lemma 1 implies that the spheroids
C
with
£,FQ ,x2) w(0) = x^
and p r ^ ( s 2)
and
coincide.
and
are homotopic.
s^w,s2 G Sph^ (tl£,FQ ,x2 )
homotopic, which, in turn, implies that the components of s^(0)
7T^(bs£;,bQ)
which contains the origins of those paths
C,
are two such spheroids, and w( 1 ) = x2 ,
with base point
s G Sph 1 (tl C/FQ ,x1 )and
If
comp(FQ )
can be regarded as a spheroid
with origin in
pr ^
on
and cover loops in the class
a loop in the class a
£ ,b Q )
C G comp(FQ) and
well defined follows from Lemma 1: (tl £,Fq)
defines a homotopy
and define a right action of the group
comp(FQ) as follows : C
tt^ (bs
£ be a Serre bundle
on
which end in
and
from ip to the constant spheroid
The Action of 2.
tr / 0 .
G(y,0) = f (y) which x I -> tl £
H : I
v ( ( t y . . . ,tr ) ,t) = H~( t^ , .. .,tr_-j 't ) ,1 -tr)
y : ir x I
t = 0, r
if
^^ ‘0 '
G Fr I H and
by f~(lr ) = x, ko ' and
= $ ( (t1 ,...,tr _ 1 ,1-t),tr ),
G ((t-j f •••
to the constant
and two homotopies,
>p (t1,
for covers
pr£^(ijj)
Fq
are
containin
It is readily seen that this is indeed a
right action. This action is compatible with the action of the fundamental group
oftl ^ on the homotopy groups of the fibers of
namely
Cpr ^(o)
a G tt1 (tl ?,xQ) ,
= T^C and
for all xQ G FQ .
£
(see
7 .3 ),
C G comp(FQ) = 7Tq(Fq,Xq), Moreover, if
f: £
£;1
Serre bundles, then fact ab tl f : comp (FQ ) -+ comp (pr £ '” 1 (bs f (bQ )) ) , whereab tl f = [abtlf: FQ + pr £ '” 1 (bs f (bQ ))] ,
is a
is a map of
407
[bs f* :tt ^ (bs
+
tt
1 (bs ^ 1 ,bs f (bQ) )]-map.
3. I_f C € compiF^) and X q G C, tt ^ (bs £ /bQ ) at xQ (see 4.2.3.4) equals
of
pr£* : TT1 (tl^,x0) +
morphism
tt
1 (bs ^ ,bQ) .
In fact, the equality s:
I •+ tl £ such that
a.
then the isotropy subgroup the image of the homo
Co = C
s(0),s(1) G C
means that there is a path
and
s
covers a loop in the class
This, in turn, guarantees the existence of a loop with origin
which covers a loop in the class
x^
a.
Construction of the Sequence 4. Let
bQ
Let
E,
be a Serre bundle with base point -1
= pr^(x^) ,F q = pr £
(bQ) ,
and apply Lemma
the homotopy sequence of
the pair (tl^F^)
a new sequence.
for each r ^ 1,
TT^_(tl ^,Fq,Xq)
Namely, by
7T^(tl ^,Fq,Xq)
TT^ibs^bg) ,
xn G t l £ . 1 to transform
with base point
Xq
we replace thehomotopy
into group
rel* : Trr (tl 5 /XQ ) +
the homomorphism
- by its composition with the isomorphism
pr ¿3*: tt (tl ^,Fq,Xq)
3: 7T^(tl ^ , F q , X q)
->
(bs^bg) , and the homomorphism
tt
■> TTr _'|
^f q /Xo^ ”
the comPos:i-t:i-on
-1
A = 3 o (pr^*) :tt^ (bs £ ,b^ ) + TTr_'| 'X0 ^ # since the composition of the inclusion rel: (tl^^x^x^) (tl^/F^^x^) with the projection pr ? : (tl£,F 0 ,xQ) + (bsC/b 0 ,bQ) we see that else but
[pr £* : tt (tl^/F^x^)
is simply
-> tt^ (bs £ ,b^)] © rel*
pr E,* : tt (tl£,xQ) ■> TTr (bs^,b0 ) .
homotopy group
TT^(bs^,b0)
means of the homomorphism
(tl£,x0 ,x0) ■> (bs 5,bQ,b0),
pr
is nothing
Finally, if we attach the
to the right of the resulting sequence by pr
: ^(tl^x^)
-* tTq (bs £ ,b^) ,
we obtain
the sequence ... tt2 (Fq/Xq) tt1 (Fq ,x0) ^0 (F0 ,x0)
> ^2
^'X 0 )
> tt1 (tl ?/XQ ) P— ttq
> ^ 2 ( b3 ^/b0 ) tt1 (bs S/bQ ) —
(12^
(tl g,xQ) Pr ^ * -> ^0 (bs?,b0) .
By 3.3, 7.3, and 2, there are right group-actions of tt
1 (bs £, bQ )
and
on
TTr (FQ,Xp) ,
tt0 (F0 ,x0).
TTr (bs£,bQ ) ,
and of
TT.|(tlf;/x0)
and also a right action of
The homomorphisms
in*, pr
,
ir^ (bs 5,bp) and
these actions, as required by Definition 5.11 Therefore,
on
A
TTr (tl^,xQ ) on the set
are compatible with
(see 3.6, 4.5, 7.3, and 2).
(12) is a Tr-sequence, called the homotopy sequence of the
408
bundle
with base point
E,
5.
xQ .
Sequence (12) is exact.
This is a corollary of the exactness of the homotopy sequence of the pair
(tl£,F )
pr £* : tt^ (1 1 E,, x^)
the kernel of
TTgltl^Xg) ;
in*: 77q (Fq /xq . a € tt (bs £ ,b^) 6.
and of two additional and evident facts:
such that
Given a map
Ti^bs^h^)
and given
equals the image of
a,B € ^ q ^Fq 'Xq ),
if and only if
Q = ao
f: E,
there is
in* (a) = in*(B).
of Serre bundles, the vertical
homomorphisms •..
V
P0 ' V
^ ( t l C,xQ ) Pr
irr (bs £/bQ )
A 7Tr- 1 (F0 ,X0 ) •**
I
(ab tl f)*
...
where
bs f*
tl f*
v (Fo'xo)
7Tr (tl£',X^) ■Pr a > TTr (bs
x^ = tlf(xQ) ,
b^ = bsf(bQ ) ,
and
(ab tl f )
7Tr - 1 { F 0 ' X0 ]
Fg = pr £ 1 1 (b^) ,
constitute a homomorphism of the first homotopy sequence into the second. The commutativity of the first two squares follows from 1.7, while the commutativity of the third follows from 4.2 and 4.3.
The
compatibility of the vertical homomorphisms with the actions of the fundamental groups was established in 3.6, 4.5, 7.5, and 2 .
The Most Important Special Cases 7.
If
A: TTr (bs£,b0)
If bs E,
If
bs E,
is k-connected
A: TT^fbs^bg) TTr_ ^ FQ'X0^ ‘*‘S an isomorPhism f°r A: 7Tk+ ^ (bs E, ,bQ ) ^(Fq'Xq) is an ePimorphism. If then the converse is true in both cases. is “-connected, then all the homomorphisms
in* : 7Tr ^F0'X0^ and k < “ , then r £ k,
is “-connected, then all the homomorphisms
-* 7Tr_'| (F q 'xo ^ are isomorphisms • If tl £
and k < °°, then all r £ k, while tl £ isconnected,
all
tl £
TTr ^t l ^'xo^ are isomorphisms. If bs ^ is k-connected in*: ^(Fq/Xq) TTr (t l 5 ,x()) is an isomorphism for
while
in*:
^ (FQ ,XQ )
^ (1 1 ^ ,xQ )
is an epimorphism.
is connected, then the converse is true in both cases. If F q
is “-connected, then all the homomorphisms
Pr 5* : ]rr (tl £,xQ)
■> 7Tr (bs S,bQ )
k-connected and
< “,
k
isomorphism for all
then
r * k,
are isomorphisms.
pr ^*
while
pr
If
FQ is
: 7Tr (tl^,xQ)-+iTr (bs^,b0 )
is an
: * k + 1 (tl £ ,xQ ) -* 7Tk+ (bs EJ f b Q)
409
is an epimorphism.
The converse is true in both cases
(with no
supplementary conditions). 8.
If the bundle £ has a section s such that s ^q) = xq / sequence (1 2 ) splits from the right at the terms tt (tl&xQ ) , and
then
s* : 7Tr (bs £ ,bQ) section,
from
tt (tl £,xQ )
s: (bs£,bg) PROOF.
Since
9.
Fq
I_f
the left at
are splitting homomorphisms for any such
-> (tl£,xQ) . pr C ° s = idbs^,
TT^itl^Xg) ,
induces splitting homomorphisms PROOF.
Since
p
and any retraction
p*: 7Tr(tl£,x0)
in = id FQ ,
o
10. If the inclusion
(bs £;,b^ ) .
tl £ ,then sequence (1 2 ) splits
is a retract of
the terms
pr ^ ° s^ = id
p: tl £
FQ
-> 7Tr (Fo'xo^#
P* ° i-n* = ^dTTr^F0'X0^ *
in: Fq -* tl £
is^ XQ-homotopic to the
constant map, then sequence (1 2 ) splits from the right at the terms 7T^(bs £,bg) .
in
Moreover, given any Xp-homotopy
to the constant map, consider the maps
-»•Sphr + 1 (bs 5,b0)
h: FQ x I
Given an arbitrary spheroid
and
= y
pr
()-
,... ,t_) ,tr+1)
7rr+ i ^ s i'bo^
( € Sph^ (Fq ,xQ )) . Then the homomorphisms induced by y^ split the sequence.
) ] (t1 , •. •,tr+1) = h(, 2 ,
and a
is a covering (in the narrow sense) ,
factA :
(bs C,bQ)/Im pr C*
F0'
induced
410
A: it (bsC,bQ) > 7To (F0 'X 0 ) = F0 '
by
is invertible.
This is a corollary of the exactness of the homotopy sequence of the bundle
TT0 (tl£,x0 ) = 0whenever
and
13. Xq
ofthe fact that tt^CFq/Xq) = 0
and
t l
£
Set
LetE,
and Xq £
E,
bg = pr r,(xQ ) ,
and b^
r
> 0
is a covering in the narrow sense.
E,
be Serre bundles with basepoints
E,'
tl E,'
for all
,and let
f: E,
E' , with tlf(Xg)
Fq = prf/ 1 (bQ) ,
=pr^'(x^),
= x^.
F^ =p r f / ' 1 (b^).
From Propositions 6 and 5.19, we derive the following conclusions. If
bs f * : nr (bs£,b0 )
TTr (bs £ ',b^) ,
all
r 5 1,
and
(abtlf)*: tt (F.,x.) i t (Fi,x'), all r ^ 0, are isomorphisms, x r u u r u u so are tlf* : tt^,(tl £ ,xQ) -*•tt (tl E,',x^), for all r ^ 1. If
then
tl f* :it (tl£,xn) ->• tt (tl £' ,x') , allr ^ 0 , and IT U IT u (abtlf).: tt (F.,xn ) tt (F',x'), all r ^ 0, are isomorphisms, then x r u u r u u so are bsf * : u ^ ( b s ^ , b ^ ) -+tt^ (bs £ ',b^ ), for all r ^ 1. Finally, bs f * :7Tr (bs£,bQ)
if
tl f * : TT^(tl£,XQ)
Trr (bs^',b^) , tt^ (tl £ ',Xg) ,
so are (abtlf)*: 7Tr iFo /Xo^ (abtlf)*: We
r ^ 0,
all
7Tr^F 0 /X0 ^/
and
and
s 1 : I^ F q
while '*‘ S an e P im o r P ^ is rn with trivial kernel.
tl f (x^) be
Indeed,
r
> ^t
(abtlf).: TTn (Fn ,xn) -* * u u u
lie in the
-* tt ( t l ^ ^ x ^ )
tlf* :
tt^ (tl£ ,x^ )-+ TT^(tl^',tlf(x^)) such that
I tl ^
tlf o
s:
I tl ^ 1is homotopic to the path
from the fact that it follows that
bs f * :
pr£ o s
tt
(x^ ) ,
s ' (1 ) = tlf (x2 ) .
is an epimorphism,
s:
pr £ ' ° tlf ° s
s(0)
the fiber F q ,
is an isomorphism,
path
= x^ ,s(1)
with
be such that
same component of
a path with s ' (0) = tl f
tl f * : 7TQ(tl£,XQ)
Then the loop
tt^ (tl £ 1 ,tl f (x) )
£ FQ
let
Since
= x ,
[in: F q
and
there is
a
and tl £
1] o s'.
is homotopic to the constant loop, and
1 (bs £,bQ) +
tt
(bs £ ', b ' Q)
is an isomorphism
is also homotopic to the constant loop.
applying Theorem 4.1.3 . 6 to the map s to
^°r
tl f * : TT^(tl£,x)
are epimorphisms.
tlf(x^)
pr £ o
are isomorphisms, then
is also an isomorphism if we make the additional assumption
that all the homomorphisms
let
0 , and
r ^
remark that in the last case,
TT0 (Fi ,xi )
x E Fq
all
s,
Now,
an arbitrary homotopy from
the constant loop, and the constant homotopy of the
s |Fr I 9 weobtain a homotopy from s to a path u(I) c: Fq, u (0 ) = x 1 , and u( 1 ) = x .
map
u: I -+ tl £such that
9.
The Influence of Other
Structures Upon Homotopy Groups 1.
In this subsection we discuss the most elementary
properties of homotopy groups which are due to the presence of an additional, group-like structure, compatible with the topology of the space under consideration. consider is simplicity.
The most important such property we shall
The Case of Topological Groups 2.
I_f
X
is a topological group and
arbitrary path, then the translation for any
r ^ 0,
s: I
X
is an
7rr (X,s(0 )) + tt^(X,s(1))
with the isomorphism induced by the left group [s(1 )][s(0 )]
translation by the element
-1
In fact, there is even a canonical free homotopy from -
spheroid
coincides,
$ € Sph^(X,s(0))
to
[s(1)][s(0)]
1
along
s,
any
given by
((t1 , .. .,tr ) ,t) h- [S (tn ts(0 ) ] ' % ( t 1 ,...,tr ). 3 (COROLLARY). simple spaces.
The components of a topological group are
In particular, the fundamental groups of these
components are Abelian. 4.
If
X
is a topological group, then, besides the
multiplication on the sets
Sph (X,e=e ) defined in 1.1, there is r X another one, resulting from the group operation on X [the product of two
spheroids
€ Sph (X,e)
the
second product makes also sense for
is not even defined. r s 0,
is given by
y*-»■ ( y ) * My ) ] .
r = 0,
Moreover,
when the first product
Obviously, this new multiplication turns
Sphr (X,e)
into a group; the spheroids homotopic to the constant one form
a normal subgroup, and the resulting quotient group equals, as a set, TTr (X,e). XQ
When
r = 0,
is the component of
•nr (X,e)
ir0 (X,e) e.
When
equals the quotient group r £ 1,
where
the new group structure on
coincides with the original one; in fact, given
the formula
X/XQ ,
TTr (tl ^,u (1 ))
T Trr (tl£,v(0 )) --- 2 -- » Trr (ti C,v( 1 )) where the vertical isomorphisms are induced by the transformations x h- xgQ and x >+ xg , commutes. PROOF.
Recall that the canonical right action
tl £ x G -> tl E,
415
is free and its orbits coincide with the fibers of v(t)
lie
in the same fiber, for each
such that
u(t)g(t) = v(t).
homotopy from
Q e
then
h(y,t)g(t)
(y,t)
y ** ^giyigQ
r ^ 0.
Sphr (tl £ ,u (0 ))
to
y
Suppose that
£
c|>.j(y)g
tt^ (tl £ ,s (1 ))
groups
tt(tl£,x)
£
on t l £
We shall call the
r >0
and a set with tl£
s : I + bs £ ,
which covers
we define
Tg :
over
(tl £ ,s (0 ))
Ts~ : “ ^ ( t l ^ s (0 ))
from Lemma 13.
Obviously,
2.1
Therefore, we have produced a local system on
(bs £ ,{tt^ (tl £,b)},{Ts}) ,
s.
(1 ))
n^itl^s
s~
That this is well defined follows
Tgare homomorphisms and satisfy
conditions bs£ ,
which we call the lower local system of the
r-th homotopy groups of the total space of It is clear that the pr £
and
with
along any path
system via
u,
TT^(tl£,b) .
as the translation
(i)-(iii).
along
b € bs £,
r = 0 ) the r-th homotopy group of the space
Given a path
is a free
structure group of
and so we may identify these groups.
and we shall write
€ G
v.
is a principalbundle,
group (which actually is a group for
identity for b,
tl £
g(t)
€ Sph (tl £ ,u(1))
r
(b) ,
resulting
there is a unique
along
induces isomorphisms between the homotopy x £ pr 5
u(t) and
yields a free homotopy from the spheroid
The right canonical action of the —1
Since
Therefore, if h : ir x I
to the spheroid
14.
t €I
£•
£.
local system on
tl£
induced by this
is nothing but the usual local system of the r-th
homotopy groups of
tl£ .
Given a monomorphism the Steenrod G-bundle
£
cp: G -* G'
and
r ^ 0,
into the Steenrod G 1-bundle
every cp-map of £'
induces a
homomorphism of the lower local system of the r-th homotopy groups of tl £
into the corresponding system of
tl £ 1 .
The Homotopy Sequence of a Principal Bundle 15.
Let
K
be a principal G-bundle with base point (F 0 'xo)by the Pair
If
in sequence (12) we replace
is to
canonically homeomorphic to (fq'xq^ v^a ^ ^ x 0 ^ an it2 (tl S,x0 )
TT1 (tl 5,x0 )
pr •*"»TT2 (bs £,bQ ) —
TT1 (bs £,bQ ) — 1T0 (tl 5 ,x0 ) -Pr
(bQ = pr £ (xQ ) ) .
(G,e=eQ )
TT0 (G,e)
(G,e) •
7tq (bs 5»b0 ) ---► 1
xQ € tl £. [which 1
-in*-> (13)
416
7T0 (G,e)
Recall that is Abelian (see 3).
It is immediate that
a group homomorphism. (see 5 ),
TTr (G,e)
(see 3.3) and action
while
G
= comp(tl£) , tt
e; see 4.
Moreover,
tt^ (bs £ ,b^ )
tl £
The
acts similarly on both (see 14).
is
G
G
tt
clear that the homomorphisms
on
TTgitl^Xg) =
on tt^ ( 1 1 £ ,x^ ) .
tt^ (G,e )
as the quotient group of
i\^ (bs £ ,bQ
The canonical right
induces a right action of
action of this component on
Finally, it is
7iQ(G,e)
acts from the right on
and thus a right action of
^ (G ,e )
7T^(G,e)
A: tt^ (bs £ ,bg )
TT^iG/e)
tt (tl£,xQ) = Trr (tl£,b0)
tl £ x
[We regard
is a group(see 4) and that
by the component of
^ (11 £ ,x^ ) is identical.] in*/ pr*,
and
A
are
compatible with the above actions, as required in Definition 5.11. Consequently, G-bundle
^
(13) is a Ti-sequence, called the homotopy sequence of the with base point
Obviously, pr
x^. 7TQ (bs£;,b0) is an epimorphism,
: tTq (tl £ ,xQ )
and the partition of
tTq
exactly
Therefore, sequence (13) is exact.
zer(pr ^ ) .
(tl £ ,x^ )into the orbits of
Given a monomorphism principal G f-bundle G-bundle
£
£f
tp: G 1 -> G,
with base point
with base point
x^ £ tl £ ,
every cp-map £ tl £ '
such that
induces a homomorphism of the homotopy sequence of sequence of
tt^ (G ,e )
f
is
of the
into the principal tlf(x^) = x^,
£ 1
into the homotopy
£•
10.
Alternative Descriptions of the Homotopy Groups
1. The spheroid DS ° ID £ Sph^(Sr ,ort^) (see 1.2.8 .9) is called the fundamental spheroid of the sphere Sr , denoted IS, and we let
sphr
denote the
spheroid
element of
7rr (Sr ,ort ) that it
ID £ Sph^(Dr ,Sr \ort^)
of the ball Dr , that it defines.
and
Obviously, We let
we let
Sph^(X,x^)
denote the whence
(Sr ,ort1)
defineIS# : Sph°(X,xQ)
+ Shpr (X,xQ)
tt
r (Dr ,Sr ~ 1,ort )
9(kug^) = sph^_^.
into the pointed space by
IS^()
=
(X,x ),
and
o IS. Clearly,
is invertible, and 1.3.7 . 6 implies that two maps, 0
4>,ip £ Sph^ (X,Xq) ,
IS ({¡i)
elementof
denote the set of all continuous maps
from the pointed space
this map
The
is called the fundamental spheroid
kug^
9 (ID) = IS,
defines.
are
are homotopic if and only if the spheroids
homotopic.
u
IS () ,
Consequently, replacing our "cubic" spheroids
417
and their homotopies by the "spheric" spheroids from
Sph°(X,x0 )
and
their homotopies, we are led to an equivalent description of the set TTr (X,xQ) . It is readily seen that the identity spheroid to the class spheroid
s ph^
and that the element of
f: (S^ort^) If
Sphr (X,XQ)
r £ 1, to
(X,xQ ) then
IS
Sph^(X,XQ)
u
equals
ir^iX^^)
id Sr
belongs
given by a
f*(sph ).
transfers the multiplication in
The resulting multiplication in
may also be described directly:
Spli^iX^^)
the product
: (Sr ,ort^) = (s\ort^) 0 ... ® (s\ort^) + (X,Xg) of the spheroids is given by
cf>,ip: (S^ort^)
= (S1,ort ) ® ... 0 (S^ort^)
(X,xQ)
2
(y1 , Y 2 ’ • ••'Yr > ' ( Y
1
* Y 2
'
•
•
*
,
y
r
)
if
i m y 1 ^ 0, (14;
=
2
^ (y1 ' Y 2 '*““ 'yr * '
if
i m y i ^ °'
where y-| /y 2 * •••/yr are complex numbers of modulus 1 , and im denotes the imaginary part. The multiplication that this operation induces on
tt^ îX jX q )
coincides with the existing one.
One can use
(14) to study directly the homotopy properties of the multiplication in Sph^(X,Xg) tt^ Î ^ X q )
and get an independent description of the homotopy groups in the language of
spheric spheroids.
It is particularly simple to describe in this language the spheroid spheroid
(f) ^ = (IS^) ^ ( [IS^ (cj))] ^) , that is, the inverse of the O —1 0 € Sph^ (X,Xq): (£> (x^ ,x^ ,x^ ^ •,x^^^ ) ~ x -j/—^2 '^3 '***' 3.
Let
Sph^(X ,A ,X q )
(Dr ,Sr _ 1 ,ort ) -> (X,A, xQ ) , by
u
ID ( = (S1 ,ort^) ® ... ® (S1 ,ort^)
(1,1) ■+ (X,Xq ),
formula (14), where Y ‘ • ’ Yr --\ are comPlex numbers of modulus 1 and yr G I, defines a map ip: (Dr ,ort1) (X,xn ), and this map
418
belongs to
Sph°(X,A,xQ) -1
absolute case, spheroid
7Tr (Sphg (X,xQ ),const) s > 0,
Cub
then the multiplication in
which arises from the fact that element
is transferred by
in the homotopy sequence of the
£ = (C(1 ,0;X ,xQ ),ab C ( [in:Fr I -> I] ,id) ,X =C(Fr 1 ,0;X,xQ )) f
Serre bundle
whose fiber over the point
Xq
is
Sph^(X,XQ>.
That
£
is a Serre
bundle follows from 4.1.4.2.
1. that
d^,...,dm
r d^ , ...,d^ c D ,
g(C) c A, ^ map
Let
t±
Additional Theorems
where -----
be pairwise disjoint balls in IR O g E Sph^ (X,A, x^)
and let
C = Dr \ Um „ Intd. . 1 =1 l
(y) = (center of
d^) + (radius of
the segments joining the points contained in Y
C. ■
(T
Then, Y ^ I T
1
where
for
s^
is the path In
i = 1,...,m. d 1 ,...,dm
.: Dr + Dr l
d^)y.
denote the ----------
Suppose further that
t^(ort^) , . . . , ( o r )
T2 )...(T
to
ort^
are
V
'
m and
represented by the spheroids and
t
r > 2,
2
y € irr (X,A,x0)
Let
such
be a spheroid with
-
11.
A
y^ 6 irr (X, A ^ o t ^ (ort1) ) g
and
given by
g °
are the elements
6 Sph^(X,A, go-t ^ (ort^ ) ) ,
s^(t) = g ((1-t)
The same conclusion holds true for
(ort^ ) + tort^) ,
r = 2,
provided
are indexed naturally, i.e., each of the 2 -frames
(xi (ort1) - ort 1 ,xi+ 1 (ort1) - ort^)
defines the natural orientation
of* IR . PROOF.
We proceed by inductionon
remarks, denoting by t the (rectilinear) path ¿^(t) = (1 - t ) ( o r t 1) + t o r t 1 .
m.
We make
two preliminary
in C given
by
421
First remark: for given d„,...,d , it suffices to prove the r 1 m theorem when (X,A,x0> = (D , C , o r t ^ ) , g = rel id D , and si = l ± . Indeed, rel id D
g*: r
(Dr ,C ,ort ) -+ iTr (X,A,XQ)
into
y,
translated along
while it takes the class of the spheroid
T y.. s. 1 l Second remark: for a given
£., 1
into
theorem for a standard choice of 1 /2 m
radius
takes the class of the spheroid
centered at
m,
it suffices to prove the
d^,...,d^,
namely, for the balls of
2 L-J-Ort0 , m--^ort0 , ..., — ort., -— —ort0 . m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2
To see this, consider, along with these standard balls and the corresponding
C,
arbitrary balls
d*,...,d^
satisfying the
conditions of the theorem, with the corresponding C 1, t !, £!. Clearly, r r r1 there exists a continuous map h: D D , which is S -homotopic to id Dr
and satisfies h(C) c= C ', h o t. = t!, and h o I . = £!. Then r r 1 1 1 1 rel h* : tt^.(D ,C,ort^) -* tt^ (D ,C*,ort^) takes the class of the spheroid id D
r
T^f
into the class
of id D
translated along
,
r
,while taking
the class of the spheroid
into the class of the spheroid
i = 1 ,...,m.
translated along
Now to our induction. trivial; consider
m
The cases
= 2.By our remarks,
m = 0
and
m = 1
are
we may assume that
(X,A, X q ) = (Dr ,C,ort ) , g = id, and are the standard b a l l s (with radius 1/4 and centers ort^/2 and -ort2 /2). Let p denote r the rotation of D by an angle
t
m = 2,
d 1 f...,dm
and
be the ball of radius
„ ,d cd) ,
m-1
As in the case
t.
Since
to the paths
Z, u, t
m- 1
and
(ort.)
v to
1
We let theproducts
/
= Ti /1 r - - Tim —2V t ' V . - i V . ' -
1161
Now apply the theorem, first for the case of two factors, and then for the case of ’. V i V ,
m- 1
factors, to conclude that
= s-
(17)
and T£ , V " T f ,Tm- 2 T 6 1 m- 2
= Y-
(,8> r (X,A,xQ) = (D ,C,t (ort ))
(In the first case, the theorem is applied to g = t, take
(d ) ,t 1 (d ) , while in the second case we m- I m (X,A,Xq) = (Dr ,C,ort1), g = id, and the balls d ^ ,...,d^_ 2 ,d ) .
At last,
and the balls
(16),
t
—
1
—
(17), and (18) yield (15).
2.
Let
x £ X, Xq £ Xq, x^ E X^ ,... some
r
PROOF. 27
I
bepoints
where
suchthat
27
I
X
X^,
are
-spaces, and le
imm^(x^) = x.
If for
^r ^Xk + 1 'Xk + 1 ^
all the homomorphisms
isomorphism, then so are ' r) . spheroid
X = lim (X^.,c^) ,
(imm, )+ ..: tt_ (Xn_,x^) jc r r K. k.
tt
(X,x) r
(with the
are same
Notice that, according to Theorem 1.2.4.5, every may be expressed as the composition of a spheroid
with the embedding imm, , for 1 large enough; similarly, r every homotopy I * I -> X is the composition of some homotopy 27
I
+ X..
x I > X^
(imm^.)*
with
imm^,
for
1
large enough.
Now the fact that
are epimorphisms and monomorphisms is seen to be a consequence
of the analogous properties of the compositions
423
° (4>l-2 )*r ° •••
{h - l ] * r
12. 1.
Let
°
(V * r :V
W
" V
W
*
Exercises
(X,Xq ) be a pointed
given a right group-action of
space and suppose that there is
tt^(X,Xq ) on
exists a local system of groups,
a group
(X,{G },{T }), x s
G.
Show
with
that
G = G, xQ
there which
determines the given action. 2.
Let
and suppose that
(X,A) X
be a
cellular pair with base point x^ £
is countable.
Show that all the groups
A,
7Tr (X,A,XQ)
are countable. 3.
Let
(X,A)
be a
and suppose that the groups generated
(for all
4. tl ^
Let
tt^ (X /Xq )
and
r ^ 1). Show that if
7Tr (X,A,XQ)
the groups
cellular pair with base point x^ £
£
with r ^ 2
^ ( A ^ q) X
are finitely
is simply connected, then
are also finitely generated.
be a Serre bundle, and let
E
be a subspace of
such that
any point
A,
(E,pr5 l^fbs 5) is also a Serre bundle. I-k x £ E and any r ^ 1
in* : Tir (pr5 1 (pr ^ (x) ) ,pr 5
1(pr £ (x) )flE,x) +
Show that for
TTr (tl£,E,x)
is an isomorphism. 5.
Show that if the base of a covering is k-simple, then its
total space is also k-simple. 6.
Let
cub,buc :
r > 0 tt
IT •s
and
s > 0.
(X,xn) -* u
tt
r
differ only by the constant factor
Show that the homomorphisms
(Sph (X ,xn ),const) s
ITs (-1 )
u
424
§2.
THE HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF
SPHERES AND OF CLASSICAL MANIFOLDS
1.
Suspension in the Homotopy Groups of Spheres
1. spheroid
6 £ Sph^iXjXp)
The suspension of a spheroid
su £ Sphr + 1 (su (X,xQ) ,bp) ,
= pr (0 (t1 ,...,tr ) ,tr+ 1) ,
where
given by
is the
su (t.j / ,• .• .• ./ ,tr + 11 ) = r+
pr = [pr: X x I -+ su(X,xQ )].
Obviously,
suspensions of homotopic spheroids are homotopic, the suspension of the product of two spheroids of positive dimensions equals the product of their suspensions, and the suspension of the constant spheroid is again the constant spheroid. homomorphism
Consequently, the mapping
Trr (X,XQ) ->
(su (X,
) ,bp) ,
^ su
for any
yields a
r ^ 0.
homomorphism is also called suspension and is denoted by
This
su.
Recall that we have already defined the suspension of a continuous map on two occasions: in 1 .2 .6 .2 , for maps of topological spaces, and in 1.2.8 .5, for maps of pointed topological spaces.
The
present, third definition, is more special; it concerns maps from the IT pair (I ,FrI ) into pointed spaces, and ha^ no intersection with the previous ones.
At the same time, it is compatible with the second
definition, in the sense that we may obtain the third definition from the latter by shifting from spheric spheroids to cubic ones. precisely, the spheroids in
Sph^(X,x^),
More
being maps between pointed
spaces, have suspensions in the sense of 1 .2 .8 .5, and the diagram
Sphr (X,Xq) ----- > Sphr + 1 (su(X,xQ),bp) commutes. Let us add two important, yet obvious remarks. f: (X,xQ) + (Y,yQ)
Firstly, if
is continuous, then the diagram
+ T Sph 1 (su (X ,xQ ),bp)
(X,xQ)
Namely, every spheroid
$ £ Sphr (X,xQ)
by the composition
lp „ Sphr (X,xQ) ---- > Sphr (Sph1 (su(X,xQ ),bp),const) —Cub > Sphr +1 (su(X,xQ),bp) (see 1.10.6), and hence the homomorphism may be defined as
su = cub o lp^
(to check this facts is routine).
A new description of the homomorphism su(X,xQ)
as the quotient space of the cone
(which is identified with (4> (t^
emerges if we view (p
by its base
£ Sphr (X,xQ ),
defined as
The latter is taken into
su SO(n).
The triviality of the groups tt2
r = n-1 .
for
TZ>2
generated by the class of the inclusion is trivial for all
Tr^(SO(n))
and
tt3 (SO(4))
(S0(2).),
tt^
SOU))
tt-^ (SO
(2 ) ),
~ 7L ,
~ Z2 0 Z2 all result
is
440
from the equalities
SO(3) = IRP3 ,
SO(2) = s \
SO(4) = ]RP3
and
x
(see 3.2.1.2, 3.2.3.1, and 3.2.3.3), and Theorems 2.2, 2.7, and 5.1. The rest is a consequence of the honotopy sequence of the bundle (SO(n+1),pr ,sn ) 2.
with base point
The inclusion homomorphism
isomorphism for
r £ 2n-1
is isomorphic to
inclusion
S 1 = U (1) -* U(n).
inclusion
= id
tt
(LJ (n))
and an epimorphism for
TT^(U(n))
is trivial, while
see 4. 6 .1.4.
id G SO(n+1);
2Z
Tr^(U(n))
ffr (U(n+1)) r
= 2n.
If
n ^ 1,
and is generated by the class of TT2 (U(n))
is trivial for all
is Isomorphic to
homomorphism Tr^(U(n))
ZZ
Tr^(SO(2n))
for all
is an the
n. tt^(U(1) n ^ 2.
is epimorphic
The
for all
n.
These are corollaries of the equalities [in: U (1)S O (2)] = 1 3 and U(2) = S x S , and of the homotopy sequence of the bundle
(U (n+1),pr,S2n+^) 3.
with base point
id € U(n+1);
The inclusion homomorphism
an isomorphism for particular, if
r £ 4n+1
r £ 5
and
see 4. 6 .1.4.
(Sp (n )) ^ ^(Spfn+I))
and an epimorphism for n ^ 1,
Tr^(Sp(n))
r = 4n+2.
is In
is isomorphic to
irr (Sp(1 )=S3) . This can be seen from the homotopy sequence of the bundle (Sp(n+1),pr,S4n+3)
with base point
id € Sp(n+1);
see 4. 6 .1.4.
Stabilization 4.
Theorems 1-3 show that for
5 1 , each series ofgroups
r
Trr (SO(1)) -+ Tir (SO (2) ) ■+ tt^ (SO (3) )
...,
Trr (U(1)) + Trr (U(2)) -*■ Trr (U(3)) - ..., irr (Sp(1)) -> 7Tr (Sp (2) ) + irr (Sp (3) ) -> ..., stabilizes:
the first one, starting with
withTTr (U ([r+2)/2] )) , groups 7Tr (SO(n)) rrr (Sp (n) ) by
with
irr (SO),
tt1 (SO) s 2Z ,
and
with
the third one, with n > r+2,
n > [(r+2)/4]
fTr (u),
and
tt2 (SO) = 0,
By Theorem 2, Theorem 3,
(U) = ZZ
TTr (U(n))
ir^Sp), and ,
direct meaning:
the second one,
tt(Sp( [(r+2)/4] ) ) with
.
n 5 [(r+2)/2],
The and
are said to be stable, and are denoted respectively.
tt2 (u) = 0, and
tt^JSO),
By Theorem 1,
ir3 (SO) s (a © ZZ)/ (cyclic subgroup).
(Sp) = 0, Tt2 (Sp) = 0, The notations
i\^ (SO (r+2)) ,
and
tt^ (U)
,
tt (U) s a .
Finally, by
tt3 (Sp) = ZZ . and
TTr (Sp)
have also a
they represent the ordinary r-th homotopy groups of the
441
limit spaces
SO = limSO(n) ,
U = limU(n) ,
and
Sp = limSp(n) ,
respectively (see 1 .1 1 .2 ).
Information 5.
The homotopy groups
been explicitly computed. isomorphisms
Namely, for any
TTr (SO) -* TTr+8 (SO),
tvr (U ) -> TTr + 2 (U) ,
tt^SO), r i 1
2
TTr (SO)
ffi2 0
TTr (Sp)
3
0
a
0
2Z
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
7L
*2
*2
0
7L
^(Sp)
and
and the first seven homotopy groups of
1
and
there are canonical
7Tr (Sp) -+ TTr +8 (Sp) ,
together with the first two homotopy groups of following tables.
r
irr (U),
U
SO
and
Sp,
are displayed in the
8
S 2
r
1
2
7Tr (U)
7L
0
0
For a proof, see [17]. There are also many unstable homotopy groups of the manifolds SO(n),
U(n),
TT2n^U ^n ^
and
" ffin! '
Sp(n)
which have been computed.
TT4n +2^S p ^n ^
71 a l0 (Sp(n) ) = Z20 r / 0
4n+ z Z [ [zn +1 ) !J for the proofs, see [7].
“ S (2n+1)!
for
7.
n
odd.
for
n
For example, even' and
For details and references
The Homotopy Groups
of Stiefel Manifolds and Spaces 1 (LEMMA). manifold
V(n,k)
(V (n+1 ,k+1 ) )
+
r = n- 1 ; and if
Let
is an isomorphism forr < n-1 n
tt
(3HV(n,k))
and
(CV (n ,k )
and
3HV (n ,k )
and an epimorphism for + tt^ CHV (n+1 ,k+1 ) )
an epimorphism for
are all .simple.
n (■ 7Tn K, (V(n,k))
The manifold
TT2 n- 2 k +1 of the inclusion
(V(n-k+1,1)) = TTr (Sn_k)
) = irn_k (V (n-k + 1 ,1 ) ) -»• t
n-k
tt^ (S 2n
■+ tt^ (CCV (n,k) ) 4.
= 0,
^ (V (n-k + 2 ,2 )) ->
even and an epimorphism for
(CV (n ,k )
is
n-k
odd.
2 (n-k)-connected .
is isomorphic to 7L and is generated by the class S2n ^k+1 = £v(n-k+1,1) -+ (CV(n,k).
This is a corollary of Lemma 1 : when sequence
r < n-k,
all the maps are isomorphisms, except for the firs~
which is an isomorphism for 3.
when
r £ 2n-2k+1 ,
in the
^k+1) = tt^ (EV (n-k+1 ,1) ) -+ tt^ ((CV (n-k+2 ,2)) ->■... -*
all the arrows are isomorphisms. The manifold
lV(n,k)
is (4n-4k +2)-connected.
tt-n—4k+3
(n 'k) ) is isomorphic to ZZ and is generated by the class 4n —4k + 3 of the inclusion S = HHV (n-k+1 ,1) HV(n,k) . This is also a corollary of Lemma 1 : (actually, if
r
£ 4n-4k+5),
if
then in the sequence
= TTr №V(n-k+1 ,1 )) -+ TTr (lV(n-k+2,2) ) +
...
r £ 4n-4k +3 tt^ (S
4 r, — 4 V + 7
TTr (H V (n ,k ))
) =
all the
arrows are isomorphisms. 5. as
The spaces
V(°°,k)
and
,k)
G+ (n,k),
G(°°,k),
(CG(n,k),
G (°°,k) ,
(EG(°°,k)
= lim (IHG (n,k) ,in : 3HG(n,k) -> IHG(n+1,k))
is reduced to the computation of the homotopy groups of the corresponding classical groups. thus
n
Grassman manifolds and spaces are taken care of together, and may also take the value «>. 2.
If
isomornhic to tt
k > 0
and
_^(SO(k)),
(G (n ,k) )
0 < r < n-k,
then
tt
(G+ (n,k))
is
and the inclusion homomorphism is an isomorphism for all
TTr n.
The first claim results from Theorems 7.2 and 7.5, and the homotopy sequence of the bundle (V(n,k),pr,G (n,k)), k n 4.6 .1.4, with the inclusion IR -+ 3R as base point
defined in The second claim
results from the commutativity of the diagram A
Tir (G+ (n,k)
(so(k))
in* = id
in. 77 r
< G +
( n l
' k )
^r_1 (so(k))
)
(see 1 .8 .6 ] tt
to
(G(n,k)),
(G+ (n,k)).
tt
and to
ZS,
tt^
for
Since
with
(G(n,k) )
0 < k < n, G (2,1)
r ^ 2,
and
0 < k < n
for
7L
is isomorphic to
is isomorphic n - 2,
1,
n > 3. ,1
is homeomorphic to
S',
Theorem 2.2 yields
^ (G (2 ,1 ) = Z5 . If we now apply Theorem 1.8.12 to the canonical two-sheeted covering (G_£n,k ) ,pr ,G (n,k )) , the rest is plain. tt
4. to
If 0 < r < 2n-2k+1,
TTr ^(U (k )), and
then
tt^ ((EG (n ,k))
the inclusion homomorphism
is an isomorphism for all
is isomorphic
tt^.((EG (n ,k)
) -*•TTr ({CG(nf,k) )
n 1 > n.
The proof repeats that of Theorem 2, with obvious changes. 5. to
ttr ^(Sp (k)
I_f 0 < r < 4n-4k+3, ),
and the inclusion
then
tt^
(3HG (n,k ))
homomorphism
is an isomorphism for all
is isomorphic
tt^_(3HG (n,k)
n* > n.
) -*
444
Again, the proof repeats that of Theorem 2, with obvious changes.
9. 1.
Let
q
Exercises
= 2,4,8,
Show that for any integer
pr: S 2 q ~ 1 -*Sq
and let
be the Hopf map.
k 2
(k sphg )
o pr*(sph2g_1) = k pr* (sph2g-1) .
2.
that for any positive integer
Show
n,
lRPn
is
(n+1 )-simple. 3.
Let
n
be even and
k
be odd.
Show that G(n,k)
4.
Let
3
5.
Show that the inclusion homomorphisms
is
simple. £ n £ 00.Show that
7rr (SO(3)) -+ 7Tr (SO (4 )) , 7Tr (U(1)) + TTr (U(2)),
G(n,2)
is not
2-simple.
Tir (S0(7)) -Trr (S0(8)),
7Tr (U (3) ) ->■ TTr (U(4))f
and TTr (Sp(1 )) + 77^ (Sp(2) ) are monomorphic for any integer 6.
k-frame n of CE , TT2n-2k+1
Consider the map
(v1,...,v )
which takes each
En into the frame (v1fiv ,...,v ,iv, ,v ) 2n “1 .K l X. IR . Show that the homomorphism k+1 (V(2n,2k-1))
generator indicated in 7.3 of indicated in 7.2 of
(EV(n,k) -+ V(2n,2k-1)
of
considered as (n,k)) ■> *
r.
induced by this map takes the
Tr2n-2k+1
Tr2n-2k + 1 (V (2n ,2k-1 )) .
•
into the generator
445
§3.
HOMOTOPY GROUPS OF CELLULAR SPACES
1.
The Homotopy Groups
of One-dimensional Cellular Spaces 1. bouquet
In this subsection we compute the homotopy groups of a
B =
{S^=S
,ort^) of circles.
constructed from an arbitrary family,
As usual, the base point
bp
will be the
center of the bouquet. To simplify the exposition, we let loop defined by the inclusion imm^
o
IS: I + B,
respectively.
imm^: S
u
B,
and
i.e.,
and the homotopy class of
u ,
a
denote the
the loop i.e.,
imm *(sph^),
A loop will be referred to as standard if it is of the
(...((v.v0 )v0) ...v .)v , where each of the factors v.,...,v I Z o n-In _^ I n is either one of the loops u or one of their inverses u and, in 1 y y addition, two loops u , u^ with the same \i are not allowed to be form
adjacent.
The case
n
the constant loop with 2 (LEMMA).
= 0 is
not excluded: then, the product is simply
origin bp. There
is a covering
(B~,p,B) with the following
two properties: (i)
B~
(ii) some point Fq ,
and
the paths which cover standard loops and originate at
x^ Fq
is contractible;
of the fiber
set M.
We equip
form the bouquet A = V
xGF(M).
(bp)
end at distinct points of
Let us agree to denote by
group generated by the A
-1
is exhausted by the ends of these paths.
PROOF. topology,
Fq = p
Further, let
p
GF(M),
GF(M)
(D^ =E)1 ,0) ,
with the discrete and then the product
be the partition of
pairs { (imm (1),g),(imm (-1),gy)} the points which do not appear
with
as usual, the free
y G M
A x GF(M)
into the
and g G GF(M),
in any of these pairs, and denote
and by
p
the composition pr A x GF(M) --- -— ► A Then
p
is obviously constant on the elements of B~ = [ Ax GF(M)]/p,
where
a^
V (DS = DS) U u------ ► B. p. Now set
p= [factp : B~ + B] ,
is the center of the bouquet
A,
xQ = pr(aQ ,e),
e = eQp (m )'
anc^
446
pr = [pr: A x GF(M) -► B~] . a covering with
Then it is readily seen that
F q = pr(a^ x GF(M))
The contractibility of in fact, the subspaces
B~
and
(B~,p,B)
is
€ Fq .
follows from Lemma 2.3.3.4:
pr(A x [GF (M) \ GF^_^ (M)])
of
B ,
where
GF (Ml is the part of GF(M) consisting of words of length £ n, n satisfy the conditions of this lemma. The path with origin X q which covers the standard path
(...(u
G1 e 2
u
En
)...)u y2 yn
[e
G 1 G2 en at the point pr(a^,g), with g = y^ y 2 ***^n * of these paths are pairwise distinct and exhaust
3. tt^ (B ,bp)
The groups
(B )
with
is a free group with free generators
= ± 1 ],
,...,e
ends
Clearly, the ends of Fq. r > 1
are trivial, whereas
a .
The proof is based on Lemma 2 and uses the same notation. Since
B~
is contractible, all its homotopy groups are trivial, and
hence so are the groups
tt (B)
A:
is invertible (see 1.8.12).
tt
^ (B,bp)
tI q
invertibility of
(Fq , x A
q )
with
r > 1;
moreover, the map Combining the
with property (ii) of the covering
(B ,p,B),
we
see that the homotopy classes of the standard loops are pairwise distinct and exhaust group with generators 4.
TT^(B,bp). a ,
Consequently,
Tr^(B,bp)
is a free
y £ M.
The fundamental group of a connected one-dimensional
cellular space is free, whereas its higher homotopy groups are trivial. This is a corollary of Theorem 3, because every connected one-dimensional cellular space is homotopy equivalent to a bouquet of circles (see 2 .3.3.6 ).
2.
The Effect of Attaching Balls
1. Let X = A topological space, and cp
[J_____ (Dy= D^+ ^ )] / where A is a connected is a continuous mao 1 I ^W (S = S k ) -> A -*— Ly£M y (see 2.3.2.1), and let X q € A. In this subsection we exhibit a system of generators for the group tt (X,A,xn) [ k ^ 1 ] . K+1 u We remark that the homotopy groups trivial (see 2.3.2.1) , whereas for
irr (X,A)
r > k+1, tt^_(X,A)
more complicated object: in the simplest case, when and the family irr (Sk + 1 ) .
{D }
consists of a single ball,
In Theorem 2 below,
f
with
r $k
are
is already a much A
is just a point
tt (X,A)
equals
denotes the composite map
447
t_,1 m D ------- | | D
imm U— X,
J— -V V
€ 'fTk + 1 (X, A, f (ort1 ))
and
'
is the
class of the spheroid
fy • ’ (Dk + 1 ,Sk ,ort1) -+(X,A,f (ort1 )) . 2. Let an(3 v1
: I ->• A k ^ 1,
Xq.I_f
by the classes
be an arbitrary path then nk = Tw
usual sense, by the classes
(X,A,xQ) is generated
in ±1 3 - J~j [T^ _ (3y )]
the class
[i.e., it is generated, in the
0). €
(yi € M,
and similarity transformations
, ...,a
the point of
d ,...,d
d^ having
ske,_X, with k 5 1, then tt_(X,A) is trivial for jC r Moreover, TTk + 1 (X,A,xQ) is generated over tt^ (A,xq ) by
the classes of the characteristic maps of the (k+1)-cells in X ^ A (regarded as spheroids), translated to xQ along arbitrary paths. The inclusion homomorphism tt (a,x„) tt is an isomorphism for ----------------1-----r 0 r (x,xn) 0 -----------*-------r £ k- 1 and an epimorphism for r = k ; the kernel of the latter is generated over the
tt
^ (A,Xg)
by the classes of the attaching spheroids of
(k+1)-cells in X ^ A ,
translated to
xQ
along arbitrary paths.
When
and 3.
X ^ A c ske, all these assertions follow from 1, 2, k+ 1 The general case is reduced to this special situation by
Theorem 2.3 .2 .4 .
3. The Fundamental Group of a Cellular Space 1.
In this subsection we pressenti an effective method for
computing the fundamental group of a cellular space possessing a single 0-cell.
This last condition is not a serious limitation, since, firstly,
it is fulfilled in the most important cases and, secondly, every connected space can be transformed, by taking a rather simple quotient, into a homotopy equivalent space which meets our requirement (see Subsection 2.3.3).
It is by no means difficult to generalize the computation scheme
to arbitrary cellular spaces; however, the exposition is cumbersome. 2. Let Since
Xq
X
be a cellular space with a single 0-cell
isalso the unique 0-cell of
homeomorphic to a bouquet of circles.
ske^X,
this skeleton
Consequently,
tt
xQ . is
^ (ske ^X ,xQ)
is
the free group generated by the homotopy classes of the characteristic loops, i.e., of the characteristic maps of the 1 -cells (see 1 .3 ). According to 2.4,
in*: 7^ (ske1 X ,xQ )
epimorphism whose kernel is generated over
t^
tt (X,xQ ) (ske X,xq)
classes of the attaching maps of the 2-cells of along arbitrary paths.
In our case,
inner automorphisms, and hence of
tt1
tt
Kerin*
X,
1 (ske 1X ,x )
is an by the homotopy
translated to
xQ
acts as a group of
is the smallest normal subgroup
(X,xQ ) containing the above elements.
Thus, the fundamental group
that we want to compute is canonically isomorphic to the quotient group of tt^(s k e X ,X q ) by this normal subgroup.
449
3.
1
The discussion above
shows
that in order to compute
) i1: suffices to know the 1-skeleton of X and the attaching maps of the 2-cells of X. Given these data, we can exhibit a system
tt
( X
' x q
of generators and relations for
tt ^
( X ,
x
to each 1-cell corresponds
q ):
a generator, namely the class of the respective characteristic loop; each 2 -cells defines a relation, namely that the class of the attaching map of the given 2 -cell, when translated to
Xq
and expressed in terms
of generators, must be equal to the identity element of
tt^(X,Xq).
In
a very simplified fashion, we may say that a set of generators of tt^(X,Xq)
consists of the 1-cells of
X,
while a system of relations
consists of the 2 -cells. We remark that the system of relations is not entirely canonical, because it depends upon the choice of the paths along which we do the translation;
consequently, the left-hand sides of the relations
are determined only up to conjugation. 4 (COROLLARY).
The fundamental group of a finite connected
cellular space has a presentation given by a finite number of generators and relations.
An Additional Theorem 5.
If
A
and
B
are subspaces of the topological space
with inclusions
and
xQ G A H B,
morphism
then the rule
(A,xq ) *
TT
tt
^
(B ,xQ )
+
a * 3 -> i^(a)j^(6 ) TT1
(X,xQ )
[
*
denotes the free product],
whose kernel contains all the elements of the form with
6 €
(A il B,xQ ) .
tt
[ tt
where tt1
(A,xQ ) *
vk(X,A,B,xQ)
(A,xq)
*
tt
^ (B, X
q
)
tt1
defines a homo i*(
r
)
a
^
r
But we have already proved that the upper that
( B 1 ,bp)
TT
>TY(B,bp)
Imm
also lies in the image of our (lower)
c
.
is an isomorphism, so Imm.
Therefore, the
latter is an epimorphism and this, combined with Theorem 4, implies that Imm
and
Pr 6
are isomorphisms. (COROLLARY).
constructed from a family groups ^(B) with r < n
Let
B
be a bouquet of n-dimensional spheres,
= Sn ,orti ) H n ^ 2 , then the are trivial, whereas 71^(3,bp) is a free
Abelian group with free generators
6.
imm^*(sphn ).
The Homotopy Groups
of a k-Connected Cellular Pair 1 (ALGEBRAIC LEMMA).
Consider the following commutative
diagram of groups and homomorphisms □ — aI
1—
n —s
>□ I6
456
If
a, 6 ,
and
y
Ker 6
epimorphic,
PROOF. 6
morphic, also that
Ker 6 ^ a(Ker y) /
are epimorphic and = a(Ker y),
a, 6
Ker 6 c y(Ker a) •
Y(Kera) c: Ker 6. Let us verify that
and
d £ Ker 6 .
Pick
are epi
The commutativity of the diagram implies
Ker 6
alKery) c
(again by commutativity), whence
If
d = y(a) , then
£ Ker 6
a(a)
a(a) € a(Ker y ) / i.e., there is -
c £ Ker y
such that
and we have 2. If
A
a(c) =a(a).
d = y (a) Let
Thelast equality yields
(X,A)
be a cellular pair with base point r £ k,
pr*: TTk + 1 (X,A,xQ) •+(X/A,pr (xQ))
tt
(X,A) = 0,
k = 0,
1
CKera,
for k ^
^ (X,A,x^ )
a £ ^ + 1 (X,A,Xq)
(T^a)a ^ with
and
xQ £ A.
then
is epimorphic, and
is the smallest subgroup of
"ratios"
ac
= Y(ac ^) £ y (Ker a) .
is connected and, for
Ker pr*
is
Ker 6 = Y(Ker a) .
and
Since the diagram is commutative and
is epimorphic.
6
then
1
containing all the
o £
(A,x^) . For
the situation is described by the commutativediagram tt1
(A,
x q
)
ln*
> tt 1 ( X
,xQ)
>
tt^
X
jA
^
q
)
Pr< •n1 (X/A, pr (Xq ) ) , where
abs pr*
and
rel*
are also epimorphic, and
the smallest normal subgroup of
Tr^(X,xQ)
Ker(abspr*)
which contains
is
Ker rel*
=
= Im in* . (This theorem will be generalized in the next section; see 4.3.14.) PROOF OF THE CASE
k ^ 1.
Suppose first that
only of (k+1)-cells and, as a consequence, -dimensional spheres.
For each cell
X/A
X \ A
consists
is a bouquet of (k+1)-
e £ X \ A,
consider the homotopy
class of its characteristic map (viewed as a spheroid of the pair and translate it to by
a^.
Set
a £ t^(A,x0 ) Theorem 5.6,
xn , 0
denoting the resulting element of ^
r
Be = pr*(ae ).By Theorem 2.4, the classes form a system of generators of the classes
of the Abelian group
B0
ti,
k+1
(X,A)), (X,A,x ) 0
T0ae with
Trk+^ (X,A,xQ ) , and by
form a system of independent generators
7Tk+ ^ (X/A,pr (x ) ) .
Moreover, it is obvious that
Pr* (Tga ) = Pr*(a) for all a € Trk+ 1 (X,A, x Q) and o e u (A,x ) , and these facts will suffice to complete the proof of the theorem for k > 1.
Since
Se = pr*(ote )generate
Trk + 1 (X/A,pr (x )) ,
pr* is epi
pr*(T o cx) _ = pr. we have (Tact)cx- 1 G Ker L pr,. - * (a), * Let us show that the ratios (Toa)a generate Ker pr* . If k > 1
morphic.
Further, since
457
and the class
T1 l 1, (e ,a)
£
A( e, a ) j
nonzero integers for any cell
e
(T a
a e
)
X ( e , a)
belongs to
(because
[with only a finite number of Ker pr* ,
pr* (a)
Y [Y X(e,a)]B Le La e
£ A( e; a) = 0
then o:
and thus
■ “1 -iÀ (e ,a ) T # , [ (T a a e ) a e '] When k = 1, this argument is valid 1( e , a) only after we factor (X,A,Xq ) by its commutator subgroup, and it k +1 only demonstrates that every element of Ker pr* is a product of the above form multiplied by some commutators. However, since in rr2 (X,A,xq) each commutator y ^ 6y6 ^ equals (see 1.4.7), (T 9 Y 6) 6 1 -1 we obtain again the desired decomposition of £ into ratios (T a)a 5 =
1
a
In the general situation, we first transform k-connected pair, removing those components of x
0'
X
(X,A)
into a
which do not contain
and then replace it by a homotopy equivalent pair
(X ’,A *)
such
ske, X 1 c= A ’ (see 1.4.6 and 2.3.3.1). Thus, we may assume that k ske, X c A. Now set Y = A U ske, 1X and consider the commutative k K +1 diagram that
Tk + 1 (Y,A,x q )
l =in*
P ’ = pr,
P
7Tk+1 (Y /A,Pr (XQ ) ) — --
Here
i , i ', and
p'
= prv
-» 7Tk +1 (X/A,pr(xQ)).
are epimorphic:
i
because
ske^^X c Y,
ske, 1 (X/A) c Y/A, and p' because of the proof above. K.+ 1 We claim that our diagram also satisfies the last condition of the i'
because
algebraic lemma:
Ker i' c
p'(Ker i) .
To see this, note that every (k+2)-cell from is the image under
p
of some cell
e
from
X ^ Y,
corresponding attaching map can be expressed as 2.4, this implies that
Ker i'
c p r j K e r inj ,
(X/A) \ (Y/A) and its
pr ° att0 . where
By Theorem
in* =
= [in*: TTk + 1 (Y,x0 ) ^k+ 1 (X,x0 )] and pr* = [pr* : ^k+ 1 (Y,x0 ) " -*• TTk + 1 (Y/A,pr (xQ) )] . Since the diagram in* Tk + 1 (X'x 0 ) rel.
rel^ ^k+i k ^ :
desired properties (see 2 .1.5. 6 and 1 .1 1 .2 ). To produce where Let
F B
(Xq/Xq),
is a free group if and
B'
TTn (B,bp) = F
n = 1,
tt
as a quotient group
F/F1,
and a free Abelian group if
n > 1.
be bouquets of n-dimensional spheres such that
and
,bp)
f: (B',bp) -+ (B,bp) TTn (B,bp)
write
= F'
(see 1.3 and 5.6).
be a continuous map such that
equals the inclusion
F * -> F
Further, let
f *: TTn (B',bp) -*
(one can construct such a map
out of a family of spheroids whose classes in
TT^(B,bp) = F
constitute
a free system of generators for F 1). Now replace each sphere in B* by the ball that it bounds and take X^ to be the result of attaching this new bouquet (of balls) to show that
Xq
and (ii) for
and
B
by
f.
Theorems 1.3, 5.6, and 2.3
xQ = imm^ (bp) [= imm2 (bp)]
satisfy conditions (i)
k = 0.
Assume that for some i ^ 1, pointed spaces ^Xk'xk^' k i' , , k < i-1 , are already constructed and satisfy conditions iC (ii), and (iii) . Represent Trn+i (Xi _ 1 / x i _ 1 ) as the quotient group
and maps (i),
of a free Abelian group, say
G,
and then construct a bouquet
(n+i)-dimensional spheres, together with a map such that G
g,
g*:
C
of
g: (C,bp) ->• (X± _ 1
. (C,bp) + tt (X ,x ) equals the projection n+ 1 n+ 1 1-1 1 “! tt . (X. „,x. „). [To establish the existence of such a C and a n+i i- 1 i- 1 one may procced as in the proof of the existence of B 1 and f tt
above; however, here Theorem 1.3 is not necessary.]
cellular
Now .replace each
* Translator's note. A space with such homotopy groups is known as a K(7T,n) -space or as a cellular space of type (7r,n).
)
460
sphere of
C
bouquet to
X. by g to obtain X.. 1^ I ~ 1 = imm2 . The fact that (X^x^)
and
4k
k = i,
by the ball that it bounds and then attach the resulting
and
(Jk
satisfies (iii)
Finally, set satisfies k = i- 1 ,
for
x
1
(i),
= inutu (X. .) ¿J_~l (ii) for
is a consequence of
2.3. 2.
Given an arbitrary group
2 , tt3, ...,
TTr (X) s 7Tr
0-cells
it
and arbitrary Abelian grou
there exists aconnected cellular space
X
such that
(r = 1 ,2, ...) .
PROOF. Let
X^,X2 ?...
x ,x ,...as
basepoints, such that the groups
1
z
trivial for
r i k,
cellular spaces
whereas
Yg,Y ,...
be connected cellular spaces
^(X^)
" 71^
(see 1).
tt
r
with
(X, ) K
are
Define inductively
and cellular embeddings
:
^ Yk +1
^
Yq = D°, Yk+1= Yk xc xk + 1' and ^ k (y) = (y,xk+1) * A p p ling Theorems 1.1.9 and 1.11.2, the space X = lim(X^,ipk ) has the desired properties.
8.
1.
If
Eight Instructive Examples
r > 1,
then the r-th homotopy group of a finite,
connected cellular space is not necessarily finitely generated (cf. 3.4). r 1 The bouquet (S ,ort^) V (S ,ort^) is a simple illustration of this phenomenon:
its r-th homotopy group (r > 1) is a free Abelian group r 1 of infinite rank. Indeed, (S jOrt^) V (S jort^ has a covering space which is homotopy equivalent to an infinite bouquet of r-dimensional spheres:
to produce such a space, attach one copy of
at each integer point of the real line INFORMATION.
Ker rel* Example:
in one point
HR .
The homotopy groups of a finite cellular space
with finite fundamental group are finitely generated. [19] . 2.
Sr
For a proof, see
Under the conditions of Theorem 1.6.6, the subgroup
= Im in* X
of
tt^(X,Xq )
is the bouquet of
is not necessarily normal two circles,
the center of the bouquet, and
p takes the
A
(cf. 1.5.14).
the first circle,
second circle into
xQ xQ .
3. Under the conditions of Theorem 1.6.7, the right splitting of the homotopy sequence of the pair (X,A) at tt (X,xQ) is not necessarily normal (cf. 1.5.17). 1
1
A = (S ,ort ^) V(S ,ort1)f h = [imm2 : S 1
X] °
[p^:
Example:
X = (D^ort ) V (S1,ort ), 1
1
Xq is the center of both bouquets, X ->S 1].
and
461
4. A
For any
k ^ 0
there exist k-connected pairs
connected, which are not (k+1)-simple; moreover,
of Theorem 6.2, and for any k ^ 0, ^k+l (X/A,pr (x q ))
5. A
is not necessarily Abelian, even when
and 1
X
i\2 (A)
The simplest example:
is the result
+ A
given 0,
=
pr* : tt
(X,A,xn) + k+ 1 U Example:
(cf. 1 and 3).
The second homotopy group of a pair
simply connected.
S
the epimornhism
A = imm2 (S1)
with
under the conditions
^-s not necessarily an isomorphism.
X = (Sk+ 1 ,ort1) V (S1 ,ortr),
(X,A)
(A)
it
1
1
A = S
(X,A)
with connected
is Abelian and X is M x S , xQ = (ort^ort^,
of attaching two copies of
D
2
to
A by the
maps
y h- (y ,ort ) and y *+ (ort1 ,y) • Then tt (A) = ZZ @ 2Z, I I 9 tt^ (X ) = 0, ^2 ( X) = 2Z (Xis homotopy equivalent to S ), by
and we have the exact sequence 0 -iS-*— > ZZ
rel* > tt2 (X,A,x0) —
which shows, in particular, that tt2 (X,A,Xq)
3
» E © ZZ
in-*— > 0, (5)
is epimorphic.
Assuming that
is Abelian, it follows from 1.4.7 that
identically on
- ^ ( X / A ^ q ),
tt^ (A,Xq)
whence, by Theorem 2.2,
acts
rank tt^ (X,A,x^) £ 2.
The latter contradicts the exactness of (5). I
6.
There exist 1-connected pairs
pr* : tt^ (X ,A ,X q ) X = D
2
,A = S
1
,
tt2 (X/A) s ZZ(X/A 7.
tt^ (X/A,pr
xn =
such that
(xQ)) is not even epimorphic.
ort . Here
(X,A) r 2 S ).
tt
is homeomorphic to For anyk > 2,
k-connectedcellular pairs
(X,A)
= 0for
r ^ 2,
there are (k—1)-connected (X,A)
with
X and
contractible.
Example: whereas
but not
A
connected and X/A 1 k 0 € ir^ ((S ,ort^)V(S ,ort^),bp)
To construct an example, let 1 k and a € tt, ((S ,ort ) V (S ,ort ) ,bp) designate the classes of the K I I 1 1 k k spheroids imm^ : S (S ,ort^)V (S ,ort^) and imm2 : S -*■ 1 k k +1 (S ,ort^) V (S ,ort^), respectively. Next, attach D to 1 k k 1 k (S ,ort1 ) V (S ,ort^) by an arbitrary spheroid S -+ (S ,ort^)V (S ,ort^) in the homotopy class
2a - Taa. Take the resulting cellular space as
and the circle
as
ske.X
A.
as the result of attaching to
id Sk ,
The quotient space X/A may be described k+ 1 k k k D to S by a map S -»■ S homotopic
which implies that
is evident that
X
and
A
X/A
is contractible (see 1.3.7.8 ).
are connected and that
(X,A)
a
= T^a (n = 0,±1,...),
while
(X)
It
is (k—1)-con
nected; therefore, it remains to check that tt, (X) is not trivial. 1 k 1 , iTk ((S ,ort 1 ) V (S ,ort1) ,bp) is a free Abelian group with free generators
X,
is the quotient
By
462
group of
tt ,
elements
2a
K.
1 k ((S ,ort ) V (S ,ort ) ,bp) I
by its subgroup generated by the
I
. (see 6.2). Consequently, n+ 1 the additive group of binary rational numbers. n
- a
8.
The homomorphism
by a continuous map
f: (X,A,xQ)
and
(ab f)* : tt (A,Xg)
tt^ (A ' to be any map in the class
Further, given arbitrary continuous maps
M
X,
it follows
from the same first part of Theorem 2 that if the compositions f o $ and f o (f)^ are homotopic, then so are cJ>Q and : indeed, take K
= M x
I,
l = (M x 0)
U (M x 1 ) ,
and
X,
and take for
anyhomotopy
cf)(x,0) = (J)q(x), cf)(x , 1 ) = (j>^ (x) , x € M, M x I X from f o (J)q to f o (j)^ .
ip
The Case of Cellular Spaces 4.
X
Tf
homotopy equivalence PROOF.
are cellular spaces, then every weak
X «+ Y
is a homotopy equivalence.
Suppose
By 3, the mapping there is a map
and Y
f: X + Y
tt (id,f ) : tt(Y,X)
g : Y -> X
into the class of
is a weak homotopy equivalence. -* tt(Y,Y)
whose homotopy class is taken by
idY .
That is to say,
and it remains to verify that
g ° f
same element (indeed, 5.
X -+ Y
Y,
f
og
o
id X .
Ti(id,f): tt(X,X)
f
and
Tr(id,f)
is homotopic to
this mappingtakes the homotopy classes of
into the
and
fog
is homotopic to
is a consequence of the invertibility of because
is invertible, and hence
f
g 0f
idY ,
The latter
tt(X,Y),
and
id X
are homotopic) .
Theorem 4 states that two connected cellular spaces,
X
are homotopy equivalent whenever there is a continuous map which induces isomorphisms of the homotopy groups, but it
certainly does not guarantee if theirhomotopy
that
X
and
Y
groups arejust isomorphic.
examples
to show that the latter is not true.
Y = Sq x
]RPP ,
and suppose that
1< p < q .
are homotopy equivalent In
fact, we have simple
Take
X = SP x ]RPq ,
By 2.5.1
and 1.1.9,
Tir (X) ~ equivalent.
f°r r * However, X and Y are not homotopy Indeed, the map pr^ : Sp x nRpq + s p induces a group
isomorphism
tt
continuous map
P
(Sp
3RPq ) -> tt (Sp ) . We next show that there is no Q p P p f : S^1 x ORP*^ -> S- which induces a group isomorphism x
(Sq x 1RPP ) •> tt (Sp ) . P P composition it
SP _£2L_ mpP
Assuming that such an
*
induces an automorphism of every continuous map
(ort1rx), ir (Sp ) .
1RPP -> Sp
f
sq x mpP
exists, the
gP
On the other hand (by 2.3.2.4),
is homotopic to a map which takes
(1)
466
IRpP"1
into
ort ,
and
thus(1) ishomotopic
the composite projectionSP -+ 3RPP continuous map
SP
SP .
to the composition of
IRPP /IRPP^ = Sp
Consequently,
with some
(1) cannot have degree
since the above composite projection has degree
0
when
p
±1,
is even
and degree
2 when p is odd. Contradiction. The following example illustrates the same phenomenon in the 3 °° 2 simply connected case. Set X = S x (CP and Y = S . By 2.2.10,
2.5.2,
and 1.1.9,
(X) ~ tt (Y) for all r. However, X and Y have ^ 3 00 3 not the same homotopy type. Indeed, or : S x EP S is not null 1 3 °° homotopic (because it induces a group isomorphism tt^ (S x £p ) = S ■> 3 2 3 -> (S ) = 2Z) . On the other hand, every continuous map S -► S is tt
null homotopic. 6.
We say that a topological space is homotopy fit if it is
homotopy equivalent to a cellular space. if
X
X -> Y fit
and
Y
From Theorem 4 it follows that
are homotopy fit, then every weak homotopy equivalence
i£ a homotopy equivalence. By Theorem 3.5.2.13, all smooth compact manifolds are homotopy
.
An example of a space whichis not homotopy fit was given in 2.3.5.4.
This space is not connected.
(and even ^-connected) space which is INFORMATION.
Every CNRS is
For an'example of a connected not homotopy fit, see 4.1 below. homotopy fit, and the same holds
true for every topological manifold (compact or not). homotopy fit spaces is homotopy fit. C(X,Y)
If
Y
is homotopy fit for any compact space
A product of
is homotopy fit, then X.
homotopy type of acountable cellular space, then
If
Y
C(X,Y)
has the homotop has the
homotopy type of acountable cellular space, for any compact space with countable base.
X
For proofs, see [16].
k-Equivalence 7. f: X
Y
Let X
and
Y
be topological spaces.
is a k-equivalence if, for all
is an isomorphism for
r < k
x E X,
A continuous
f * : Trr (X,x)
and an epimorphism for
r = k.
tt
map (Y,f(x))
Here
k
is a nonnegative integer; sometimes, weak homotopy equivalences are referred to as “-equivalences. A composition of two k-equivalences is obviously a k-equivalence. 8.
Let f: X ■+ Y
be a k-equivalence.
Then for any cellular
467
pair
(K,L)
4*: L -> X
withK \ L c:
with
ske^K
x |L = ^
true;
moreover, if f : X -> Y
for any continuous maps X
r _i sr
=
^
(j>: K -> Y
and
f o\p = (j)|t there is a continuous map y : K X such ,Li • — and f © ^ is L-homotopic to c(>. The converse is also
that
f ° $ =
and continuous maps
is continuous and has the property that
cf).: Dr
Y
and
ip:
Sr~1 -> X
(0 £ r £ k)
with
r_ 1
there is a continuous map y : Dr -> X such that r- 1 and f ° x is S -homotopic to , then f is a
S
k-equivalence. The proof repeats that of Theorem 2, with obvious changes: in the first pair, the pair second part, to see that (respectively, 9. M
Ij£
with
f*
is now k-connected; in the
is epimorphic (monomorphic), we take
r£ k
r < k).
Tr(id,f): tt(M,X) space
(Cyl f ,X)
f: X
Y
7T(M, Y) dim M
is a k-equivalence, then the mapping is invertible (surjective) for any cellular
< k
(respectively,
dimM = k) .
The proof repeats that of Theorem 3, except that we need Theorem 8 instead of Theorem 2. 10. dim Y
£ k,
rf
X
and
Y
are cellular spaces with
then every k-equivalence
X
Y
dim X
< k
and
is a homotopy equivalence.
The proof repeats that of Theorem 4, except that we need Theorem 9 instead of Theorem 3.
The Relative Case 11. map
If
f: (X,A) -+ (Y,B)
abs f : X + Y
and
all
r ^ 1
abf (=ababs f) :
(Y ,B )
f * : Tir (X,A,x) ->
and all
x G A.
A -+ B
are topological pairs, a conti
are weak homotopy equivalences.
f: (X,A) -+ (Y,B)
is a weak homotopy
(Y ,B ,f (x))
is an isomorphism for
To see this, apply the 5-Lemma (see 1.5.19)
to the homomorphism induced by (X,A)
and
is said to be a weak homotopy equivalence if
We remark that if equivalence, then
(X,A)
f
from the homotopy sequence of the pair
into the homotopy sequence of the pair
(Y,B).
As another
corollary of the 5-Lemma, we have the following result: suppose that f: (X,A^0) -> (Y ,B ) ab f : A
B
is continuous, that one of the maps
is a weak homotopy equivalence, and that for any
the homomorphisms
f*
ttq (X,x ) + 7Tq (Y ,f (x) ) , isomorphisms.
abs f : X
Then
f
:TTr (X,A,x) -* and
(Y ,B ,f (x)) ,
r > 1,
(abf)* :ttq (A,x) -> TrQ (B,f(x))
is a weak homotopy equivalence.
x £ A
(absf)* : are
Y, all
468
12.
Ij[
f: (X,A) ■+ (Y,B)
then the mapping
ir(id,f): tt(M,N;X,A) -*■ n (M,N;Y,B)
any cellular pair
(M,N)
(Y ,B)
Let us show first that every continuous map is homotopic to the composition of some continuous map
with
f.
By 2, there is a continuous map
whose composition with
ab f : A -+ B
Using 2.3.1.3, any homotopy from a homotopy of to
(p
Xwith
and
produce a continuous map r— 1 is S -homotopic to 0
such that any
with diameter less than e is contained in U or V. r— 1 Now triangulate S so that the diameter of each simplex is less than e,
D
and then extend the triangulation to
Let
K
V) .
It is clear that
that
(L)
D ,
preserving this property.
be the union of all simplices contained in
ip (Kn Sr
K
and
L
(respectively,
are simplicial subspaces of
1) c Int A , \p (L D Sr 1) c Int B ,
X
to be the map assembled from
to be
nr (yr ^ ) -
Applying Theorems 3.2.3
an r-equivalence, and it is clear that a cellular embedding. 3.
Let
topological spaces continuous map.
X
and
(K,^(g)
along the
Consequently, the
TTr (K,x) K
T Tj.ipr? 1 (bQ ) , (x) ) commutes
» TTr (pr £-1 (b1 ) ,ip (x) )
(the translation
T~ is defined in 1.7.3). Since T ~ is an s s isomorphism, the invertibility of * implies the invertibility of ip*.
Cellular Approximations of Topological Pairs 7.
A cellular approximation of the topological pair
is any pair
[(K,L ) ,] space
A
of
(X,A)
(K,L)
(p:
L
(K,L) anda weak
(X,A).
are points, a cellular approximation
is termed a cellular approximation of the pointed
(X,A ) . 8.
Every topological pair
approximations. the subspace (X,A)
and
consisting of a cellular pair
(X,A)
with
A,
there is a cellular approximation
Let
( M,x)
be a cellular map such that
X] ° ip (see 3 and 2.3.2.4).
homotopy
x
[(K,L) , ]
be a cellular approximation of
be the relativization of the map L x I ->
(L,i/0
of
of
ip = ab cj).
g: LM
[in: A
admits cellular
Moreover, given any cellular approximation
PROOF. and let
(X,A)
from
[in: A -> X] o ^
equivalence and
Set
K + X to
ab
is a weak
476
9.
Let
[(K ,L ) ,]
and
)
[(K',L 1) , lJ
N x I
[M, K
fl B)
and (B,B fl A),
L'J
|_Mr by the map
to
(x,0) h*in ^ (x ) ,
the resulting cellular space with their images in
(A,A
K.
and set
[(L*,N),(j)] as shown by 8.
(x ,1 ) *+ in2 (x),
Now identify
N x I,
L = (N x I) u Lj
(N,x)/
and call
L',
and
M*
M = ( N x i ) U M l.
The composite maps Pr 1
N x I L1 —
J »n — > A -^2— > X,
jointly define the map = K
and
homotopy
*A 0 B —
ab f : L -+ A,
and
M1
f: (K,L,M)
— ► X, ^ > B —^ — > X (X,A,B) . Obviously,
ab f : M -+ B, and
equivalences. Therefore, so is
Int L
a b f : L fl M + A fl B absf : K + X
U Int M = are weak
(see 2.2 and
2.4) . 12.
The homomorphism
[tt1 (A,xQ ) * tt1 (B,X q )]/vk (X,A, B ,X q ) ->- tt^ X jX q ), defined in 3 . 3 . 5 ,
is an isomorphism not only for a cellular triad
(X,A,B)
with
but also
for any triad (X,A,B)
and either
A, B, A n B
Int A
(2)
connected (as
U Int B = X
or
assertedby Theorem 3 . 3 . 6 ) ,
such that (A,A fl B)
A, B, A n B
are connected
is a Borsuk pair.
In fact,
this follows from Theorem 3 . 3 . 6 and Lemma 11, since the homomorphism (2) is natural. In particular, we see that the fundamental group of the bouquet of two spaces is canonically isomorphic to the free product of the fundamental groups of these spaces under the only assumption that each space forms, together with its base point, a Borsuk pair (cf. 3.3.7).
13.
Concerning Theorem 3.5.5, we can weaken the demand that
478
the pairs pairs.
(X ,x ) y
be cellular and instead ask only that they be Borsuk
y
That this is possible is guaranteed by Theorem 8, the discussion
of bouquets in 10, an the commutativity of diagram (3) in 3.5.1. 14.
Theorem 3.6.2 and its corollary 3.6.3 are valid not on
for cellular pairs, but also for arbitrary Borsuk pairs.
This
generalization follows from Theorem 8 and the last statement on quotients in 10.
4.
Exercises
1. Consider the union X x
sin(1/x)
on the interval
of the graph of the function
0 < x £ 1/tt and
the broken line made of
the four segments with the successive vertices (-1,0), and (0,0). 2. Let spaces
Show that
[(A x S )
and
Y = Aj
HR
(cf. 4.2.4.2) . 1
[(2Z x S )
3. Let I
X
Y
X.
denote the subset of
Show that
Show that the
X -> Y,
and no
(Cf. 3.5.) 3 * IRconsisting of the segment
and the sequence of segments withendpoints
(n = 1,2,...).
(-1,2),
are weakly homotopy
equivalent, but there is no weak homotopy equivalence weak homotopy equivalence
(1 /tt ,2 ) ,
is «-connected but not homotopy fit. (Cf. 1 .6)
A={0,2n |nEZ}c= 1
X = Sj
X
( 1 / tt, 0 ) ,
n
(X,(x^,x2 ,x^) x^,I)
ort^ , ort^ + ort^/n is a Serrebundle, but
there exists fibers which are not homotopy equivalent. 4. Z
Suppose
(X,Xq),
(Y,y^)
is a cellular space with a 0-cell
is a weak homotopy equivalence with abC(id,f): (Cf. 2.8.)
C(Z,Xq ,*X,Xq )
C(Z,ZQ;Y,yQ)
§5.
1. 1.
are pointed topological spaces, z^ for base point, and = Yq •
f: X
Y
Show that
is a weak homotopy equivalence.
THE WHITEHEAD PRODUCT
The Class
wd(m,n)
In this section we define and study some of the propert
of an operation on the elements of homotopy groups.
In a certain sense,
this operation generalizes the action of the fundamental group on the
479
homotopy groups.
The definition assumes that a pair
m,n
of positive
integers is given. The present subsection is devoted to a very specific preliminary construction.
Recall (see 2. 1.3.2 and 2. 1.5.2) that the
cellular decomposition of
Sm x sn ,
decompositions of
Sm
and
Sn
determined by the standard
(each having two cells) consists of
four cells: an (m+n)-cell and three other cells which form the bouquet (Sm ,ort^) V (Sn ,ort^). by
B.
We denote this bouquet by B(m,n)or, simply,
The standard characteristic map of the (m+n)-cell
composition of the canonical homeomorphism with the map
DS x D S ;
it takes
Sm+n ^
Dm+n into
is the
Dm x Dn B,
(see 1.2.6.9)
and takes the point
(ort. + ort ^->//2 into bp = (ort.,ortJ. Therefore, this characteris1 m+1 1 1 tic map defines an element of the group 7Tm + n ^s x Sn /B,bp) (see 2.2.5), which we call
Wd(m,n)
or, simply,
Wd.
Also, we write
simply, wd, for the element 9 (Wd) € ^m+n-l^B 'kp)/ the attaching spheroid Sm+n ^ B. We need two additional notations: B(m,n) -> B(n,m)
which
of the spheroids 2.
permutes
imm^
Sm
and
0
wd
or,
i.e., the class of
for the homeomorphism
Sn ,
and
,imm2 :(S^ort^) + (B(m,n),bp)
The class
wd(m,n)
yfor theproduct when m = n.
has infinite order.
It is enough to establish that
Wd
is of infinite order and
that 3: % +n (sm x Sn 'B 'bP> -
is
monomorphic.
The first is a consequence of the fact that the homo
morphism pr* : % + n (sin x Sn 'B 'bP> takes
Wd
^ m + n ^ 3"1 * sn)/B=Sm+n'Pr (hp) ) =
into a generator of the right-hand group.
The second claim
follows from the exactness of the homotopy sequence of the pair (Sm x s n ,B) it
m+n
with base point
(Sm x sn ,bp) 3.
takes
wd(m,n)
because
in*: iTm + n (B,bp) +
is epimorphic (see 3.5.4).
The isomorphism into
bp,
0*: 1Tm+n_-|
(m,n) ,bp)
7Tm+n_i
(-1)mnwd(n,m).
This results from the commutativity of the diagram
s„m+n-1
B (m,n)
. „m+n-1 > ^
0
B (n,m)
(n,m) ,bp)
480
where the vertical maps are the attaching spheroids which represent the classes
wd(m,n)
and
is given by (x., is (-1)mn). 4.
If_
wd
(n,m) (see
xm+n) h- (*m + r
m = 1,
1), while the upper horizontal map xm+n 'X 1 ' '’'' V
(and itS de^ree
then
wd(m,n) = imm~.(sph ' 2* ^ n )[T.lmra^(sph^)^imm0 2*. (sphn )] In particular, ,a2
wd(1,1) =
c^ct^c^ a
denote the elements PROOF.
spheroid
Sn
—1
,
where (as in Subsection 3.1),
imm^ * (sph.|) ,imm2* (sph ^) £ tt^ (B (1 ,1 ) ,bp) .
According to 1,
wd(1,n)
is represented by the
B(1,n), imm^ o D S f / J x ^
,
, ...,x )) , imm.Z ° DS (/2 (x0 Z n+1
if
|x^| £ 1/ /2,
if
|x | 5 1//2. 1
This is obviously homotopic to the product of the spheroid bp,
if
x^ £ 1//2, (1 )
imm2 » DS (/2 (x2 , .. .,xn+1 )) ,
if
x1 5 1 / Æ
if
x 1 £ -1//2,
with the spheroid obtained by translating the spheroid imm2 o DS (/2 (x2 ,...,xn+1)) ,
(2 )
(X1.... Xn+1> * bp, along the path class of (1) is
t
if x^ ^ -1//2,
imm. ° DS(1-2t). Now it remains to observe that the ' _1 imm2*(sphn ), the class of (2) is [imir^* (sph^) ] ,
and the class of the above path is The class wd(m,n) following three homomorphisms:
belongs to the kernel of each of the
p r l * : ^ m + n - l (B'b P> pr2*:
V n - 1 , B ' b P>
"
imm^*(sph^).
rort^), % +n - 1 ( S n ' o r t 1 ) '
and in* : V n - i (B'bp) ■* w For
in*/
sequence of the pair
i
(sm x sn'bp)
this results from the exactness of the homotopy (Sm x Sn ,B)
with base point
bp.
For the first
481
and the second homomorphisms, use the equalities = tPr 1 : Sm x Sn + Sm ] o in 6.
and
^m+n-l((Sm'ortl) ^ (B(n,n),bp),bp)
now let
(is S takes
[(idSm
V imm^ )* (wd (m,n) )] [(id Sm
PROOF.
When
m > 1
and
n > 1.
or
n = 1
The bouquet
(id Sm
V imm^)*(wd(m,n)) .
wd(m,n)
into
V imm2)*(wd(m,n))] .
(Sm ,ort^) V (B(n,n),bp)
two (m+n)-cells with attaching spheroids (id Sm
V y)*: ^m+n_>| (B (m, n ) ,bp)
this follows from 4 and 3;
simply connected, and it yields the product belonging to the classes
Sm ] =
[pr2 : B ->• Sn ] = [pr2 : Sm x S11 + Sn] ° in.
The homomorphism
m = 1
[pr^: B
Sm x B(n,n)
is
when we add
Sm+n ^ + (Sm ,ort^) V (B(n,n),bp)
V imm^)*(wd(m,n))
and
Consequently, the kernel of the homomorphism
in* : ^m+n-l ^(sm^orti) v (B(n,n) ,bp) ,bp) + n +n-1 (S™ x B(n,n),bp) is generated by the indicated classes. class
(id Sm
V y )*(wd(m,n)).
This kernel contains also the
To see this, note that
wd(m,n)
the kernel of the homomorphism induced by the inclusion (see 5), while id Sm x y ; sm x (id Sm
id Sm V y sn - sm x
is the compression of the map B(n,n). Therefore,
k^ ,k^ £ 2Z ,
k V imm^)* (wd (m,n) )] [(idSm
V pr2) ° (id Sm
B(n,n)
onto
(id Sm
V pr^ )© (id Sm
= id B (m,n ) , (id Sm
Sn ,
k? V imm2 )* (wd (m, n) )] , (3)
and we shall presently show that
The compositions (id Sm
(idSm
V y) ,
V pr^ ) o (id Sm
where
pr^, pr2
are both homotopic to V imm1) =
while both
V pr2)o (id Sm
(id Sm
(id S™
V imrn^ )
pr B(m,n) --- 1 — >S
k^ = V y)
idB(m,n) .
At the same time,
V pr2) o (id Sm
V imm2 ) =
V pr1) ° (id Sm V imm2)
7. homomorphism
The class
and
imm ---- ! — ► B(m,n).
w d (m ,n ) = wd(m,n) k^ = 1,
and
are the projections of
(id Sm
V pr^)*
and
(idS
to both members of (3) and using Proposition 5, we get
by virtue of 2,
= 1.
equal the composition
Now applying the homomorphisms k1 = wd(m,n ) ,
B(m,n) -> Sm x Sn
Vy)*(w d (m ,n )) =
= [(id Sm with
sits in
k2
.
wd(m,n) =
Finally, these equalities yield,
k2 = 1. wd(m,n)
V pr2 )*
belongs to the kernelof the
482
su:
tt
„ (B(m,n),bp) ■> tt (su (B (m, n ),bp) =B (m+1 ,n+1 ) ,bp) . m+n-1 m+n
PROOF.
By 2.1.1, the diagram pr
Pr -|* ^m+n_-, (B(m,n),bP )
7rm+n- 1 (Sm'ort 1 )
,_m+1
commutes.
I ) % . /Cn (S ,ort. m+n-1 1
tt
su
SU
su .
pr 1* —
.
'ort 1 >
^m+n
2
n +1 r ort 1 ) m+n (S
^ 21 , (B (m+1 ,n + 1) ,bp) --m+n
tt
tt
This, combined with Theorem 5, shows that
belongs to the kernels of
pr^*
and
pr^*/
su(wd(m,n))
and thus to the kernel of
the homomorphism % +n (B(m+1'n+1)'bp) ^ 1Im+ n (sin+1'ort1) ® TTm + n (Sn+1 'orV given by
pr^*
and
Pr2*-
Finally, recall that the last homomorphism
is an isomorphism (see 3.5.5).
2.
Definition and the Simplest
Properties of the Whitehead Product 1.
Let
a £ tt^^Xq),
(X,Xq )
3 £ tt^^Xq).
h: (B,bp) -+ (X,Xq) and
be a pointed topological space, and let
defined by arbitrary spheroids
(S ,ort1) -+ (X,Xq)
representing
choice of these spheroids. is determined
Clearly, the homotopy class of the map
of a
and
is independent of the
3
Therefore, the element h* (wd(m,n))£ Tim+n_^ (X,x^)
solely by the classes
the Whiteheadproduct
a
(Sm ,ort^) -+ (X,Xq)
and
a
3,
and
g.
denoted
This element is called
[oc,3 ] .
Notice that in terms of this definition,
wd(m,n)
the Whitehead product of the classes of the spheroids n (B,bp) and imn^ : (S jort^) -* (B,bp), i.e.,
itself is
imm : (Sm ,ort1) -*
wd(m,n) = [imm. . (sph ),imm0 .(sph )]. 1* m z* n It is readily cheked that any
a £ ^¡ji(X ,Xq ) ,
Furthermore, and any path
T
2. [6,a]
8 £ iTn (X,x0),
( [ a , 3] )
s : I -+X If =
a
£
=
[T
and continuous
3] for any s s(0) = X q .
a,T
s
with tt^ ( X
f*([a,3]) = [f* (a),f* (3)]
,Xq )
( - 1 ) mn [ a , 3] .
and
3 £
a
£
iTn ( X , x 0 ) ,
for
f: (X,xQ ) tt
m
(X,xn ), u
then
3
(Y,yQ ). £
tt
n
(X,x_),
U
483
Indeed, spheroids, the classes
if
h: (B,bp) -+ (X,Xq )
(S ,ort^) ■> (X,x^) and a and 6, then
[6,a]
=(h
is the map defined by two
(Sn ,ort^)
(X,x^)
© 0)*(wd(n,m)) = h * (0*(wd(n,m))
which represent
=
= h * ( (-1)mnwd(m,n)) = (-1) mn [a , 8 ] (see 1.3). 3.
If
a £
then
[a,31 + B~]
and
B £ ^n(X'x q ) ,
\
(X,Xq )
and
G Un^X,X0^
= [a,B ] + [a,8-]. i z
z
then
If
with
n > 1,
a ,a„ € tt (x,xn ) with i z m o ----
[a1 + a ^ B ] = [a ,B]
ra> 1
+ [a2 ,S] .
Because of 2, one has to prove only the first equality. Consider the map
h: ((Sm ,ort.j) V (B(n,n) ,bp) ,bp)
arbitrary spheroids, ->■ (X,Xq ) ,
f: (Sm ,ort1) -► (X,xQ)
representing the classes
Then the map
(B(m,n),bp) -*■ (X,Xq)
and
a
and f
h
o (id Sm V imm^),
the map defined by
h
° (idSm V imn^) ,
and finally the map defined
of the spheroids [a,B1
g^ +B21
and
g2
equals
g ^ ,g 2 :
8.j,82 ,
defined by f
(X,xQ )
and
g^
g2
equals
by
f
h ° (idSm V y) .
= h*((idSmV imm^ )* (wd (m,n) ) + (idSm
(Sn ,ort1) -►
respectively.
and
= h* o (idSm V y)*(wd(m,n))
Hence,
=
Vimm2)*(wd(m,n))) =
V imm^ ))* (wd (m,n) ) +
+ (h o (idSm
V imm2 ) )* (wd (m,n) ) = [a,8.|] + [a,B2].
If^
[a,8] = B(Ta6)
-1
a £
.
tt^ (X,Xq)
and 8 £ TTn (X,xQ )
In particular,
[ot,B] = 8aB
equals
and the product
= (h o (idSm
4.
definedby
with
-1 -1 a
n S 1,
then
for any
a, B £ tt^ (X ,X q ) . This is a corollary of 1.4. 5.
[a,B]
For any■*- a £ tmt (X,x„) and x „), the -----u --- B £ tt_(X, n u ----product ------belongs to the kernel of the homomorphism su: TTm+n_1 (X,xQ ) -+
TT (su (X,xn ) ,bp) . m+n u This is a corollary of 1.7. 6.
For any
[imm1* (a),imm2 (B)]
a £ TTm (X,xQ) and
B £
the product
belongs to the kernel of each of the homomorphisms:
484
V n - i ((x'xo) v (Y' V ' bp) + W Pr 2* :
V n - 1 (,X ' x 0 )
V
(X,xQ)
is the identity. be spheroids in
(X,Xq ) by
h(x,y)
and spheroids = f(x)g(y),
f1 (y) = f (y)x q /